Skip to main content

Full text of "Journal and proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales"

See other formats


93^ 


Journal  and  Proceedings 
of  the 

Royal  Society 
of 

New  South  Wales 

2016 

Volume  149  Parts  1  &2 
Numbers  459  to  462 

for  the  encouragetnent  of  studies  and  invest^flons  in  Science  Art  Litetalure  and  Philosophy 


The  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 


Office  Bearers  for  2016 

His  Excellency  General  The  Honourable  David  Hurley  AC  DSC  (Ret’d) 

Governor  of  New  South  Wales 

Em.  Prof.  David  Brynn  Hibbert  BSc  PhD  CChem  FRSC  FRACI  FRSN 
Mr  John  Hardie  BSc  (Syd),  FGS,  MACE  FRSN 

Dr  Donald  Hector  BE(Chem)  PhD  (Syd)  FIChemE  FIEAust  FAICD  FRSN 
Ms  Judith  Wheeldon  AM,  BS  (Wis)  MEd  (Syd)  FACE  FRSN 
Em.  Prof.  Robert  Marks,  BE,  MEngSci,  ResCert,  MS,  PhD  (Stan.)  FRSN 
Dr  Herma  Buttner  PhD 
Mr  Richard  Wilmott 
Dr  Ragbir  Bhathal  PhD  FSAAS 
Dr  Erik  W.  Aslaksen  MSc  (ETH)  PhD  FRSN 
Dr  Mohammad  Choucair  PhD 
Prof.  Max  Crossley  PhD  FAA  FRAC  FRSN 
Dr  Desmond  Griffin  PhD  AM  FRSN 
Prof.  Stephen  HiU  PhD  AM  FTSE  FRSN 

Em.  Prof.  Heinrich  Hora  DipPhys  Dr.rer.nat  DSc  FAIP  FInstP  CPhys 
FRSN 

Prof.  E  James  Kehoe  PhD  FRSN 

Em.  Prof  Roy  MacLeod  AB  (Harv)  PhD,  LittD  (Cantab)  FSA  FALIA 
FASSA  FRHistS  FRSN 
Prof.  Bmce  Milthorpe  PhD  FRSN 
Prof.  Ian  Sloan  AO  PhD  FAA  FRSN 
Hon.  Prof.  Ian  Wilkinson  FRSN 
A/Prof.  Chris  Bertram  PhD  FRSN  (by  invitation) 

Mr  Hubert  Regtop 

Executive  Office  The  Association  Specialists 

Editorial  Board 

Em.  Prof.  Robert  Marks,  BE,  MEngSci,  ResCert,  MS,  PhD  (Stan.)  FRSN  -  Hon.  Editor 
Prof.  Richard  Banati  MD  PhD  FRSN 

Prof.  Michael  Burton  BA  MA  MMaths  (Cantab)  PhD  (Edinb)  FASA  FAIP  FRSN 
Dr  Donald  Hector  BE(Chem)  PhD  (Syd)  FIChemE  FIEAust  FAICD  PRSN 
Em.  Prof.  David  Brynn  Hibbert  BSc  PhD  (Lond)  CChem  FRSC  FRACI  FRSN 
Dr  Michael  Lake  BSc  (Syd)  PhD  (Syd) 

Dr  Nick  Lomb  BSc  (Syd)  PhD  (Syd)  FASA  FRSA 
Prof.  Timothy  Schmidt  BSc  (Syd)  PhD  (Cantab)  FRSN 

Website:  http:  /  / www.royalsoc.org.au 

The  Society  traces  its  origin  to  the  ^Philosophical  Society  of  Australasia  founded  in  Sydney  in  1821.  The  Society  exists  for  ‘VA  encouragement  of 
studies  and  investigations  in  Science  Art  Uterature  and  Philosophy publishing  results  of  scientific  investigations  in  its  Journal  and  Proceedings; 
conducting  monthly  meetings;  awarding  prizes  and  medals;  and  by  liaising  with  other  learned  societies  within  Australia  and 
internationally.  Membership  is  open  to  any  person  whose  application  is  acceptable  to  the  Society.  Subscriptions  for  the  Journal  are  also 
accepted.  The  Society  welcomes,  from  members  and  non-members,  manuscripts  of  research  and  review  articles  in  aU  branches  of 
science,  art,  literature  and  philosophy  for  publication  in  the  Journal  and  Proceedings. 


Patron 

President 
Vice  Presidents 

Hon.  Secretary  (Ed.) 
Hon.  Secretary  (Gen.) 
Hon.  Treasurer 
Hon.  Librarian 
Councillors 


Web  Master 
Southern  Highlands 
Branch  Representative 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  1-4.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010001-04 


Editorial 

Robert  E.  Marks 


Finally,  the  first  issue  of  the  JProcRSNSW 
under  the  new  editorship.  Several 
papers:  the  outgoing  presidents  address  by 
Don  Hector,  the  W.  B.  Clarke  Memorial 
Lecture  by  Griffin  et  ah,  the  Liversidge  Lec¬ 
ture  by  Banwell  et  ah,  a  paper  by  the  late 
Commonwealth  Statistician,  Ian  Castle,  on 
one  of  the  most  illustrious  members  of  the 
Royal  Society  and  its  forerunner,  the  Philo¬ 
sophical  Society  of  N.S.W.,  the  forgotten 
polymath,  William  Stanley  Jevons,  scientist 
and  economist,  followed  by  a  paper  of  mine 
which  puts  Jevons’  activities  in  the  Society 
into  context  and  updates  Castle’s  article  with 
some  recent  debates  about  the  implications 
of  Jevons’  work  for  energy  policy.  The  last 
paper  is  by  Foster,  a  Royal  Society  Scholar¬ 
ship  winner  There  are  also  16  abstracts  of 
recent  doctoral  dissertations  from  several 
N.S.W  universities. 

The  delay  in  publishing  this  issue  is  due  to 
two  things.  First,  the  handover  took  place 
in  May,  with  few  accepted  papers.  Second, 
I  threw  myself  into  indexing  the  contents  of 
past  issues  back  to  1 866  and  before,  making 
the  index  accessible  to  Google’s  indexing 
robots  (which  has  now  happened),  and 
making  the  contents  of  past  articles  readily 
accessible  to  anyone  on  the  Internet. 

This  process  would  not  have  been  feasible 
without  the  work  done  by  past  editors  and 
librarians  of  the  Society,  the  Biodiversity 
Heritage  Library  (the  host  on  the  on-line 
repository  of  the  Journal),  the  Smithsonian 
Libraries,  the  Missouri  Botanical  Garden 
Peter  H.  Raven  Library,  the  Harvard  Uni¬ 
versity  Museum  of  Comparative  Zool¬ 
ogy  Ernst  Mayr  Library,  the  University  of 


California  Libraries,  the  Leland  Stanford  Jr. 
University  Library,  the  Wayback  Machine’s 
Internet  Archive,  and  the  National  Library 
of  Australia’s  incomparable,  but  threatened, 
Trove  on-line  archive  of  Australian  mate¬ 
rial  back  to  first  European  settlement.  For 
the  on-line  repositories  of  the  Journal,  past 
issues  were  scanned  to  PDF  and  placed  on¬ 
line  in  large  files,  one  per  issue  or  volume. 
These  were  embedded  in  a  viewing  platform 
which  includes  Optical  Character  Recogni¬ 
tion  output. 

Readers  can  see  the  format  of  the  main 
repository  by  going  to  the  Journal  Archive 
page  of  the  Journal’s  contents,  at  the  Society’s 
web  pages. 

Clicking  on  a  volume  and  then  a  paper 
reveals  a  PDF  of  each  page  with  a  plain¬ 
text  OCR  on  the  right  (when  clicked  on). 
Although  the  files  are  large,  each  page  (cor¬ 
responding  to  a  page  published  in  the  hard¬ 
copy  version  of  the  Journal)  has  a  unique 
URL,  which  allows  us  to  link  the  initial  page 
of  the  3,1 10  articles  in  the  Journal  smct  1867. 
I  used  plaintext  versions  of  each  issue’s  con¬ 
tents  to  derive  the  pages  of  the  contents  of 
each  volume.  These  contents  pages,  roughly 
one  a  year,  enable  an  on-line  index  for  the 
Journal’s  contents,  with  the  URLs  providing 
the  links  to  each  paper. 

The  index  of  articles  and  papers  starts  in 
1822,  forty  years  before  the  Royal  Society 
was  granted  its  letters  patent,  when  the  first 
forerunner  of  the  Society,  the  Philosophical 
Society  of  Australia,  was  active,  under  the 
patronage  of  the  Governor,  Sir  Thomas  Bris¬ 
bane.  At  that  time  there  was  no  dedicated 
publication  for  the  Society’s  papers  (that 


1 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Marks  —  Editorial 


would  have  to  wait  for  over  thirty  years),  but 
some  papers  presented  to  the  Society  were 
published  as  chapters  in  a  book  published  in 
London  in  1825,  edited  by  a  former  member 
of  the  Society,  Barron  Field,  a  lawyer.  This 
book  is  now  in  the  public  domain  and  its 
contents  have  been  made  available  on-line 
as  part  of  the  Gutenberg  Project.  i 

After  thirty  years  of  little  if  any  activity, 
the  Philosophical  Society  of  New  South 
Wales  began  in  1856,  under  the  patronage 
of  the  new  governor.  Sir  William  Denison, 
an  engineer.  Some  papers  were  published 
in  the  Sydney  newspapers,  especially  Henry 
Parkes’  The  Empire,  and  are  now  available 
on  Trove.  There  were  two  other  outlets  for 
papers  in  the  1850s  and  early  1860s:  a  com¬ 
mercial  monthly.  The  Sydney  Magazine  of 
Science  and  Art,  published  papers  from  the 
Society  and  other  learned  groups  for  the 
two  years  it  was  in  existence.  It  too  is  freely 
available  on-line.  The  Philosophical  Society 
of  N.S.W.  also  published  the  Transactions  of 
the  Philosophical  Society  ^Tom  1862  to  1865, 
and  this  too  is  available  on-line.  In  1867 
the  Journal  of  the  Royal  Society  first  appeared, 
and  has  done  so  ever  since.  Perhaps  some¬ 
one  will  use  this  newly  accessible  resource 
to  write  a  paper  analysing  how  the  contents, 
authorship  (numbers,  sexes),  etc  of  papers 
have  changed  over  the  past  110+  years. 

In  1955,  the  president  of  the  Society, 
Ronald  Nyholm,  mused  about  the  three 
phases  of  the  Society,  as  reflected  in  sub¬ 
missions  to  the  Journal: 


1  The  Gutenberg  Project  s  copy  appears  to  come  from 
the  Stanford  library,  although  Stanford  University 
was  only  founded  in  the  1 890s.  It  turns  out  at  that 
Thomas  Welton  Stanford,  brother  of  Leland  Stanford, 
the  railroad  baron  who  founded  Stanford,  lived  in 
Australia  for  many  years  and  amassed  a  library  of  Aus- 
traliana,  which  he  bequeathed  to  the  University.  (I 
thank  Jessica  Milner  Davis  for  this  sleuthing.) 


“Broadly  speaking,  the  history  of  the  Soci¬ 
ety  falls  into  three  periods.  Before  the  first 
world  war  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South 
Wales  was  the  main  scientific  society  in 
Sydney,  at  least  so  far  as  the  physical  sci¬ 
ences  were  concerned.  The  Society  was,  for 
scientific  people,  an  important  means  of 
mutual  contact,  discussion  and  the  Journal 
received  many  of  their  original  researches. 
Between  the  two  world  wars  there  were 
founded  in  Sydney  many  specialist  scien¬ 
tific  bodies  or  branches  of  older  ones,  such 
as  the  Institute  of  Physics  and  the  Royal 
Australian  Chemical  Institute,  the  meet¬ 
ings  of  which  catered  for  discussions  of 
specialist  subjects.  Nevertheless,  many  of 
the  original  papers  of  these  specialist  still 
found  their  way  to  our  Journal.  Thus,  the 
1 940  Journal  was  one  of  the  largest  ever, 
and  in  it  were  38  research  papers.  There 
were  23  chemistry  papers,  4  in  mathemat¬ 
ics  and  9  in  geology.  After  the  Second 
World  War  we  enter  the  third  phase — the 
development  in  Australia  of  new  specialist 
journals  to  cater  for  the  needs  of  scientists. 
Examples  of  these  are  the  Australian  Jour¬ 
nal  of  Chemistry  and  the  Australian  Journal 
of  Physics.  Furthermore,  overseas  socie¬ 
ties  publishing  specialist  journals,  e.g.  the 
Chemical  Society  of  London,  speeded  up 
the  rate  of  handling  of  papers  and  went  out 
of  their  way  to  provide  air-mail  facilities 
in  order  to  assist  folk  submitting  papers 
from  Australia.” 

The  decline  in  the  number  of  research  papers 
received  (as  distinct  from  the  Presidential 
Address,  Clarke  and  Liversidge  Lectures)  is 
shown  in  Figure  2  of  Nyholm’s  paper.  In 
1952  the  Journal  was  the  smallest  since 
1929. 

Nyholm  argued  that  this  had  at  least  two 
effects:  the  mix  of  disciplines  in  the  Journal 
had  become  unbalanced,  which  would  even- 


2 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Marks  —  Editorial 


tually  affect  journal  exchanges  with  other 
institutions;  and  Society  members  would 
lose  interest  in  the  Journal  and  perhaps  in 
the  Society.  Sixty  years  ago,  Nyholm  quoted 
a  previous  president,  Richard  Bosworth,  who 
argued  for  a  policy  of  encouraging  research¬ 
ers  to  write  reports  on  their  research  worded 
so  as  to  be  intelligible  to  a  novice  in  the  field, 
rather  than  to  the  expert  readers  the  special¬ 
ist  journals  assume. 

What  was  true  sixty  years  ago  still  holds 
today,  although  the  pressure  to  publish  in 
A-rated  journals  means  that  fewer  such 
accessible  papers  will  be  submitted.  And 
the  fourth  phase  of  the  Journal— age 
of  the  Internet— -means  that  the  Journal,  at 
least  in  its  hard-copy  form,  is  increasingly 
an  anachronism.  The  other  side  of  that 
coin  is  the  ability  to  make  over  1 60  years  of 
articles  accessible  to  anyone  with  a  browser. 
The  Journal  still  publishes  the  Clarke  and 
Liversidge  lectures  and  now  also  a  garland 
of  papers  from  the  annual  forum.  We  also 
publish  short  abstracts  from  recent  Ph.D. 
dissertations.  But  the  flow  of  first-rate,  cut- 
ting-edge  research  papers  has  stopped  long 
since. 

What  is  happening  at  our  sister  societies? 
The  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  South 

Australia  is  the  result  of  an  amalgamation 
(in  2004)  with  the  Records  of  the  South  Aus- 
tralian  Museum  and  is  published  by  Taylor 
&  Francis  in  both  hard  and  soft  copies.  Its 
2015  impact  factor  was  0.484.  Contents 
of  the  Transactions  are  not  freely  available. 
Subscriptions  to  the  two  annual  issues  of  the 
Transactions  are  included  in  members’  dues, 
but  non-members  and  institutions  pay  up  to 
$285  a  year  for  hard  and  soft  copies. 

The  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Victo¬ 
ria  is  published  by  CSIRO  Publishing.  Cur¬ 
rent  issues  are  freely  available.  The  Proceed¬ 


ings  are  only  available  in  soft  copy.  Articles 
back  to  1855  are  available  on-line. 

The  Papers  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Soci¬ 
ety  of  Tasmania  are  freely  available  on-  line, 
but  not  for  the  last  two  years.  There  are, 
apparently,  no  hard  copies  printed.  Only 
members  of  the  Society  who  pay  to  do 
so  have  access  to  the  last  two  years  of  the 
Papers. 

The  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of 
Queensland  are  apparently  freely  available 
on-line.  The  Proceedings  publishes  only  a 
single  issue  a  year,  and  then  only  in  soft 
copy. 

The  Journal  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Western 

Australia  is  (since  December  2015)  no  longer 
printed,  but  is  available  only  on-line  to  fully 
paid  members  of  the  Society  and  approved 
exchange  partners  and  educational  institu¬ 
tions. 

The  Journal  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  Zea¬ 
land  is  published  quarterly  in  soft  and  hard 
issues  by  Taylor  &  Francis.  It  has  a  5-year 
impact  factor  of  0.9 1 8.  The  current  issue  is 
available  on-line,  but  archive  (permanent) 
access  to  soft  and  hard  copy  costs  AU$640  a 
year.  Earlier  issues  (1868  to  1961)  are  freely 
available  on-line. 

What  is  to  be  done?  Sixty  years  ago 
Ronald  Nyholm’s  suggestion  was  not  par¬ 
ticularly  effective.  And  today  it  is  even  less 
likely  to  succeed.  I  encourage  review  articles 
and  articles  taking  an  historical  approach  to 
the  development  of  science  and  social  phe¬ 
nomena.  I  also  urge  readers  to  consider  writ¬ 
ing  longer  book  reviews  of  recent  books  that 
raise  issues  of  interest,  particularly  of  science 
policy  and  history.  This  fits,  I  hope,  with  the 
Society’s  push  to  widen  its  membership  from 
the  hard  sciences  to  the  social  sciences  and 
to  the  arts  and  humanities.  Please  consider 
the  Journal  for  your  next  such  paper. 


3 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  ^^es 
Marks  Editorial 

Finally,  Fd  like  to  thank  Ed  Hibbert,  Don 
Hector,  and  Jason  Antony  for  their  assistance 
in  processing  the  Journals  text. 


30  November  2016 


References 


Nyholm,  Ronald  S.  Presidential  Address, 
JProcRSNSW  89:  N29,  1955. 

http://biodiversitylibrary.org/ page/46 1 93345 


4 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  5-16.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010005-12 


Presidential  Address 


Donald  C*A*  Hector 

The  Royal  Society  of  NSW 
Email:  dchector@royalsoc.org,au 


Abstract 

Donald  Hector  AM  was  President  of  the  Royal  Society  of  NSW  from  2012  to  2016.  In  an  address 
marking  the  conclusion  of  his  presidency,  immediately  following  the  annual  general  meeting  of  the 
Society  on  Wednesday,  6  April  2016,  he  considered  the  nature  of  the  complex  problems  that  face 
2  lst~century  Australia,  the  way  in  which  people  tend  to  approach  these  highly-complex  socio-techno 
problems  and  the  cognitive  and  cultural  limitations  they  have  in  identifying  solutions.  In  particular, 
he  considered  the  role  that  the  Royal  Society  of  NSW  might  play  as  it  is  re-established  as  a  leader  in 
the  intellectual  life  of  NSW  and  of  the  country. 


For  many  years,  it  was  a  practice  of  the 
Society  for  the  President  to  deliver  an 
address  at  the  conclusion  of  the  presidential 
term.  This  custom  fell  into  disuse  in  recent 
years  but  with  the  change  to  the  rules  and 
bylaws  last  year,  it  was  decided  to  reintro¬ 
duce  it. 

My  aim  tonight  is  not  to  reflect  on  the 
activities  of  the  Society  in  the  last  four 
years,  other  than  in  passing--- rather,  it  is 
to  attempt  to  chart  a  way  for  the  Society  as 
it  re-establishes  itself  as  an  intellectual  force 
in  New  South  Wales  and  the  country  So  I 
shall  limit  my  comments  on  the  recent  his¬ 
tory  to  these. 

By  far  the  most  successfiil  development 
in  the  last  several  years  has  been  the  estab¬ 
lishment  of  the  category  of  Fellow  and  the 
elevation  of  the  former  Fellows  to  Distin¬ 
guished  Fellowship.  This  raised  considerable 
interest  in  the  activities  of  the  Society  and 
we  were  fortunate  that  very  capable  people 
indeed  have  accepted  the  invitation  to  Fel¬ 
lowship  and  that  some  of  them  have  become 
involved  in  the  activities  of  the  Society  and 
its  governance.  We  expect  that  this  will  con¬ 
tinue  and  that  we  will  see  sustained  growth 
in  all  membership  categories.  But  this  will 


only  be  the  case  if  the  activities  of  the  Soci¬ 
ety  are  considered  to  be  making  a  valuable 
contribution  to  the  public  discourse.  How 
might  we  do  this? 

In  September  last  year,  for  the  first  time, 
the  Society  organised  a  forum  with  the  four 
Australian  learned  Academies.  One  of  the 
outcomes  of  the  meeting  was  a  list  of  major 
challenges  and  issues  where  the  Society 
could  contribute,  taking  a  transdisciplinary 
approach  across  art,  science,  literature  and 
philosophy.  Of  the  issues  identified  at  the 
forum,  one  common  characteristic  they 
shared  was  that  they  are  all  highly-complex, 
socio-techno-economic  problems.  Most  of 
these  are  not  limited  to  NSW  nor  to  Aus¬ 
tralia— in  many  cases,  they  are  global  issues. 
I  would  like  to  spend  the  remainder  of  my 
address  exploring  how  these  complex  prob¬ 
lems  have  come  to  be,  why  we  see  them  in 
the  way  we  do  and  what  we  can  do  to  con¬ 
tribute  to  a  solution.  I  will  take  a  historical 
perspective  and  consider  some  issues  around 
philosophy  and  cognitive  psychology  that  I 
believe  are  important  in  framing  these  prob¬ 
lems  and  identifying  solutions. 

The  way  in  which  all  animals  interact  and 
survive  in  their  environment  is  through  solv- 


5 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  ’^^es 
Hector— Presidential  Address 


ing  problems.  Humans  have  developed  a 
remarkable  capacity  for  intellectualising 
problems  and  solving  them  in  the  abstract. 
Some  of  these  problems  can  be  simply  stated 
and  have  simple  solutions  — for  example, 
will  I  catch  the  bus  to  work  this  morning 
or  will  I  ride  a  bicycle?  At  the  other  end 
of  the  spectrum,  there  are  many  problems 
that  can  be  both  difficult  to  articulate  and 
to  resolve.  Contemporary  examples  of  these 
are:  what  are  we  to  do  about  climate  change? 
or  how  can  we  provide  a  cost-effective  health 
system?  I  would  like  to  briefly  explore  the 
nature  of  problems  and  why  some  of  them 
are  so  difficult  to  understand  and  to  solve. 


The  way  in  which  we  define  and  attempt 
to  solve  problems  today  has  its  origins  in 
the  philosophy  of  ancient  Greece.  Indeed, 
the  rediscovery  of  classical  philosophy  in  the 
13th  and  I4th  centuries  was  a  major  influ¬ 
ence  on  the  Renaissance.  Let  me  refer  to 
an  example.  Many  of  you  will  have  seen 
this  painting  or  be  familiar  with  it.  It  was 
painted  by  Raphael  in  1509  and  is  a  fresco 
in  the  Apostolic  Palace  in  the  Vatican.  It  is 
widely  considered  as  one  of  the  finest  pieces 
of  art  from  the  Renaissance,  It  is  usually 
referred  to  as  The  School  of  Athens  (although 
its  formal  name  is  Knowledge  of  Causes). 


The  School  of  Athens 


The  two  central  figures  are  Plato  and  Aris¬ 
totle  but  other  Greek  philosophers  (Socra¬ 
tes  and  Diogenes)  are  also  represented,  as 
are  other  philosophical  influences  from  the 
pre-Christian  era.  I  will  refer  to  this  paint¬ 
ing  again  later  to  make  some  other  points 
but  what  the  painting  shows  is  the  influ¬ 


ence  of  philosophy  in  Renaissance  thinking. 
It  is  intended  to  represent  natural  truth  as 
acquired  through  reason,  arithmetic,  geom¬ 
etry,  astronomy,  rhetoric  and  dialectic  and 
also  represents  art,  music  and  poetry. 

On  the  opposing  wall  is  a  second  paint¬ 
ing,  also  by  Raphael,  called  Disputation  over 


6 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Hector— Presidential  Address 


the  Most  Holy  Sacrament.  It  was  painted  the 

following  year  and  shows  God  the  Father 
looking  down  on  the  resurrected  Christ  who 
is  flanked  by  the  Virgin  Mary  and  John  the 


Baptist  and  prophets  and  saints  of  the  old 
and  new  Testaments.  Beneath  are  Popes, 
saints  and  the  faithful  masses  and  with  Aris¬ 
totle,  head  slightly  bowed  and  his  books  on 
the  ground. 


Disputation  over  the  Most  Holy  Sacrament 

On  the  one  side  of  the  chamber,  is  a 
representation  of  knowledge  and  reason; 
on  the  other,  the  realm  of  God.  In  many 
respects,  these  two  juxtaposed  paintings 
represent  the  thinking  and  belief-system  of 
that  era  and  upon  which  the  Renaissance 
developed.  Art  can  give  great  insight  into 
human  thought — ^let  us  explore  this  notion 
a  little  further. 

Consider  this  example  of  ancient  Greek 
art.  It  is  from  a  piece  of  pottery  of  an  uncer¬ 
tain  date  and  is  thought  to  represent  Euripi¬ 
des’  Medea.  Its  composition  is  what  Paul 


A  piece  of  Greek  pottery  of  an  uncertain  date 

and  is  thought  to  represent  Euripides  Medea. 


7 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Hector— Presidential  Address 


Feyerabend  (1975)  refers  to  as  a  “paratactic 
aggregate”^ — ^  specially-structured  group 
of  individual  elements.  Feyerabend  sug¬ 
gested  that  this  shows  that  Greek  thought 
was  elemental  in  nature — they  believed  that 
that  everything  in  the  world  consisted  of 
atoms  that  were  aggregated  into  bigger  and 
bigger  things. 

The  story  is  told  by  the  relationship  of  the 
elements  in  the  artwork.  Another  charac¬ 
teristic  of  Greek  art  was  that  it  had  no  per¬ 
spective.  Together,  this  suggests  that  Greek 
thought  was  not  developed  into  an  integra¬ 


tive,  representation  of  the  world  and  that 
the  sense  of  perspective  that  is  important  in 
modern  representations  simply  had  not  yet 
developed.  This  notion  is  reinforced  by  the 
nature  of  the  ancient  Greek  language.  It  is 
also  paratactic — it  depends  heavily  on  struc¬ 
ture.  Their  thinking — -the  paradigms  they 
used — -were,  perhaps,  elemental,  mechanis¬ 
tic  and  lacking  in  perceptual  depth. 

Now  let  us  move  to  the  very  early  Renais¬ 
sance — -about  1350.  Consider  the  fresco 
in  Campo  Santo,  Pisa,  by  Francesco  Traini, 
called  Triumph  of  Death. 


Fresco  in  Campo  Santo,  Pisa,  by  Francesco  Traini,  Triumph  of  Death. 


There  is  much  similarity  between  the  style 
of  Greek  art  and  this  painting:  there  is  no 
perspective  and  the  story  is  told  by  structure 
of  the  elements  represented  in  the  painting. 
Let  us  now  go  forward  about  100  years  to 
1430^ — this  is  a  scene  painted  by  Paolo 
Uccello  representing  Mary  approaching 


a  temple.  In  the  space  of  100  years  or  so, 
perspective  has  started  to  emerge,  giving 
a  sense  of  depth  and  three-dimensionality. 
The  style  is  more  integrative,  with  the  charac¬ 
ters  becoming  part  of  the  scene,  rather  than 
simply  arranged  in  it. 


8 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Hector— Presidential  Address 


A  scene  by  Paolo  Uccello  representing  Mary 
approaching  a  temple. 


Now  let  us  return  to  our  painting  by  Raphael, 
The  School  of  Athens.  Painted  70  years  later, 
in  1509,  and  at  the  height  of  the  Renaissance, 
the  style  is  entirely  different.  It  is  much  more 
fully  developed:  perspective  is  clear— it  is  a 
representation  of  a  three-dimensional  scene 
that  truly  appears  to  be  in  three  dimensions. 
Everything  is  integrated:  the  various  philoso¬ 
phers  and  thinkers  are  engaged  in  conversa¬ 
tion  with  each  other  (even  though  some  are 
from  different  eras).  It  tells  a  story. 

What  I  have  tried  to  show  here  are  some  of 
the  foundational  influences  on  the  Western 
way  of  thought,  as  represented  through  its 
art.  Whether  or  not  Feyerabend’s  theory  is 
correct  is  open  to  discussion  but  it  is  hard 
to  accept  as  coincidental  the  extraordinary 
development  in  the  sophistication  of  artistic 
representation  that  happened  at  the  same 
time  as  the  development  of  philosophical 
thought  in  centres  such  as  Florence  and 
Padua.  As  the  influence  of  the  Renaissance 
moved  from  Italy  across  Europe,  the  centre 
of  intellectual  thought  gravitated  towards 
Holland,  to  (what  is  now)  Germany  and 
to  England.  The  discoveries  and  thinking 
of  Copernicus,  Galileo,  Bacon,  Locke  and 
Newton,  based  on  Greek  philosophy,  contin¬ 
ued  to  develop  within  the  mechanistic  Greek 
paradigm  —  the  universe  was  like  a  great 


machine  overseen  by  God.  This  thinking 
prevailed  until  the  1 8th  century  when  phi¬ 
losophers  such  as  Kant  and  Hegel  brought 
different  perspectives  to  our  interpretation 
of  reality  and  the  “interconnectedness”  of 
everything  in  the  universe.  Nonetheless, 
the  mechanistic  paradigm  persisted  until 
the  late  1 9th  century.  At  about  this  time, 
biology  and  ecology  began  to  develop  and 
the  mechanistic  paradigm  was  insufficient  to 
explain  many  of  the  phenomena  that  were 
now  being  observed.  A  new  model  emerged 
for  explaining  these  —  systems  theory. 

Mechanisms,  like  clocks,  behave  lin¬ 
early — -a  disturbance  to  the  mechanism 
produces  an  effect  in  proportion  to  the 
disturbance.  The  analytical  technique 
developed  in  Padua  in  the  mid- Renaissance 
works  very  well.  If  you  have  a  problem,  dis¬ 
assemble  it  into  its  component  parts,  solve 
the  component  problems  and  synthesise  a 
solution  to  the  original  problem  from  these. 
But  systems  do  not  work  this  way.  They 
are  non-linear — a  tiny  disturbance  in  one 
part  of  the  system  can  result  in  a  surprisingly 
large  disturbance  in  another.  Systems  can 
appear  to  be  stable  but  a  small  disturbance 
can  introduce  major  instability— they  can 
flip.  They  are  characterised  by  subsystems 
whose  behaviour  interacts  with  other  sub¬ 
systems  to  influence  the  behaviour  of  the 
whole — -you  cannot  predict  the  outcome 
by  simply  adding  the  subsystem  responses 
together.  At  the  heart  of  systems  theory  is 
that  everything  in  the  universe  influences 
everything  else.  Systems  theory  and  its 
underlying  philosophy  of  interconnected¬ 
ness  and  uncertainty  was  remarkably  success¬ 
ful  as  a  means  to  understand  an  enormous 
array  of  phenomena  from  the  behaviour 
of  ecosystems,  to  quantum  mechanics,  to 
biological  systems  to  the  behaviour  of  high¬ 
speed  aircraft  and  the  control  of  equipment 


9 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  ^W^es 
Hector — Presidential  Address 


in  power  stations  and  other  industrial  proc¬ 
esses. 

After  the  Second  World  War,  there  was 
massive  rebuilding  and  restructuring  of  soci¬ 
ety.  New  problems  started  to  emerge:  how 
to  provide  healthcare,  establishing  effective 
educational  systems,  trying  to  make  sense 
of  economics  to  avoid  catastrophes  such  as 
the  Great  Depression  and  deal  with  ever- 
increasing  environmental  damage.  Advanced 
mathematical  techniques  such  as  linear  pro¬ 
gramming,  game  theory,  queueing  theory, 
marginal  analysis  and  information  theory 
were  developed  as  a  consequence  of  milita¬ 
risation,  in  particular  strategic  analysis  as  the 
Cold  War  deepened.  But  these  were  gener¬ 
ally  unsuccessful  in  solving  this  new  class  of 


problem.  They  were  variously  described  as 
“messes”  and  “wicked  problems”.  Generally, 
there  was  no  shortage  of  data  to  draw  upon 
to  characterise  the  problem.  But  the  systems 
nature  of  these  problems  were  surprisingly 
resistant  to  analytical  approaches.  Typically, 
these  problems  had  social  dimensions  that 
were  difficult  model. 

Summarising,  over  the  last  500-600  years 
the  way  in  which  problems  are  identified 
in  characterised  has  evolved  substantially. 
We  now  think  of  problems  in  three  broad 
types: 

But  there  is  another  dimension  to  problem¬ 
solving:  the  “domain  of  interests”:  that  is, 
the  people  or  stakeholder  groups  involved  in 


Problem  type 

Characteristics 

Simple  Problems  (or  mechanistic 

or  scientific  problem) 

Problems  that  can  be  represented  using  a  mechanistic 
model  and  resolved  using  the  reductionist  approach. 

Single-Dimensional  Complex 
Problems  (or  technical  or  systems 
problem) 

Problems — ^  often  of  a  technological  nature — ^that  can 
be  represented  on  one  problem  dimension. 

Multi-Dimensional  Techno- 
Societal  Problems 

Problems  that  can  only  be  represented  on  multiple 
dimensions,  considering  issues  such  as  moral  status, 
intrinsic  character,  value,  beliefs,  aesthetics  etc. 

Table  1:  Increasing  problem  complexity 


either  the  problem  itself  or  any  solution  that 
might  be  identified.  The  domain  of  interests 
can  range  from  a  single  individual  trying  to 
solve  a  simple  problem  up  to  highly  complex, 
global  problems  whose  domain  of  interest 
extends  across  species  and  ecosystems.  One 
might  conceive  of  three  broad  domains  of 
interest:  unitary;  pluralist;  and  disparate. 

A  unitary  domain  exists  where  there  is 
a  single  decision-maker  or,  if  there  is  more 
than  one  individual,  where  the  decision¬ 
makers  have  a  shared  worldview  and  an 
agreed  determination  in  resolving  the 


problem.  A  pluralist  domain  is  one  where 
there  is  a  shared  determination  to  problem 
resolution  but  there  are  differing  worldviews 
among  the  stakeholders.  Issues  of  power 
and  coercion  are  either  explicitly  or  implic¬ 
itly  set  aside.  And  a  disparate  domain  of 
interests  is  where  there  are  major  differences 
in  underlying  beliefs  and  values  among  the 
stakeholders.  The  worldviews  represented  in 
the  domain  may  be  in  open  conflict.  There 
may  not  even  be  agreement  that  a  prob¬ 
lem  exists  or  that  action  needs  to  be  taken. 
There  may  be  distrust  among  stakeholders 


10 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Hector— =  Presidential  Address 


and  there  may  be  deliberate  use  of  power  to 
coerce  or  frustrate  problem  definition  and 
decision-making.  These  three  domains  are 
represented  in  table  2. 


of  problem  can  be  identified  as  shown  in 
diagram  1: 

Typel  :  these  are  problems  which  normally 
yield  to  reductionist  or  systems-analysis 
problem-solving  approach.  Traditional 
scientific  and  engineering  methodologies 
can  be  applied  such  as  mathematical  mod¬ 
elling  and  computer  simulation. 

Type  2:  these  problems  which  due  to  their 
complexity  and  systems  nature  require 
a  combination  of  reductionist,  analyti¬ 
cal  and  hard-  and  soft-systems  analysis 
approaches. 

Type  3:  these  problems  are  often  unique  and 
always  highly  complex — this  precludes  or 
severely  limits  the  use  of  traditional  sci¬ 
entific,  engineering  and  systems  analysis 
approaches.  Human  stakeholders  hold 


Taking  these  two  dimensions  of  problem 
structure  together,  three  fundamental  types 


apparently  irreconcilable  differences  in 
beliefs  and  values  and  are  more  than  will¬ 
ing  to  exploit  power  imbalances  coercively 
to  achieve  their  own  ends.  Moral  status 
of  stakeholders  and  their  interests  may  be 
difficult  to  identify  and  some  (for  exam¬ 
ple,  non-human  species)  may  not  be  for¬ 
mally  represented  in  the  decision-making 
domain. 

This  characterisation  of  Type  3  problems 
that  has  emerged  over  the  last  half  century 
or  so  is  not  unique  nor  is  it  particularly 
new.  These  “wicked  problems”  or  “messes” 
and  have  occupied  the  thoughts  of  opera¬ 
tional  researchers  for  many  years  but  with 
only  limited  success.  But  what  is  diflFerent 
here  is  the  representation  of  these  problems 
on  two  dimensions  —  recognising  that  the 
influence  of  differing  worldviews  and  the 


Domain  of 

INTERESTS 

Characteristics 

Unitary 

A  single  decision-maker  or  a  group  of  decision-makers  and  other  stake¬ 
holders  which  have  the  same  interests  and  similar  worldviews. 

Pluralist 

Decision-making  interests  are  largely  aligned  but  there  may  be  many 
different  worldviews  among  stakeholders.  However,  they  share  the  same 
determination  or  interest  in  arriving  at  a  satisfactory  problem  resolution. 
Power  is  equally  shared  among  constituents  or,  because  of  the  shared 
determination  to  resolve  the  problem,  issues  of  power  are  set  aside. 

Disparate 

There  are  major  differences  in  underlying  beliefs  and  values  and  the 
interests  of  stakeholders  may  differ  widely.  There  may  be  a  lack  of  shared 
determination  to  resolve  the  problem,  distrust  of  the  motives  and  inten¬ 
tions  of  other  interests,  and  even  specific  intention  not  to  see  the  situation 
resolved  and  to  derail  attempts  to  agree  upon  the  problem  definition  or 
eflForts  to  proceed.  There  may  also  be  significant  power  imbalances  among 
the  constituents  and  these  are  used  coercively. 

Table  2:  A  further  dimension  of  problem  complexity —the  Domain  of  Interests 


11 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South 
Hector  “—Presidential  Address 


coercive  use  of  power  has  enormous  influ¬ 
ence  both  on  characterising  the  problem 
and  moving  towards  some  resolution.  An 
important  point  to  note  is  that  describing  or 
structuring  the  problem  is  fundamentally  a 
human,  social  construct.  Worldviews  and 


belief-systems  are  at  the  heart  of  both  defin¬ 
ing  and  solving  problems. 

Let  me  summarise  my  argument  so  far. 
As  the  humans  have  evolved,  so  too  has 
the  way  in  which  we  conceive  of  and  attempt 
to  solve  problems.  The  worldview  of  the 

Domain  of  interests 


Diagram  1  —problem  taxonomy. 


ancient  Greeks  persisted  for  well  over  a  mil¬ 
lennium.  But  in  just  a  couple  of  hundred 
years,  the  Renaissance  brought  a  dramatic 
change  in  the  Western  world— “there  was 
a  flourishing  of  thought  and  a  number  of 
different  philosophical  approaches  emerged. 
But  as  population  and  social  complexity 
increased,  so  too  did  the  complexity  of  the 
problems  that  confront  us.  Not  only  are 
the  technical  aspects  of  the  problems  chal¬ 
lenging  but  they  are  further  complicated  by 
the  divergence  in  worldviews  that  occurred. 
In  the  last  century  or  so,  social  and  cultural 
influences  in  an  increasingly  liberal  soci¬ 
ety  have  added  another  dimension  to  the 
way  in  which  we  need  to  consider  complex 


problems.  The  second  dimension  of  prob¬ 
lem  structure  that  I  have  proposed  here  is 
predominantly  about  influence  and  power 
and  is  a  major  obstacle  in  solving  the  highly 
complex  socio-economic  problems. 

Before  exploring  how  these  types  of  prob¬ 
lems  might  be  addressed,  I  would  like  to  take 
a  brief  diversion  to  outline  the  philosophi¬ 
cal  framework  upon  which  Anglo-American 
society  (by  which  I  mean  the  various  coun¬ 
tries  around  the  world  that  emerged  from 
or  were  strongly  influenced  by  Britain)  has 
developed  in  the  period  since  the  late  I6th 
century.  I  confine  my  remarks  to  the  Anglo- 
American  philosophical  framework  because 
Royal  Societies  around  the  world  are  crea- 


12 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Hector—" Presidential  Address 


tures  of  this.  It  has  also  been  very  influential 
in  the  development  of  the  modern  era.  Time 
does  not  permit  a  detailed  examination  of 
these,  so  I  will  just  outline  them  briefly. 

What  was  originally  called  “philosophy” 
and  has  evolved  into  scientific  enquiry  is 
dependent  on  the  scientific  method  of  con¬ 
jecture  and  refutation.  It  is  founded  on  a 
rationalist  philosophy  and  traces  its  origins  to 
thinkers  such  as  Bacon,  Locke  and  Newton. 
One  of  the  principles  of  rationalism  is  that 
we  can  acquire  knowledge  in  two  ways:  one 
is  empiricist  (interpreting  knowledge  that  we 
acquire  through  our  senses);  and  the  other 
is  intuitive  and  deductive  (there  is  some 
knowledge  that  we  can  acquire  through 
thought  and  deduction  alone — -mathemat¬ 
ics  being  an  example).  It  is  oversimplifying 
somewhat  to  say  that  scientific  enquiry  is 
entirely  rationalist— there  are  many  factors 
that  influence  it,  including  sociological  ones. 
But  its  intention  is  to  converge  upon  some 
notion  of  truth  through  rigorous,  intellec¬ 
tual  enquiry. 

Political  and  social  institutions  are  gener¬ 
ally  framed  on  different  philosophical  prin¬ 
ciples  - —  they  are  utilitarian.  Utilitarianism 
originates  with  Bentham  and  Mill  and  has 
been  developed  by  many  others.  Its  original 
concept  was  that  a  “good”  act  is  one  that 
maximises  pleasure.  Unlike  rationalism,  it 
is  less  concerned  about  finding  truth;  rather 
it  is  a  normative  ethical  system— it  attempts 
to  define  a  set  of  rules  for  society  to  live 
by.  Over  the  last  couple  of  hundred  years, 
“pleasure”  has  been  replaced  with  “benefit”  or, 
more  recently,  “happiness”.  Most  economic 
analysis  is  utilitarian  in  its  nature:  what  will 
deliver  the  maximum  benefit  for  the  mini¬ 
mum  cost?  Similarly,  our  political  systems 
attempt  to  arrive  at  maximising  public  good 
(or  happiness)  with  minimum  interference 
with  individual  liberty — they  are  funda¬ 
mentally  utilitarian,  liberal  frameworks. 


Legal  institutions  are  different  again. 
They  are  also  based  on  normative  philo¬ 
sophical  principles  but  are  framed  around 
deontological  or  duty-based  ethics.  One 
particularly  influential  philosopher  in  this 
area  was  Kant  who  argued  that  a  “good”  act 
is  one  in  which  one  does  ones  duty.  Duty 
can  be  defined  in  terms  of  a  legal  code  or 
duties  that  emanate  from  moral  good.  Kan¬ 
tian  ethics  is  controversial  but  nonetheless 
the  British  legal  system  is  largely  duty-based 
system.  (For  example,  sections  180  to  183 
of  the  Corporations  Act  defines  duties  that 
must  be  observed  by  company  directors.) 

So,  the  society  in  which  we  find  ourselves 
today  is  largely  the  product  of  three  philo¬ 
sophical  systems  that  are  becoming  ever¬ 
more  influential  and,  in  many  aspects,  are 
replacing  the  influence  of  religion  that  until 
relatively  recently  dominated  our  value-sys¬ 
tems.  The  extent  to  which  belief  (whether 
religious  or  humanist  or  some  other  value- 
based  system)  influences  decision-making  is 
of  critical  importance  in  solving  the  highly- 
complex  Type  3  problems  that  prove  so  chal- 
lenging. 

I  will  now  briefly  explore  some  cognitive 
psychology  in  an  attempt  to  identify  the  way 
in  which  these  Type  3  problems  might  be 
addressed.  There  is  a  large  body  of  literature 
in  cognitive  psychology  relating  to  problem¬ 
solving  originating,  in  the  1920s  and  1930s. 
I  will  confine  myself  just  to  drawing  a  few 
points  from  this  literature. 

One  of  the  key  researchers  in  this  area 
was  Hammond  (1955)  who  integrated  the 
work  of  a  number  of  eminent  psychologists 
relating  to  the  way  in  which  people  respond 
to  cues  that  they  receive.  Researchers  found 
that  people  form  judgements  and  make 
inferences  based  on  observations  that  are 
weighted  according  to  their  experience  and 
other  subjective  influences.  The  analogy  of 
the  “lens  model”  was  created ^ — just  as  light 


13 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Hector— Presidential  Address 


is  distorted  by  an  optical  lens,  giving  differ¬ 
ent  images  to  different  observers  depend¬ 
ing  on  their  position,  so  too  do  individu¬ 
als  involved  in  a  complex  situation  form 
different  perceptions  of  the  problem  and 
the  path  forward.  Hence,  there  can  be  no 
objectively-determined  understanding  of 
complex  problems. 

In  a  ground-breaking  piece  of  work  in 
the  1950s,  Miller  (1955)  found  that  people 
have  a  very  limited  capacity  to  retain  pieces 
of  information  in  their  minds  (somewhere 
between  five  and  eight  pieces  of  information 
at  any  one  time)  but  an  extraordinary  capac¬ 
ity  to  recall  information  to  mind  to  proc¬ 
ess  it.  Another  related  body  of  research  by 
Boulding  found  that  people  form  “images” 
or  mental  representations  of  situations  that 
are  important  in  the  way  in  which  they  reach 
decisions.  They  imagine  what  the  future 
might  be  and  then  strategise  to  achieve  it. 
These  images  are  not  simply  mental  pictures, 
rather  they  are  complex  mental  representa¬ 
tions  of  situations  that  we  are  attempting 
to  understand.  An  interesting  example  of 
this  is  the  “cognitive  map”  that  we  form  to 
help  us  relate  to  our  situation  in  the  physical 
world— not  only  is  it  a  locational  map,  it  is 
a  representation  of  self  and  our  relationship 
with  the  physical  world.  This  fundamen¬ 
tal  cognitive  process  probably  underlies  the 
human  penchant  for  representing  complex 
information  in  a  wide  range  of  graphical  and 
visual  formats,  such  as  maps. 

Many  of  these  mental  phenomena  are 
not  specific  to  humans  —  all  cognisant 
animals  seem  to  utilise  them.  It  is  how 
cognisant  beings  deal  with  the  enormous 
complexity  of  the  world  in  which  they  find 
themselves.  The  complexity  is  too  great  to 
comprehend,  so  a  form  of  thinking — intui¬ 
tive  thought — evolved  to  make  sense  of 
it.  At  some  point  our  evolution,  humans 
developed  the  capacity  for  rational  think¬ 


ing.  It  is  the  capacity  for  rational  thought 
that  makes  humans  sapient  (some  other 
animals  appear  to  possess  limited  capacity 
for  rational  thought  but  there  is  none  that 
comes  close  to  humans).  But  the  capacity 
for  rational  thought  is  bounded — the  world 
is  far  too  complex  for  the  human  mind  to 
comprehend  it  completely. 

On  one  hand,  intuitive  thought  is  used  by 
all  cognisant  animals.  It  is  instinctive  and 
quick  and  the  main  mechanism  by  which  we 
survive.  On  the  other,  rational  thought  is 
largely  peculiar  to  humans.  It  is  slow,  delib¬ 
erate  and  it  is  learnt.  In  the  1970s  and  1980s, 
work  byTversky  and  Kahneman  (1974)  and 
others  found  that  intuitive  thought  is  subject 
to  a  range  of  biases  and  that  these  have  a 
significant  impact  on  the  success  of  decision¬ 
making.  Rational  thought  (or  least  some  of 
the  means  to  it)  can  be  taught  and  improved 
but  it  is  error-prone.  Whereas  intuition  is 
subject  to  bias,  rational  thought  is  subject 
to  error. 

But  we  need  to  put  these  mental  represen¬ 
tations  and  processes  into  a  both  a  chrono¬ 
logical  and  cultural  context.  This  requires 
another  cognitive  device- — -the  narrative. 

Narrative  and  story-telling  is  as  old  as 
humanity  itself  It  predates  writing  and 
occurs  in  every  human  society  and  culture. 
Throughout  most  of  history,  story-telling  has 
been  the  principal  means  by  which  knowl¬ 
edge  is  transferred  from  one  generation  to 
the  next.  There  are  various  theories  of  nar¬ 
rative  but  they  share  some  common  char¬ 
acteristics.  They  are  always  about  people 
or  things  and  a  group  of  characters  forms 
part  of  the  thread  that  holds  the  narrative 
together.  They  are  developed  against  an 
explicit  set  of  values  or  a  moral  standard 
against  which  the  actions  in  the  narrative 
can  be  evaluated.  Until  the  1970s,  narrative 
was  thought  to  be  simply  a  cultural  artefact, 
but  now  it  is  considered  to  be  a  fundamen- 


14 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Hector — Presidential  Address 


tal  cognitive  process.  While  cognitive  maps 
provide  the  three-dimensional  framework 
that  we  use  to  relate  to  the  real  world,  nar¬ 
rative  adds  the  fourth  dimension — ^time.  It 
also  provides  the  means  to  fill  in  the  gaps  in 
our  understanding  and  to  make  our  mental 
representation  coherent  with  our  experience 
and  our  worldview.  In  other  words,  we  make 
things  up — we  confabulate— -to  fill  in  the 
gaps  in  our  knowledge  and  most  importantly, 
in  order  to  make  our  representation  of  the 
problem  conform  with  our  belief-system. 

So,  let  me  summarise  these  few  fragments 
of  psychology.  No  two  individuals  see  a 
problem  in  exactly  the  same  way— we  are 
all  looking  at  things  through  “lenses”  that 
distort  our  view  of  reality  according  to 
our  perceptions  and  experience.  We  form 
images  of  problem  situations  that  are  heav¬ 
ily  influenced  by  our  philosophical  frame¬ 
work  and  belief-system.  Our  immediate 
response  to  problems  is  intuitive  but  this 
is  subject  to  bias.  A  more  measured  ana¬ 
lytical  approach— rational  thought— can 
be  learnt  but  we  must  remain  aware  that 
we  can  make  mistakes.  These  two  thought 
processes  have  been  described  as  two  dif¬ 
ferent  systems  but  that  misunderstands  the 
fundamental  nature  of  cognition  —  they 
are  a  single  system  responding  to  diflPerent 
stimuli  and  this  system  exhibits  all  the  non¬ 
linear  and  unexpected  characteristics  that 
one  would  expect.  In  order  to  make  sense  of 
the  enormous  complexity  we  encounter,  we 
confabulate  to  make  sense  of  things  that  we 
do  not  understand  to  make  them  conform 
to  our  notions  of  reality. 

So  how  might  we  move  forward? 

Recognising  the  enormous  human  crea¬ 
tivity  available  to  us  through  combining  our 
capacity  for  intuitive  and  rational  thought, 
we  can  use  the  enormous  body  of  knowledge 
(that  continues  to  grow  at  an  exponentially 
rate)  and  our  capacity  for  rational  analysis 


to  gain  much  greater  insight  into  problems 
that  were  previously  unassailable.  We  can 
imagine  what  futures  might  look  like.  If 
we  remain  conscious  of  the  bias  associated 
with  intuition  and  alert  to  the  ever-present 
chance  of  error  with  rational  thought,  we 
can  reduce  the  chance  of  serious  mistakes. 
Recognising  the  systems  nature  of  cognition, 
we  can  harness  both  intuitive  and  rational 
thought  to  bring  great  creativity.  Because 
we  can  recognise  that  various  stakeholders 
in  situations  will  approach  the  problem  from 
different  perspectives,  we  can  accept  this  as 
fundamental  to  the  human  condition  and 
that  should  facilitate  understanding.  The 
big  challenge  is  to  embrace  the  complexity 
of  the  problem— particularly  the  sociologi¬ 
cal  dimensions— to  overcome  the  inherent 
bias  that  we  all  hold  to  find  common  ground, 
rather  than  focus  on  the  differences. 

Most  importantly,  we  can  write  narratives. 
Drawing  upon  our  diverse  experience,  these 
narratives  can  engage  people  with  a  wide 
range  of  worldviews  and  draw  them  along 
with  us. 

And  now  I  come  to  my  final  point.  The 
Royal  Society  of  NSW  is  uniquely  placed 
to  provide  leadership  in  this  type  of  com¬ 
plex  analysis.  The  wisdom  of  the  founders 
in  defining  such  a  broad  remit  of  human 
knowledge — science,  art,  literature  and 
philosophy — was  truly  prescient  and  rec¬ 
ognised  the  ever-increasing  complexity  of 
modern  life.  But  we  need  to  change  if  we 
are  to  maximise  our  impact.  Historically, 
the  Society  has  focused  on  the  sciences:  in 
its  early  days,  the  physical  sciences— physics, 
chemistry  and  geology- — ^and,  later,  zool¬ 
ogy,  botany  and  biology.  Only  recently,  have 
we  extended  into  the  other  areas  of  human 
knowledge  encompassed  by  our  charter.  We 
need  to  attract  Fellows  and  Members  from 
all  fields  of  human  knowledge,  if  we  are  to 
engage  in  the  representation  and  solution 


15 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Hector — Presidential  Address 


of  Type  3  problems.  We  need  more  writers, 
artists,  sociologists,  musicians  and  historians. 
Only  then,  will  we  be  able  to  completely 
engage  with  the  community.  That  is  not  to 
say  that  we  should  abandon  our  scientific 
heritage  —  quite  the  opposite,  most  of  the 
problems  that  the  world  faces  today  have 
enormous  technological  challenges.  But 
these  solutions  will  not  be  found  in  science 
and  technology  alone — they  will  require  the 
engagement  of  non-scientists  in  terms  they 
can  understand. 

References 

Feyerabend,  R  {\37  5),  Against  Method,  (3rd 
edn.,  1993),  Verso,  London,  pp  170-187. 
Hammond,  K.R.,  (1955),  Probabilistic 
Functioning  and  the  Clinical  Method, 
Psychological  Review,  vol.  61,  no.  4,  1955, 

pp  255-262. 

Miller,  G.A.,  (1956),  The  magical  number 
seven,  plus  or  minus  two:  some  limits  on 
our  capacity  for  processing  information,  The 
Psychological  Review,  63,  2,  pp  81-97. 

Tversky,  A.,  Kahneman,  D.  (1974),  Judgment 
under  uncertainty:  heuristics  and  biases, 
Science,  New  Series,  185,  4157,  pp  1 124- 
1131. 

General  bibliography 

Ackoff,  R.L.,  (1979),  The  future  of  operational 
research  is  past,  Journal  of  the  Operational 
Research  Society,  30,  2,  pp  93-104. 

Gabriel,  Y,  (1991),  Turning  facts  into 
stories  and  stories  into  facts:  hermeneutic 
exploration  of  organisational  folklore, 

Human  Relations,  44,  8,  pp  71 1-724. 


Hammond,  K.R.  (2007),  Beyond  rationality: 
the  search  for  wisdom  in  a  troubled  time, 

Oxford  University  Press,  New  York,  USA 

Hector,  D.C.,  Petrie,  J.  et  at,  (2009),  A 
problem-structuring  method  for  complex 
societal  decisions:  its  philosophical  and 
psychological  dimensions,  European  Journal 
of  Operational  Research,  193,  3,  pp  693-708, 
doi:10.10l6/j.ejor.2007.06.058. 

Kintsch,  W,  van  Dijk,  TA.  (1978),  Toward  a 
model  of  text  comprehension  and  production. 
Psychological  Review,  85,  5,  pp  363-394. 

Kubovy,  M.  (1986)  The  psychology  of 
perspective  and  Renaissance  art.  Cambridge 
University  Press,  Cambridge,  UK. 

Miller,  K.D.,  Waller,  H.G.  (2003),  Scenarios, 
real  options  and  integrated  risk  management. 
Long  Range  Planning,.  36,  pp  93-107. 

Pentland,  B.T.,  (1999),  Building  Process 
Theory  with  Narrative:  From  Description  to 
Explanation,  Academy  of  Management  Review, 
24,  4,  pp  71 1-724. 

Randall,  J.H.,  (1940),  The  development  of 

scientific  method  in  the  School  of  Padua, 
Journal  of  the  History  of  Ideas,  1,  2,  pp  177- 
206. 

Rosenhead,  J.  (ed.),  (1989),  Rational  analysis 
for  a  problematic  world:  problem  structuring 
methods  for  complexity,  uncertainty  and  conflict, 
John  Wiley  &  Sons,  Chichester,  UK 

Russell,  B.  (1946),  History  of  Western 
Philosophy:  and  its  connection  with  political 
and  social  circumstances  from  the  earliest  times 
the  present-day,  (2nd  edn.,  1961),  Routledge, 
London. 

Tolman,  E.C.,  (1948),  Cognitive  maps  in 
rats  and  men.  Psychological  Review,  55,  4,  pp 
189-208. 

von  Bertalanffy,  L.,  (1950),  An  outline  of 
General  System  Theory,  British  Journal  for  the 
Philosophy  of  Science,  1,  2,  pp  134-165. 


Donald  Hector  AM  was  President  of  the  Society  from  2012  to  2016. 


16 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  17-33.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010017-17 


Deep-earth  methane  and  mantle  dynamics: 
insights  from  northern  Israel,  southern  Tibet  and 

Kamchatka 


William  L.  Griffin^*,  Sarah  E.M.  Gain^  David  T.  Adams^,  Vered  Toledo25 
Norman  J.  Pearsoni  and  Suzanne  Y.  O’ReiUyi 

^  ARC  Centre  of  Excellence  for  Core  to  Crust  Fluid  Systems,  EPS,  Macquarie  University, 

NSW  2109,  Australia 
^Shefa  Yamim  (A.T.M.)  Ltd.,  Akko,  Israel 


*  Corresponding  author. 

Email:  bilLgriffin@mq.edu.au 

Abstract 

The  oxidation  state  of  fluids  in  Earth’s  mantle  affects  processes  ranging  from  volcanism  and  the  forma¬ 
tion  of  the  crust,  to  the  generation  of  many  types  of  ore  deposits.  In  general,  the  lowest  oxidation  state 
of  the  mantle  (and  hence  its  fluids)  is  defined  by  the  buffer  reaction  2FeO  2Fe  +  02.  However, 
unusual  mineral  assemblages  that  require  far  more  reducing  conditions  are  found  in  volcanic  rocks 
from  a  variety  of  geotectonic  settings,  raising  questions  about  how  such  conditions  can  be  generated 
in  the  mantle.  Examples  from  northern  Israel,  Tibet  and  Kamchatka  suggest  that  interaction  between 
magmas  and  methane-hydrogen  fluids  derived  from  the  deep  Earth  have  generated  highly  reducing 
conditions  within  some  volcanic  plumbing  systems.  Such  systems  appear  to  be  related  to  the  margins  of 
tectonic  plates,  including  zones  of  continent-continent  collision  and/or  deep  oceanic  subduction,  and 
transform  faults  extending  deep  (up  to  200  km)  into  the  Earth’s  mantle.  This  represents  an  important 
but  previously  unrecognized  fluid-transfer  process  within  the  mantle. 


Foreword 

his  paper  is  both  a  condensation  and  an 
expansion  of  the  2015  Clarke  Memo¬ 
rial  Lecture,  given  by  WLG  at  Macquarie 
University  in  August  2015,  which  summa¬ 
rized  recent  work  by  the  ARC  Centre  of 
Excellence  for  Core  to  Crust  Fluid  Systems 
(CCFS).  We  hope  to  provide  both  geolo¬ 
gists  and  non-specialists  with  a  glimpse  into 
some  recent  exciting  developments  in  Earth 
Science,  and  to  show  how  the  integration  of 
observations  at  scales  from  microns  to  moun¬ 
tain  ranges  can  give  us  a  new  picture  of  how 
Earth  works.  We  are  trying  to  understand 
processes  not  previously  recognized,  and  the 
paper  therefore  contains  some  “interesting” 
speculations,  which  we  hope  can  generate 
(polite)  discussion. 


Introduction 

The  nature  of  the  rocks  in  Earths  deep 
mantle  (from  the  base  of  the  crust  to  the  top 
of  the  core;  Fig.  1),  and  clues  to  their  forma¬ 
tion,  are  generally  hidden  beneath  our  feet 
in  the  vast  space  of  inner  Earth.  However, 
small  samples  of  the  mantle  are  brought  to 
the  surface  by  some  volcanic  eruptions  in 
which  the  magmas  originated  at  depths  of 
250—100  km.  Such  magmas  can  rise  to  the 
surface  at  speeds  of  1-4  km/hour,  entraining 
fragments  of  deep-seated  rocks  and  minerals 
(xenoliths  and  xenocrysts;  O’Reilly  and  Grif¬ 
fin,  2010).  Larger  samples  of  mantle  rocks, 
tens  to  thousands  of  cubic  km  in  volume, 
can  be  brought  to  the  surface  by  geodynamic 
forces  in  regions  where  tectonic  plates  collide 
(e.g.,  Tibet,  the  Andes,  New  Guinea). 


17 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


Figure  1 .  (a)  Cross-section  of  Earth  s  interior,  showing  the  divisions  defined  by  mineralogy;  (b) 
Cross-section  emphasizing  the  convection  of  the  mantle,  driven  by  the  heat  in  the  core;  (c)  cartoon 
of  deep-seated  mantle  plumes,  in  this  case  producing  oceanic  islands  like  Hawaii;  smaller  upper- 
mantle  plumes  may  rise  from  the  Transition  Zone  and  produce  much  less  magma. 


This  report  focuses  on  three  locations  that 
have  yielded  surprising  discoveries  about  the 
nature  of  some  mantle  rocks  and  minerals 
and  their  conditions  of  formation  deep  in 
the  mantle.  Material  from  two  of  these  areas 
(S.  Tibet,  N.  Israel)  is  being  studied  by  the 
CCFS  team,  while  recent  discoveries  in  the 
Kamchatka  Peninsula  of  NE  Siberia  provide 
important  comparisons. 


The  Deep  Earth  and  the  Importance  of 
Fluids 

The  large-scale  structure  and  composition 
of  Earth’s  convecting  mantle  (the  astheno- 
sphere),  extending  from  100-200  km  below 
Earth’s  surface  to  the  outer  edge  of  the  core 
at  -2,900  km,  are  generally  understood  (Fig. 
1).  The  uppermost  (lithospheric)  mantle  is 
relatively  cool  and  coupled  to  the  crust;  (10 
to  40  km  thick  in  oceanic  and  old  conti¬ 
nental  regions  respectively);  these  make  up 


18 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  ^X^ES 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


the  lithosphere,  and  Earth’s  tectonic  plates. 
The  mantle  is  made  up  largely  of  ultramafic 
rocks— -high  in  MgO  and  low  in  Si02.  At 
depths  between  410-660  km,  in  the  Tran¬ 
sition  Zone,  the  dominant  minerals  (oliv¬ 
ine,  pyroxenes,  garnet)  go  through  a  series 
of  changes  (phase  transitions)  to  denser, 
higher-pressure  forms,  which  dominate  the 
mineralogy  of  the  lower  mantle  (>660  km). 
The  convection  of  the  asthenosphere  drives 
(or  responds  to)  the  movement  of  the  tec¬ 
tonic  plates  that  make  up  Earth’s  crust  (Fig. 
lb).  In  the  upwelling  parts  of  the  convec¬ 
tion  system,  decompression  induces  melting, 
with  the  production  of  a  range  of  magma 
types,  at  relatively  shallow  levels  of  the 
asthenosphere.  Where  plates  descend  into 
the  mantle  at  subduction  zones,  the  intro¬ 
duction  of  water  helps  to  cause  large-scale 
melting,  producing  volcanic  arcs^ — ^  ranges 
of  volcanoes  like  the  Andes.  Whether  the 
whole  mantle  convects  in  the  same  way  is 
still  debated,  but  it  is  clear  that  material 
does  emerge  from  the  Transition  Zone  or 
even  the  core-mantle  boundary,  in  the  form 
of  plumes,  which  bring  hot  mantle  to  near 
the  surface.  The  results  are  visible  in  chains 
of  volcanoes  such  as  Hawaii;  these  '‘hotspot 
trails”  reflect  the  movement  of  an  oceanic 
plate  over  a  stationary  plume  (Fig.  Ic). 

The  role  of  fluids  in  all  of  these  mantle 
processes  is  a  major  focus  of  the  research 
program  in  the  ARC  Centre  of  Excellence 
for  Core  to  Crust  Fluid  Systems  (CCFS). 
The  presence  of  fluids  helps  to  determine 
the  viscosity  of  the  convecting  mantle,  the 
temperatures  at  which  it  melts  to  produce 
magmas  (which  also  are  fluids),  the  nature 
of  volcanic  eruptions  (explosive  vs  quies¬ 
cent)  and  the  compositions  of  the  magmatic 
products.  We  need  to  know  the  nature  and 
distribution  of  different  types  of  fluids  in 


the  mantle  if  we  are  to  understand  these 
processes. 

Oxidation-reduction  (redox)  reactions,  in 
which  oxygen  is  transferred  from  one  min¬ 
eral  to  another,  or  from  a  fluid  to  a  rock  or 
vice  versa,  play  a  vital  role  in  many  Earth 
processes,  especially  in  the  genesis  of  igneous 
rocks,  and  the  movement  and  reaction  of 
fluids  at  all-  levels  of  Earth’s  internal  archi¬ 
tecture.  Redox  reactions,  as  well  as  pres¬ 
sure  (P)  and  temperature  (T),  can  control 
which  minerals  are  stable  in  rocks,  and  the 
distribution  of  water,  carbon  dioxide  (CO2), 
methane  (CH4),  hydrogen  and  other  compo¬ 
nents  in  fluids  moving  through  the  mantle 
and  crust.  Via  such  fluids,  redox  reactions 
also  are  very  important  in  the  formation  of 
many  types  of  ore  deposits. 

The  “redox  state”  of  a  chemical  system  can 
be  expressed  in  terms  of  the  oxygen  fugacity 
(/O2),  which  is  simply  the  partial  pressure  of 
oxygen  in  an  ideal  gas  of  a  given  composition. 
It  commonly  is  expressed  as  values  relative  to 
the y02  of  a  known  reaction  (a  “buffer”;  Fig. 
2).  For  example,  a  relatively  high  oxygen 
fugacity  (“oxidizing”  conditions)  would  be 
defined  by  the  reaction: 

Fayalite  (Fe-olivine)  +  02^  magnetite  + 
qtz 

Fe2Si04+  O2  Fe304  +  Si02  (1) 

the  buffer 

A  much  lower  (more  “reducing”  condi¬ 

tions)  would  be  defined  by  a  reaction  such 
as: 

Iron  +  oxygen  wustite 

2Fe  +  02-^2Fe0  (2) 
the  buffer. 

Most  magmatic  rocks  in  Earth’s  crust 
record  jQ>2  around  the  FMQ  buffer;  the 
upper  mantle  tends  to  have  lower  f^2^  ^.nd 
to  become  generally  more  reducing  (lower 


19 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


jO^  with  depth  (Fig.  2).  The  IW  buffer  is 
thought  to  represent  a  lower  limit  for  j02 
in  the  mantle,  simply  because  mantle  rocks 
contain  so  much  FeO  that  it  would  be  hard 
to  reduce  it  all  to  Fe. 

However,  we  do  know  that  conditions 
more  reducing  than  the  IW  buffer  must 
occur  locally  in  the  mantle,  partly  because 
the  mineral  moissanite  (silicon  carbide,  SiC) 
is  found  in  some  mantle-derived  magmatic 
rocks  such  as  kimberlites  (the  host  rock  of 
most  diamonds)  and  even  as  rare  inclusions 
in  diamonds.  The  stability  of  moissanite  is 
controlled  by  reactions  such  as: 

Enstatite  +  carbon  moissanite  +  forster- 
ite 

MgSi03  +  C  SiC  +  Mg2Si04  (3) 

As  we  study  other  mantle-derived  rocks,  we 
are  finding  that  moissanite  is  unexpectedly 
common  in  the  mantle,  and  can  be  accompa¬ 
nied  by  a  wide  range  of  other  “super-reduced” 
minerals  (e.g.,  metallic  elements,  carbides, 
nitrides)  that  require  even  more  reducing 
conditions  than  moissanite  itself.  These 
occurrences  raise  two  important  questions: 
(1)  what  sort  of  processes  can  generate  such 
conditions  in  Earth’s  mantle?  and  (2)  why 
didn’t  these  minerals  react  with  the  more  oxi¬ 
dized  mantle  in  which  they  are  embedded? 

Recent  studies  also  have  shown  that 
remarkably  similar  super-reduced  mineral 
assemblages  can  be  found  in  mantle-derived 
rocks  from  completely  different  tectonic  set¬ 
tings.  This  suggests  the  widespread  opera¬ 
tion  of  poorly-understood  processes,  not 
previously  recognized  in  the  mantle.  Can 
the  similarities  and  differences  between 
some  of  these  occurrences  provide  clues  to 
the  nature  of  those  processes? 

Here  we  will  give  brief  descriptions  of 
three  such  occurrences,  in  southern  Tibet, 
northern  Israel  and  the  Kamchatka  volca¬ 
noes  of  NE  Russia;  by  examining  their  simi- 


Figure  2.  Oxidation-reduction  (redox)  reac¬ 
tions  and  their  control  on  fluid  compositions, 
(a)  Oxygen  fugacity  vs  depth  (at  1500  °C)  for 
some  redox  buffers;  shaded  field  shows  the 
range  of  jOj  measured  in  rock  samples  from 
the  upper  (lithospheric)  mantle,  all  above  the 
Iron-Wustite  (Fe-FeO)  buffer;  (b)  a  crystal  (4.1 
mm  long)  of  moissanite  from  the  Mt.  Carmel 
area,  Israel;  (c)  relative  abundances  of  different 
species  in  C-O-H  fluids  as  a  function  of  j02 
(after  Kadik,  1997).  Below  the  Iron-Wustite 
buffer  the  fluids  are  completely  dominated  by 
CH4  and  H2.  EMOG/D,  the  buffer  reaction 
Enstatite  +  magnesite  =  olivine  +  graphite/ 
diamond. 


20 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


larities  and  differences,  we  can  speculate  on 
a  common  process. 

Study  Areas 

Tibet 

In  southern  Tibet,  the  Yarlung-Zangbo 
suture  zone  (Fig.  3)  marks  the  great  con¬ 
tinental  collision  between  India  and  Asia, 
which  began  ca  55  million  years  ago  and 
continues  today,  pushing  up  the  Himalayan 
Mountains.  Scattered  along  this  suture  zone 
is  a  line  of  peridotite  massifs  — -  fragments  of 
Earth  s  mantle,  up  to  1 000  cubic  kilometers 
in  volume.  Some  of  these  contain  minable 
bodies  of  chromite  ore,  which  formed  at 
shallow  depths  (5-15  km)  ca  325  million 
years  ago,  when  the  peridotites  were  part  of 


the  mantle  above  a  subduction  zone.  How¬ 
ever,  structures  and  relict  minerals  in  the 
chromite  ores  and  the  peridotites  indicate 
that  these  rocks  were  later  subducted  down 
as  far  as  the  Transition  Zone  (>410  km), 
where  they  remained  for  about  200  million 
years  (McGowan  et  al.,  2015).  During  their 
residence  in  the  Transition  Zone,  the  perido¬ 
tites  probably  heated  up  to  1400—1500  °C; 
this  heating,  and  their  composition,  would 
result  in  them  becoming  buoyant  relative  to 
the  surrounding  mantle. 

The  excavation  of  these  peridotite  bodies 
from  the  Transition  Zone  back  to  the  surface 
can  be  attributed  to  the  forces  exerted  by  a 
later  slab,  subducting  during  a  plate  collision 
event  and  penetrating  into  the  Transition 
Zone.  As  the  slab  stalled,  it  began  to  roll 


Figure  3.  Bird’s-eye  view  (looking  north)  of  the  Tibetan  Plateau,  bounded  in  the  south  by  the 
Himalayas.  Black  lines  show  sutures  between  crustal  blocks  that  have  drifted  together  to  form 
the  region.  The  southernmost  line  marks  the  Yarlung-Zangbo  suture  zone,  where  numerous 
bodies  of  mantle  peridotite  (yellow)  were  emplaced  60-70  million  years  before  the  collision  of  the 
Indian  plate  with  Asia  initiated  the  rise  of  the  Himalayas.  Many  of  these  bodies  contain  diamonds, 
super-reduced  mineral  associations  and  evidence  of  derivation  from  the  Transition  Zone;  the  red 
arrow  indicates  the  famous  Luobusa  peridotite.  Map  courtesy  of  Google  Earth. 


21 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


back,  causing  the  mobile  asthenospheric 
mantle  (Fig.  1,  Fig.  4)  to  flow  in  to  fill  the 
“gap”.  Dynamic  modeling  (Afonso  and  Zlot- 
nik,  2011;  McGowan  et  al.,  2015)  has  shown 
that  this  can  create  a  broad  upwelling  in  the 
deep  mantle,  near  the  top  of  the  Transition 
Zone.  As  slab  rollback  continues,  this  broad 
upwelling  rapidly  develops  into  a  narrower 
channel  of  upward-flowing  asthenosphere; 
this  upwelling  combined  with  the  compo¬ 
sitional  buoyancy  of  the  peridotite  bodies 
to  bring  them  rapidly  (in  6~8  million  years) 
from  the  Transition  Zone  to  crustal  levels, 
where  at  least  some  became  the  seafloor  in 
small  ocean  basins  (Liu  et  ak,  2015). 

Small  diamonds  were  first  recovered  from 
some  of  the  chromite  ores  in  the  peridot- 
ites  more  than  40  years  ago  (Fig.  5;  Bai  et 
al.,  1993).  Since  then  diamonds  have  been 
extracted  from  both  the  ores  and  the  perido- 
tites  in  at  least  seven  tectonically  emplaced 
mantle-derived  bodies  along  the  Yarlung- 
Zangbo  suture  zone,  in  peridotites  on  older 
sutures  in  farther  north  in  Tibet  (Fig.  3),  and 
in  similar  bodies  in  the  Polar  Ural  Moun¬ 
tains  of  northern  Russia  (Yang  et  ak,  2014, 
2015).  These  diamonds  have  created  both 
interest  and  disbelief,  because  they  differ  in 
many  respects  from  “normal”  diamonds  with 
which  most  geologists  are  familiar. 

“Normal”  diamonds  come  from  magmatic 
bodies  of  kimberlite  (an  alkaline  igneous 
rock)  that  typically  occur  in  the  stable  cra- 
tonic  areas  of  continents.  Most  diamonds  in 
the  kimberlites  are  fragments  from  the  con¬ 
tinental  roots,  and  some  may  have  resided 
there  for  billions  of  years;  they  usually  form 
octahedral  crystals,  which  may  be  rounded 
by  chemical  resorption. 


The  Tibetan  diamonds,  in  contrast, 

strongly  resemble  synthetic  diamonds  that 


are  produced  industrially  in  America,  Russia 
and  China.  They  have  smooth  cubic  faces, 

which  are  rarely  seen  on  kimberlitic  dia- 


Figure  4.  A  thermo-mechanical  model  (Afonso 

and  Zlotnik,  2011)  showing  how  the  rollback 
of  a  subducting  slab  sets  up  forces  that  lead  to 


rapid  upwelling  of  the  mantle  from  the  Transi¬ 
tion  Zone.  The  blue  marker  represents  a  mass 
of  much  older,  more  depleted  peridotite  rising 
from  the  Transition  Zone  to  the  ocean  floor. 
(After  McGowan  et  al.,  2015). 


22 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  — Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


monds  (Fig.  5);  they  contain  inclusions  of 
metallic  alloys  (Ni-Mn-Co);  their  carbon  is 
isotopically  very  light;  they  contain  nitro¬ 
gen  as  single  atoms,  whereas  nitrogen  in 
kimberlitic  diamonds  is  largely  recombined 
into  N-N  pairs  or  N4  tetrahedra.  However, 
several  diamonds  have  been  found  in  situ 
in  the  chromites  (Yang  et  ah,  2007,  2014) 
where  they  are  surrounded  by  zones  of  amor¬ 
phous  carbon.  Detailed  studies  (Howell  et  ah, 
2015)  strongly  suggest  that  the  diamonds  in 
the  peridotites  and  chromite  ores  are  in  fact 
natural  and  represent  a  new  environment  for 
diamond  formation  in  the  mantle-— but  one 
that  is  not  well-understood. 

Diamonds  do  not  require  strongly  reduc¬ 
ing  conditions  to  form  in  the  mantle  (EMOD 
buffer.  Fig.  2).  However,  the  diamonds  in 
the  peridotites  of  Tibet  and  the  Polar  Urals 
are  accompanied  by  a  great  variety  of  “super- 
reduced”  minerals  (Yang  et  al.,  2007,  2014, 
2015).  These  include  moissanite  (silicon 
carbide),  native  elements  (Fe,  Ni,  Ti,  Si,  Cr, 
Al),  carbides  of  titanium  and  other  elements, 
silicides  of  iron  and  titanium,  and  titanium 
nitrides.  Many  of  the  more  unusual  minerals 
occur  as  inclusions  in  crystals  of  corundum 
(aluminium  oxide,  AI2O3)  with  unusually 
high  contents  of  titanium  (Xu  et  al.,  2015). 

Aside  from  the  very  low 7O2  required  by 
many  of  these  minerals,  it  is  difficult  to  pre¬ 
cisely  define  the  conditions  of  their  forma¬ 
tion.  Many  of  the  minerals  imply  high  tem¬ 
peratures  (I2OO--I5OO  °C),  and  the  inferred 
presence  of  stishovite  (a  high-pressure  form 
of  quartz)  around  some  super-reduced  phases 
suggests  depths  >300  km  (Dobrzhinetskaya 
et  al,  2009). 

Northern  Israel 

In  the  Mount  Carmel  area  of  northern 
Israel  (Fig.  6),  exploration  for  gemstones  by 
Shefa  Yamim  Ltd.  has  discovered  a  remark¬ 
able  assemblage  of  super-reduced  minerals. 


Figure  5.  Microdiamonds  from  Tibetan  peri¬ 
dotites  (a)  SEM  images  of  diamonds,  with 
octahedral  and  cubic  faces;  (b)  diamond  sepa¬ 
rated  in  CCFS  labs,  showing  yellow  colour 
and  smooth  faces;  (c)  polished  section  showing 
melt  inclusions  of  Ni-Mn-Co  alloy.  Repro¬ 
duced  from  Griffin  et  al.  (20 1 6)  by  permission 
of  Oxford  University  Press. 


23 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  ^VC^es 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


comparable  in  many  ways  to  the  Tibetan 
assemblage  (Table  1).  These  occur  especially 
in  Cretaceous  (ca  99-94  million  year-old) 
volcanic  rocks  on  Mount  Carmel,  and  in 
alluvial  deposits  derived  from  them.  The 
volcanism  occurs  near  the  Dead  Sea  Trans¬ 
form  Fault,  which  represents  the  boundary 
between  the  Arabian  plate  and  the  northern 
(Mediterranean)  edge  of  the  African  plate. 

However,  the  Cretaceous  eruptions  pre¬ 
date  the  first  known  movements  (Miocene) 
on  the  fault  by  about  70  million  years  (Sass, 
1980;  Garfunkel,  1989).  Gas-rich  explosive 
eruptions  produced  thick  pyroclastic  depos¬ 


its  (Fig.  6b)  and  some  flows  of  frothy,  glassy 
lavas  (Sass,  1980).  The  primary  magmas  are 
mildly  alkaline  basalts.  The  presence  of  frag¬ 
ments  of  dense  mantle  rocks  (garnet  pyrox- 
enites  and  websterites;  Mittlefehldt,  1986; 
Kaminchik,  2014;  this  work)  shows  that  the 
magmas  erupted  very  rapidly  once  they  had 
risen  to  depths  of  around  80  km. 

In  addition  to  gem-quality  sapphires, 
rubies  and  “normal”  diamonds,  the  Shefa 
Yamim  exploration  program  has  produced 
unusually  large  crystals  of  moissanite  (Fig. 
2)  and  large  grains  (up  to  2.5  cm  across) 


Figure  6.  (a)  Geological  map  of  northern  Israel;  Mt  Carmel  area  is  circled,  and  volcanic  centres 
are  marked  by  red  dots;  (b)  sawn  section,  ca  30  cm  high,  of  volcanic  tuff  from  Mt  Carmel. 


24 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


Figure  7.  Fragment  of  non-gem  corundum 

from  Mt.  Carmel;  dark  irregular  blobs  are 
pockets  of  melt  trapped  within  and  between 
grains  of  transparent  corundum.  (After  Griffin 
et  ak,  2016b). 


of  non-gem  corundum”  (Fig.7).  The  latter 
has  proved  to  be  a  Rosetta  Stone  for  under¬ 
standing  the  development  of  highly  reducing 
conditions  in  Earth’s  mantle. 

Irradiation  of  the  non-gem  corundum 
with  electrons  produces  a  bright  pink  fluo¬ 
rescence  (cathodoluminescence,  or  CL;  Fig. 
8),  which  shows  remarkable  patterns  that 
outline  the  growth  of  the  crystals.  Micro¬ 
chemical  analysis  shows  that  variations  in  the 
CL  response  correlate  with  differences  in  the 
Ti  content  of  the  corundum — -light  areas 
fluoresce  brightly,  while  high  Ti  contents 
induce  darker  shades.  The  patterns  show 
that  individual  samples  of  the  corundum 
typically  consist  of  many  smaller  crystals, 
with  pockets  of  melt  trapped  along  the  grain 
boundaries  and  within  the  crystals  (Fig.  7, 
8).  These  melt  pockets  now  consist  of  cal- 
cium-aluminium-magnesium  silicate  glass 
and  minerals  that  crystallized  from  it  before 
the  volcanic  eruption  carried  the  corundum 


Figure  8.  Cathodoluminescence  images  of 
polished  fragments  of  non-gem  corundum. 
Real  colours  range  from  light  to  dark  pink  to 
nearly  black.  Light  areas  have  low  concentra¬ 
tions  of  Ti;  dark  areas  are  zoned  toward  melt 
pockets  and  have  up  to  2.6  at.%  Ti.  (a)  mul¬ 
tiple  “stacked”  crystals  of  corundum  outlined 
by  high-Ti  zones;  (b)  detail  of  crystal  showing 
growth  zoning  that  outlines  hollow  (“hopper”) 
faces  and  internal  cavities  filled  with  glass 
(dark  CL;  frozen  melts).  (After  Griffin  et  ak, 
2016b). 


25 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 

fragments  to  the  surface — so  these  minerals  The  corundum  and  its  trapped  minerals 

were  crystallizing  in  (or  somewhere  above)  record  very  reducing  conditions.  Micro- 

the  magmatic  plumbing  system.  chemical  analysis  shows  that  the  Ti  substi¬ 

tuting  in  the  corundum  is  the  highly  reduced 


Figure  9.  Four  types  of  melt  pocket  in  non-gem  corundum  from  Mt.  Carmel,  illustrating  some 
of  the  unusual,  highly-reduced  mineral  associations,  (a)  SEM  false-colour  phase  map  showing 
minerals  and  glass  in  a  typical  silicate  melt  pocket  in  corundum;  (b)  Ti  map  showing  nitrides, 
borides  and  silicides  filling  internal  cavities  in  hopper  crystal  of  corundum;  (c)  back-scattered 
electron  (BSE)  image  of  TiC  crystallized  from  an  Fe-silicide  melt,  enclosed  in  corundum;  (d) 
BSE  image  of  composite  pocket  of  native  vanadium,  fluorite  (CaF2)  and  hibonite  (a  Ca-Al  oxide) 
enclosed  in  corundum. 


26 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


form  Ti3+  (most  Ti  minerals  contain  the 
more  oxidized  TP+),  and  one  of  the  most 
common  minerals  in  the  melt  pockets  is  tis- 
tarite  (Ti203;  Fig.  9a).  Reduction  ofTi02 
(Ti4+)  to  Ti203  (Ti3+)  requires  ^"“8  orders 
of  magnitude  below  the  IW  buffer;  these 
are  seriously  reducing  conditions.  However, 
even  lower  JO  2  is  required  by  the  presence  of 
TiO  (with  Ti2+)  as  a  separate  mineral,  and  as 
a  component  in  other  oxides  (Fig.  2).  Other 
low-  j02  minerals  in  the  melt  pockets  include 
kharambaevite  (titanium  carbide,  TiC),  iron 
silicide  (Fe3Si),  titanium  nitrides,  native  iron 
and  native  vanadium  (Fig.  9b-d).  The  crys¬ 
tallization  sequence  of  minerals  in  the  melt 
pockets  suggests  a  continuous  decrease  in 
j02  during  their  formation. 

Moissanite  has  been  found  included  in  the 
corundum,  suggesting  that  both  were  part 
of  the  same  magmatic  system.  The  CF  pat¬ 
terns  of  the  corundum  show  that  it  grew  as 
“hopper  crystals”  (Fig,  9),  with  hollow  faces 
and  branching  internal  cavities.  This  type  of 
growth  is  characteristic  of  rapid  crystalliza¬ 
tion  from  fluids  that  are  supersaturated  in  a 
component,  in  this  case  AI2O3.  There  is  no 
obvious  genetic  link  between  the  diamonds 
and  the  corundum,  although  exploration 
has  recovered  a  few  microdiamonds  similar 
to  those  found  in  Tibet.  However,  the  abun¬ 
dance  of  carbide  minerals,  and  breccia  veins 
full  of  amorphous  carbon  cutting  the  grains 
of  corundum,  imply  the  presence  of  fluid(s) 
very  rich  in  carbon.  These  two  observations 
may  be  the  key  to  the  origin  of  this  bizarre 
mineral  system  (see  below). 

It  is  difficult  to  constrain  the  temperature 
and  depth  of  the  fluid  plumbing  system.  As 
in  the  Tibetan  example,  some  of  the  minerals 
present  (and  the  presence  of  glass)  suggest 
temperatures  in  the  range  1200-1500  °C. 
The  presence  of  the  feldspar  anorthite  (CaAl- 
251203)  in  some  melt  pockets  suggests  the 


reaction  corundum  +  melt  anorthite, 
which  would  constrain  the  depth  to  between 
30  and  100  km.  Fragments  of  mantle  rocks 
found  in  the  volcanic  ashes  suggest  that  the 
lithospheric  mantle  (Fig.  1)  beneath  the  area 
at  the  time  of  eruption  was  less  than  100 
km  thick. 

Kamchatka  Peninsula,  NE  Russia 
The  Kamchatka  peninsula  (Fig.  10)  hosts 
many  large,  active  strato volcanoes,  reflect¬ 
ing  the  ongoing  subduction  of  the  Pacific 
plate  beneath  NE  Asia.  From  November 
2012~September  2013,  fissure  eruptions 
occurred  on  the  flank  of  the  Plosky  Tol- 
bachik  volcano.  The  first  eruptions,  espe¬ 
cially  at  the  site  known  as  Proryv  Naboko, 
were  voluminous  and  highly  explosive,  with 
gas  jets  erupting  >250  m  in  the  air  (Gor¬ 
deev  et  ak,  2013);  later  stages  produced  huge 
emissions  of  sulfur  dioxide  (SO2),  with  lava 
fountains  and  pyroclastic  deposits.  Much 
of  the  early-erupted  material  consisted  of 
extremely  frothy,  glassy  lavas  and  pyroclastic 
material.  The  lavas  are  silica-rich  basalts,  and 
can  be  divided  into  a  low-Fe  group  and  a 
high-Fe  group. 

Two  samples  of  the  frothy  lavas  from  the 
first  eruptions  yielded  abundant  diamonds 
(>700  grains);  most  were  of  a  “yellowish- 
greenish”  colour,  and  occur  in  gas  cavities 
in  the  lava.  Individual  grains  of  moissanite, 
corundum  (red,  blue  and  Ti-bearing)  and 
native  elements  (Fe,  Cu,  Al)  were  found  in 
the  same  samples,  also  within  gas  cavities. 
Similar  reduced  minerals  also  have  been 
reported  from  the  lavas  of  several  other  vol¬ 
canos  on  Kamchatka  (Gordeev  et  ah,  2013), 
and  both  moissanite  and  Ti-bearing  corun¬ 
dum  are  common  associates  of  “diamond¬ 
bearing  ores  of  unconventional  types”  related 
to  explosive  volcanism  in  Russia  (Karpov  et 
al.,  2014). 


27 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


The  diamonds  from  Tolbachik  (Karpov  et 
ah,  2014)  are  typically  250-700  pm  in  size, 
and  show  many  remarkable  similarities  with 
those  from  the  peridotites  of  Tibet  and  the 
Polar  Urals.  They  have  the  same  distinctive 
colour  and  the  same  cubo-octahedral  habit, 
with  smooth  cubic  faces  (Fig.  10);  they  con¬ 
tain  nitrogen  almost  entirely  as  single  nitro¬ 
gen  atoms;  they  have  similar  isotopically- 


light  carbon  (S^^C  =  -27  to  -23,  compared 
to  -28  to  -24  in  the  Tibetan  diamonds). 
Some  crystals  show  hollows  on  the  cubic 
faces,  suggestive  of  hopper  growth  (“diffu¬ 
sion  hunger”;  Karpov  et  ah  2014).  Unfor¬ 
tunately,  no  information  is  available  so  far 
on  the  nature  of  inclusions  in  the  Tolbachik 
diamonds. 


Figure  10.  (a)  location  of  the  Kamchatka  Peninsula  (box)  in  Far  Eastern  Russia;  (b)  map  of  the 
Kamchatka  Peninsula  showing  lines  of  volcanoes  (red  dots)  related  to  subduction  of  the  Pacific 
Plate  beneath  the  continental  margin  (Okhotsk  Block);  red  stars  mark  sites  of  Avacha  volcano, 
and  the  2012-2014  Tolbachik  eruption;  (c)  SEM  images  of  diamonds  from  lavas  of  the  Tolbachik 
eruption  of  2012,  showing  mixtures  of  octahedral  (111)  and  cubic  faces  (cf  Fig.  5a);  arrows 
point  to  hollow  faces  that  may  indicate  either  hopper  growth  or  later  dissolution  (After  Karpov 
et  al,  2014). 


28 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  — -  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


Discussion 

Similarities  and  Differences 

(1)  Tectonic  environment:  The  three  locali¬ 
ties  discussed  here  lie  in  three  distinct  tectonic 
environments,  but  there  may  be  common 
factors.  The  Kamkatcha  peninsula  lies  above 
a  major  ocean-continent  collision,  with  ongo¬ 
ing  subduction  and  large  active  volcanoes. 
The  Tibetan  peridotites  are  in  a  major  conti¬ 
nental-  collision  zone  (India-Asia),  as  are  the 
Polar  Urals  occurrences  (Asia-Europe),  and 
there  is  only  limited  evidence  of  volcanism 
related  to  their  emplacement.  However,  the 
continent-continent  collisions  in  both  cases 
were  preceded  by  the  subduction  of  oceanic 
plates,  which  may  have  brought  up  the  peri- 
dotite  bodies.  The  Cretaceous  volcanism  in 
the  Mt  Carmel  area  also  lies  along  a  plate 
boundary,  but  in  this  case  it  is  the  Dead  Sea 
Transform  Fault  (Fig.  6),  along  which  the 
plates  grind  past  one  another  rather  than  sub¬ 
ducting.  In  this  case  the  movement  on  the 
fault  accommodates  the  opening  of  the  Red 
Sea  to  the  south,  transferring  the  movement 
to  another  major  fault  in  southern  Turkey. 
This  plate  boundary  (1000  km  long)  thus 
must  extend  well  down  into  the  mantle, 
and  could  provide  a  conduit  for  deep-seated 
magmas  and  fluids  similar  to  those  generated 
by  deep  subduction. 

(2)  Associated  magmas:  The  composition 
of  the  lavas  that  carry  the  Kamchatka  and  Mt 
Carmel  low-  jOj  mineral  assemblages  lie  in 
the  broad  spectrum  of  basaltic  compositions 
associated  with  shallow  melting  of  the  mantle 
below  the  lithosphere.  The  Kamchatka  lavas 
are  characteristic  of  the  volcanic  rocks  of 
magmatic  arcs  above  continental-margin 
subduction  zones.  The  basalts  of  northern 
Israel  are  more  similar  to  “intraplate”  basalts, 
and  have  been  described  as  the  products  of 
a  deep-seated  mantle  plume,  with  most  of 


the  melting  occurring  just  below  the  base  of 
the  lithosphere  (Fig.  Ic;  Stein  and  Hofmann, 
1992).  The  only  magmas  contemporane¬ 
ous  with  the  Tibetan  peridotites  are  similar 
to  the  basalts  erupted  at  mid-ocean  ridges 
(Liu  et  al,  2015;  Zhang  et  al.,  2015);  there 
is  no  evidence  to  link  these  magmas  to  the 
super-reduced  mineral  suite.  These  differ¬ 
ences  suggest  that  the  composition  of  the 
magmas  is  not  a  critical  factor  in  generating 
the  low-^2  assemblages. 

(3)  Super-reduced  mineral  assemblages: 
The  major  minerals  of  the  low-  j02  assem¬ 
blages  are  similar  in  all  three  occurrences 
(Table  1).  The  investigations  of  the  Kam¬ 
chatka  lavas  have  only  begun,  so  relatively 
few  phases  have  been  identified.  The 
Tibetan  minerals,  which  have  been  studied 
by  many  Chinese  scientists  for  more  than  30 
years,  include  more  than  80  different  species, 
many  known  only  as  single  grains  (Yang  et 
al.,  2014).  The  assemblage  from  northern 
Israel  has  been  under  detailed  study  for  only 
a  year  or  two;  it  contains  >65  identified 
compounds,  many  not  previously  known 
as  naturally  occurring  minerals,  but  it  also 
lacks  many  of  those  identified  in  Tibet.  This 
may  reflect  the  vagaries  of  observation,  but 
may  also  indicate  subtle  differences  between 
the  conditions  of  crystallization  in  different 
localities.  For  example,  diamonds  are  rela¬ 
tively  abundant  in  the  Tibetan  and  Siberian 
localities,  but  very  rare  in  the  Mt.  Carmel 
volcanics  (one  microdiamond  in  a  252  kg 
sample);  this  might  reflect  differences  in  the 
depth  of  their  respective  volcanic  systems.  It 
is  important  to  recognize  the  unique  nature 
of  the  diamonds  found  in  both  Tibet/Polar 
Urals  and  Kamchatka,  which  appears  to 
require  processes  different  from  those  that 
generate  the  “normal”  kimberlitic  diamonds 
formed  in  old  continental  roots  (Howell  et 
ah,  2015). 


29 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  ^^^^es 
Griffin  et  aL  — Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


Geeeratio.g  super-reducing 
conditions— some  evidenccj 
some  speculation 

As  noted  in  the  Introduction,  there  are  two 
problems-^ how  to  generate  super-reducing 
conditions  in  the  upper  mantle,  and  how 
to  stop  the  products  from  reacting  with  the 
surrounding  oxidized  mantle,  A  key  to  the 
first  question  may  lie  in  the  mineral  tistarite 
(Ti203;  Fig.  9).  The  N.  Israel  samples  rep¬ 
resent  the  first  known  terrestrial  occurrence 
of  this  mineral;  its  “type  locality”  (Fig.  11) 
is  a  single  tiny  grain  in  the  Allende  mete¬ 
orite,  where  it  occurs  together  with  TiC 
and  corundum,  as  in  the  N.  Israel  samples. 
Allende  is  a  carbonaceous  chondrite— one 
of  the  most  primitive  types  of  meteorite,  and 
one  of  the  oldest  objects  in  the  Solar  System. 
The  tistarite-TiC-corundum  association  in 
Allende  represents  early  condensates  from 
the  solar  nebula,  in  regions  near  the  Sun; 
they  reflect  conditions  of  low  pressure,  but 
high  temperature  (>1400  °C)  and  a  very  low 
JO2  (Fig.  2)  related  to  the  streaming  of  the 
hydrogen-dominated  solar  wind  through  the 
nebular  cloud.  How  could  we  generate  such 
“nebular”  conditions  on  Earth? 

One  possibility  is  illustrated  by  Figure 
2c;  in  the  deep  Earth,  at  ^2  below  the  IW 
buffer,  mantle  fluids  are  dominated  by  meth¬ 
ane  (CH4)  and  hydrogen  (H2).  If  we  can 
bring  large  amounts  of  such  fluids  to  shallow 
depths,  and  keep  them  from  equilibrating 
with  the  mantle  on  the  way  up,  they  would 
have  a  strongly  reducing  effect  on  their 
environment  when  they  reached  the  upper 
mantle,  as  shown  by  reactions  such  as  (4): 

2CH4  +  02^  2H2  +  2C  +  2H2O  (4) 

where  C  is  diamond  or  graphite,  depending 
on  pressure. 

In  addition,  reaction  (5)  can  occur  at  shal¬ 
low  depths  (<3  km),  and  carbon  monoxide 


Figure  11.  (a)  Slice  of  the  Allende  meteorite, 
showing  pea-sized  chondrules  and  irregular 
light-coloured  Calcium-Aluminium  Inclu¬ 
sions,  containing  refractory  phases  condensed 
from  the  early  Solar  nebula;  (b)  the  association 
of  tistarite  (^203),  khamrabaevite  (TiC)  and 
corundum  in  the  Allende  meteorite  (After  Ma 
and  Rossman,  2009).  This  is  the  type  material 
of  tistarite,  and  was  the  only  known  occur¬ 
rence  before  the  discovery  of  this  mineral  asso¬ 
ciation  in  the  corundum  from  the  Mt  Carmel 
area  (c£  Fig.  9). 

is  a  very  powerfiil  reducing  agent  in  its  own 

right: 

2CH4  +  O,  4H2  +  2CO; 

2C0->C  +  H20  (5) 

Note  that  these  reactions  also  can  liberate 
and  deposit  large  proportions  of  carbon, 
which  is  consistent  with  the  abundance  of 
diamonds  and/or  carbide  minerals  in  these 
deposits. 


30 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Griffin  et  al.  —  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


Rapid  crystallization  of  corundum,  SiC 
and  other  minerals 

The  second  problem  noted  above  is  in  keep¬ 
ing  the  newly-formed  low-  JO2  minerals 
from  reacting  with  the  surrounding  mantle; 
the  available  observations  offer  a  few  sugges¬ 
tions.  Where  the  Tibetan  moissanite  (and 
diamond)  have  been  seen  in  situ,  the  grains 
are  surrounded  by  mantles  of  amorphous 
carbon.  The  nature  and  origin  of  this  mate¬ 
rial  is  not  clear  from  the  available  research, 
but  it  could  at  least  provide  a  protective  coat¬ 
ing.  Perhaps  more  important  is  the  presence 
in  all  three  localities  of  a  Ti-rich  corundum; 
our  work  suggests  that  this  is  itself  an  indica¬ 
tor  of  low  y02.  The  hopper  growth  of  the 
corundum  in  the  Mt  Carmel  localities  is  an 
important  clue.  The  rapid  growth  of  a  large, 
porous  network  of  corundum  crystals  in  a 
magmatic  (or  hydrothermal)  conduit  could 
provide  a  low-  j02  “sheltered  environment” 
that  would  be  isolated  from  the  surrounding 
mantle,  while  reducing  fluids  could  continue 
to  flow  through  the  network.  This  process 
could  be  the  key  link  among  the  localities. 

But  what  processes  can  produce  a  melt 
or  fluid  that  is  so  super-saturated  in  Al 
that  it  can  rapidly  crystallize  large  volumes 
of  corundum,  apparently  unaccompanied 
by  any  of  the  minerals  common  in  mafic 
magmas?  One  possibility  is  suggested  by 
the  crystallization  of  anorthite  (a  feldspar 
mineral;  CaAl2Si208)  in  the  melt  pockets 
of  the  Shefa  Yamim  corundum.  Anorth¬ 
ite  melts  directly  to  liquid,  or  crystallizes 
directly  from  melts,  at  low  pressure,  but  at 
depths  of  10  km-30  km,  corundum  crys¬ 
tallizes  first  from  Al-rich  melts  (Goldsmith, 
1980),  and  anorthite  only  begins  to  crys¬ 
tallize  at  lower  temperatures.  Anorthite 
is  unstable  deeper  than  about  30  km,  but 
corundum  can  crystallize  from  melts  to 
much  greater  depths.  The  simplest  way  to 


make  a  basaltic  magma  “dump”  corundum 
is  to  remove  silica  (Si02).  If  this  occurs  at 
1 0-30  km  depths,  this  desilication  can  move 
the  magma  into  a  compositional  space  rich 
in  Ca  and  Al  (the  anorthite  component);  at 
depths  >30  km,  corundum  will  be  the  first 
phase  to  crystallize,  and  will  continue  to  be 
the  only  crystallizing  phase  over  a  wide  span 
of  temperature  as  the  magma  cools.  The 
reducing  processes  discussed  above  provide 
a  way  to  desilicate  the  magma,  for  example 
by  reactions  like  (3)  and  (6): 

Si02  (in  silicates)  +  CH4  SiC  +  2  H2O; 
H2O  +  2CH4  C  T  CO2  +  4H2  (6) 

Thus  the  streaming  of  CH4-rich  fluids 
through  the  large  “plumbing  systems”  asso¬ 
ciated  with  deep-seated  volcanism  at  plate 
boundaries  could  be  the  process  that  results 
in  the  crystallization  of  both  corundum 
and  moissanite,  and  their  associated  low- 
JO2  minerals,  within  the  upper  mantle.  In 
the  case  of  the  Tibetan  peridotites,  these 
plumbing  systems  have  not  been  recognized; 
they  may  have  been  obscured  by  the  post¬ 
emplacement  deformation  and  recrystalli¬ 
zation  of  the  peridotites  and  many  of  the 
chromite  ores. 

Conclusions^  Relationships  to 
tectonics 

It  appears  that  the  common  factor  in  the 
three  localities  described  here  may  be  the 
streaming  of  CH4  from  deep  inside  Earth’s 
mantle,  related  to  deep-seated  volcanism 
at  plate  boundaries.  In  Tibet,  geodynamic 
models  suggest  that  the  peridotites  were 
exhumed  from  the  Transition  Zone  (>400 
km)  at  rates  of  6™8  cm/year  (McGowan  et 
ah,  2015) — very  rapid  in  geological  terms. 
We  expect  that  this  upwelling  process  also 
would  generate  large  fluxes  of  deep-man¬ 
tle  fluids,  helping  to  produce  the  basaltic 
magmas.  Kamchatka  lies  above  a  major 


31 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  "^^^es 
Griffin  et  aL  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


subduction  zone,  and  the  rollback  of  this 
slab  would  produce  similar  upwellings  from 
the  deep  mantle.  In  both  cases,  fluids  rich 
in  CH4  and  H2  might  also  be  supplied  by 
the  Mewatering”  of  carbon-rich  marine  sedi¬ 
ments  attached  to  the  subducting  slab  that 
triggered  the  rise  of  the  peridotites. 

There  was  no  obvious  subduction  system 
active  beneath  northern  Israel  in  Cretaceous 
time;  the  magmatism  has  been  ascribed  to 
the  activity  of  a  deep-seated  mantle  plume, 
and  it  seems  likely  that  such  plumes  also 
would  carry  deep-mantle,  CH4”rich  fluids. 
However,  seismic  tomography  shows  that 
the  whole  Eastern  Mediterranean  region  is 
underlain  by  a  network  of  ancient  subducted 
slabs,  from  which  buoyant  material  could 
rise,  if  triggered  by  tectonic  activity  or  slab 
rollback,  as  in  the  Tibetan  situation.  In  either 
case,  local  plume-like  upwellings  could  be 
focused  into  the  major  plate  boundary  that 
became  the  Dead  Sea  Transform  Fault,  pro¬ 
viding  a  tectonic  environment  where  both 
magmas  and  deep-mantle  fluids  could  rise 
to  shallow  levels. 

We  therefore  suggest  that  such  ''jets”  of 
CH4  ±H2  may  commonly  accompany  certain 
types  of  mafic  volcanism,  especially  along 
plate  boundaries,  driven  by  deep  tectonics. 
We  expect  that  in  the  future,  the  unusual 
low- ^2  mineral  assemblages  described  here 
will  be  recognised  in  many  types  of  volcanic 
settings.  However,  they  will  only  be  discov¬ 
ered  when  researchers  begin  to  look  more 
carefully  at  the  minute  trace  minerals  in  vol¬ 
canic  ejecta;  future  studies  will  reveal  if  our 
speculations  are  correct. 

Acknowledgements 

We  thank  Shefa  Yamim  Ltd.,  Dave  Apter  and 
John  Ward  for  their  enthusiastic  collabora¬ 
tion  on  the  Mt  Carmel  material  referred  to 
in  this  study.  Steve  Craven  gave  invaluable 


assistance  with  the  mineral  separation  work. 
Shi  Rendeng,  Qing  Xiong  and  Jonathon 
Aitchison  are  thanked  for  helpful  discus¬ 
sions  on  Tibetan  geology,  and  Jingsui  Yang 
and  Paul  Robinson  for  provision  of  sam¬ 
ples  and  published  figures  relating  to  the 
Tibetan  diamond  problem.  This  work  was 
funded  by  the  ARC  Centre  of  Excellence 
for  Core  to  Crust  Fluid  Systems  (CCFS), 
with  additional  support  from  the  Institute 
of  Tibetan  Plateau  Research,  Chinese  Acad¬ 
emy  of  Sciences  (Beijing).  Analytical  data 
were  obtained  using  instrumentation  funded 
by  DEST  Systemic  Infrastructure  Grants, 
ARC  LIEF,  NCRIS,  industry  partners  and 
Macquarie  University.  This  is  publication 
876  from  the  ARC  Centre  of  Excellence 
for  Core  to  Crust  Fluid  Systems  (http:// 
www.ccfs.mq.edu.au),  and  1126  from  the 
GEMOC  ARC  National  Key  Centre  (http:// 
www.gemoc.mq.edu.au). 

References 

Afonso,  J.C.  and  Zlotnik,  S.  201 1.  The 
subductibility  of  continental  lithosphere.  In 
Brown,  D.  &  Ryan,  P.D.  (Eds),  Arc  -  Continent 
Collision.  Frontiers  in  Earth  Sciences,  Springer- 
Verlag,  53-86. 

Bai,  W-J.,  Zhou,  M-E  and  Robinson,  P-T.  1993. 
Possibly  diamond-bearing  mantle  peridotites 
and  podiform  chromites  in  the  Luobusa  and 
Donqiao  ophiolites,  Tibet,  Canadian  Journal 
Earth  Science  30,  1650-1659. 

Dobrzhinetskaya,  L.F.,  Wirth,  R.,  Yang,  J-S.,  Ian, 
D.,  Hutcheon,  P.K.  and  Green,  Fl.W,  2009. 
High-pressure  highly  reduced  nitrides  and 
oxides  from  chromitite  of  a  Tibetan  ophiolite. 
Proceedings  of  the  National  Academy  of  Sciences 
106,  19233-19238. 

Garfunkel,  Z.  1989.  Tectonic  setting  of 
Phanerozoic  magmatism  in  Israel.  Israel J. 

Earth  Science  38,  51-74. 

Goldsmith,  J.R.  1980.  The  melting  and 
breakdown  reactions  of  anorthite  at  high 
pressures  and  temperatures.  American 
Mineralogist  ■,  272-284. 


32 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Griffin  et  al.  Deep-Earth  Methane  and  Mantle  Dynamics 


Gordeev,  E.L,  Muravyov,  Y.D.,  Samoylenko,  S.B,, 
Volynets,  A.O.,  Melnikov,  D.V,,  Dvigalo,  V.N. 
and  Melekestsev,  LV.  2013.  First  results  from 
the  2012-2013  Tolbachik  Fissure  Eruption  Bull 
Volcanologkal  Society  of  Japan  58,  1-8. 

Griffin,  W.L.,  Afonso,  J.C.,  Belousova,  E.A., 

Gain,  S.E.M.,  Gong,  X-H.,  Gonzalez- 
Jimenez,  J.M.,  Howell,  D.,  Huang,  J-X., 
McGowan,  N.,  Pearson,  N.J.,  Satsukawa,  T, 
Shi,  R.,  Williams,  P.,  Xiong,  Q.,  Yang,  J-S., 
Zhang,  M.  and  O’Reilly,  S.  Y  2016a.  Mantle 
Recycling:  Transition-Zone  metamorphism  of 
Tibetan  ophiolitic  peridotites  and  its  tectonic 
implications.  Journal  of  Petrology  yj  ^  655-684. 

Griffin,  WL.,  Gain,  S.E.M.,  Adams,  D.T, 

Huang,  J-X.,  Saunders,  M.,  Toledo,  V.,  Pearson, 
N.J.  and  O’Reilly,  S.Y.  2016b.  First  terrestrial 
occurrence  of  tistarite  (Ti203):  Ultra-low 
oxygen  fugacity  in  the  upper  mantle  beneath 
Mt  Carmel,  Israel.  Geology  44,  8 1 5-8 18. 

Howell,  D.,  Griffin,  W.L.,  Gain,  S.,  Stern, 

R.A.,  Huang,  J-X.,  Yang,  J.,  Pearson,  N.J.  and 
O’Reilly,  S.Y  2015.  Diamonds  in  ophiolites: 
Contamination  or  a  new  diamond  growth 
environment?  Earth  and  Planetary  Science 
Letters  A50,  284-295. 

Kaminchik,  J.  2014.  The  origin  of  intraplate 
alkaline  mafic  magmatism  in  continental 
shelves:  lavas  and  xenoliths  from  the  Upper 
Cretaceous  volcanoes  of  Mt  Carmel,  Israel. 
Unpublished  MSc  thesis,  Beer  Sheva  University, 
Israel. 

Karpov,  G.A.,  Silev,  V.I.,  Anikin,  L.P.,  Rakin, 

V.I.,  Vasil’ev,  E.A.,  Filatov,  S.K.,  Petrovskii, 

V.A.  and  Flerov,  G.B.  2014.  Diamonds  and 
accessory  minerals  in  products  of  the  20 1 2- 
2013  Tolbachik  fissure  eruption.  Journal  of 
Volcanology  and  Seismology  8,  323-339. 

Liu,  E,  Yang,  J-S.,  Dilek,  Y,  Xu,  Z-Q.,  Xu,  X-Z., 
Liang,  F-H.,  Chen,  S-Y.  and  Lian,  D-Y  2015. 
Geochronology  and  geochemistry  of  basaltic 
lavas  in  the  Dongbo  and  Purang  opniolites 
of  the  Yarlung-Zangbo  suture  zone:  Plume- 
influenced  continental-margin-type  oceanic 
lithosphere  in  southern  Tibet.  Gondwana 
Research  17,  701-718. 

Ma,  C,  and  Rossman,  G.R.  2009.  Tistarite, 
Ti203,  a  new  refractory  mineral  from  the 


Allende  meteorite.  American  Mineralogist  94, 
841-844. 

McGowan,  N.M.,  Griffin,  W.L.,  Gonzalez- 
Jimenez,  J.M.,  Belousova,  E.,  Afonso.,  J.C., 

Shi,  R.,  McCammon,  C.A.,  Pearson,  N.J.  and 
O’Reilly,  S.Y.  2015.  Tibetan  chromitites: 
excavating  the  slab  graveyard.  Geology  43, 
179-182. 

Mittlefehldt,  D.W  1986.  Petrology  of  high 
pressure  clinopyroxenite  series  xenoliths.  Mount 
Carmel,  Israel.  Contributions  to  Mineralo^  and 
Petrology  94,  245-252 

O’Reilly,  S.Y.  and  Griffin,  W.L.  2010.  Rates 
of  magma  ascent:  Constraints  from  mantle- 
derived  xenoliths.  In  Dosseto,  A.,  Turner, 

S.P  and  Van  Orman,  J.A.  (eds)  Timescales  of 
Magmatic  Processes:  From  Core  to  Atmosphere. 
Blackwell  Publishing  Ltd.  Pp.  116-124. 

Sass,  E.  1980.  Late  Cretaceous  volcanism  in 
Mount  Carmel,  Israel.  Israel  Journal  of  Earth 
Sciences  29,  8-24. 

Stein,  M.,  and  Hofmann,  A.W.  1992.  Fossil 
plume  head  beneath  the  Arabian  lithosphere? 

Earth  and  Planetary  Science  Letters  114,  193- 
209. 

Xu,  X.,  Yang,  J.,  Robinson,  P.T.,  Xiong,  E,  Ba, 

D.  and  Guo,  G.  2015.  Origin  of  ultrahigh 
pressure  and  highly  reduced  minerals  in 
podiform  chromitites  and  associated  mantle 
peridotites  of  the  Luobusa  ophiolite,  Tibet. 
Gondwana  Research  27,  686-700. 

Yang,  J.S.,  Dobrzhinetskaya,  L.,  Bai,  W-J.,  Fang, 
Q-S.,  Robinson,  P.T,  Zhang,  J.  and  Green, 
H.W  II  2007.  Diamond-  and  coesite-bearing 
chromitites  from  the  Luobusa  ophiolite,  Tibet. 
Geology  y,  875-878. 

Yang,  J.S.,  Robinson,  P.T.  and  Dilek,  Y.  2014. 
Diamonds  in  ophiolites.  Elements  10  127-130. 

Yang,  J.S.,  Meng,.  E,  Xu,  S.,  Robinson, 

P.T,  Dilek,  Y,  Makeyev,  A.B.,  Wirth,  R., 
Wiedenbeck,  M.  and  Cliff,  J.  2015.  Diamonds, 
native  elements  and  metal  alloys  from 
chromitites  of  the  Ray-Iz  ophiolite  of  the  Polar 
Urals.  Gondwana  Research  27,  459-485. 

Zhang,  C.,  Liu,  C-Z.,  Wu,  F-Y,  Zhang,  L-L. 
and  Ji,  W-Q.  2015.  Geochemistry  and 
geochronology  of  mafic  rocks  from  the  Luobusa 
Ophiolite,  South  Tibet.  Lithos  245,  93-108. 


33 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  34-50.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010034-17 


Chemoenzymatic  pathways  for  the  synthesis  of  biologically 

active  natural  products 

Martin  G.  Banwell*,  Benoit  Bolte,  Joshua  N.  Buckler,  Ee  Ling  Chang, 

Ping  Lan,  Ehab  S.  Taher,  Lorenzo  V.  White  and  Anthony  C.  Willis 

Research  School  of  Chemistry,  Institute  of  Advanced  Studies, 

Tlie  Australian  National  University,  Canberra,  ACT  260 1 ,  Australia 

*  Corresponding  author. 

Email:  Martin.Banwell@anu.edu.au 


.Abstract 

The  whole-cell  biotransformation  of  mono-nuclear  aromatic  compounds  using  certain  genetically- 
engineered  micro-organisms  that  over-express  the  enzyme  toluene  dioxygenase  (TDO)  allows  for  the 
large  scale  production  of  compounds  known  as  r/j-l,2-dihydrocatechols.  These  metabolites,  which 
are  normally  obtained  in  enantiomerically  pure  form,  can  be  manipulated,  by  chemical  means,  in  a 
range  of  distinct  (and  predictable)  ways  with  the  result  that  they  have  proven  to  be  especially  versatile 
starting  materials  for  the  assembly  of  a  range  of  structurally  diverse  and  biologically  active  systems. 
Herein  we  describe,  on  a  case-by-case  basis,  the  recent  applications  of  various  combinations  of 
TDO-mediated  and  chemical  steps  in  so-called  chemoenzymatic  total  syntheses  of  a  range  of  organic 
compounds  with  therapeutic  potential 


Introduction 

hemical  space  the  space  spanned  by 
all  possible  s,mall  molecules  and  chemi¬ 
cal  compounds)  is  essentially  infinite.^  The 
challenge,  then,  has  been  to  access  the  most 
meaningful  or  useful  parts  of  it.  Nature 
has  provided  critical  inspirations.  So,  3.8 
billion  years  of  evolution  has  produced  a 
global  molecular  library  of  unsurpassed  size, 
structural  diversity  and  functional  value  — 
our  planet’s  chemome.23,4  Humankind  has 
sought  to  "'mine”  this  bioactive  molecule 
resource  for  its  benefit  and  such  endeav¬ 
ors  have  been  spectacularly  successful  as 
evidenced  by  the  existence  of  the  remark¬ 
able  array  of  medicines,  materials  and  agro¬ 
chemicals  that  underpin  society  as  we  know 
it  today.  As  a  result  the  world  we  live  in  has 
been  transformed.  This  is  evidenced  by  our 


exploitation  of  drugs  with  household  names 
such  as  penicillin,  morphine  and  Taxol®. 
There  are  many  additional  but  perhaps  less 
well-known  examples.  For  instance,  organ 
transplant  surgery  would  fail  completely 
without  the  post-operative  application  of 
the  chemome-derived  anti-rejection  drugs 
such  FK506  and  cyclosporin  A.^  Similarly, 
a  significant  number  of  agents  that  control 
agricultural  pests,  and  so  helping  to  ensure 
botli  tlie  security  and  efficiency  of  world 
food  production,  have  also  come  from 
Nature/ the  global  chemome.^ 

Despite  such  successes,  enormous  chal¬ 
lenges  remain.  So-called  unmet  scientific 
and  societal  needs  include  those  arising 
from  the  development  of  resistance  to  cur¬ 
rent  therapies  (perhaps  seen  most  promi¬ 
nently  in  the  area  of  antibiotics^)  and,  in  the 


34 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Banwell  et  al—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


agrochemical  sector,  pest-control  agents.^  In 
addition,  there  is  a  desperate  need  for  small 
molecule  entities  that  provide,  inter  alia^ 
effective  control  of  neurodegenerative 
diseases  and  diabetes  in  a  globally  aging 
population,  for  ones  that  treat  certain  types  of 
refractory  cancers  and  for  others  that 
effectively  modulate  mammalian  and  other 
immune  systems. 

After  forays  into  areas  such  as 
combinatorial  chemistry,^  major  players  in  the 
pharmaceutical  industry,  sometimes  in 
parmerships  with  Government- funded 
agencies,  are  remrning  to  interrogation  of  the 
chemome  (or  at  least  portions  thereof)  as  a 
means  for  productively  probing  chemical  and 
thence  biological  space. There  are  a  number 
of  reasons  for  such  moves^®  including  the 
recognition  that,  for  example,  the  current 
pharmaceutical  industry  is  built  on  <10%  of 
the  biosynthetic  capacity  of  the  microbial 
world,  one  that  continues  to  show  a 
remarkable  ability  to  deliver  biologically 
relevant  small  molecules. 

Occurring  in  tandem  with  these  trends  is 
the  emergence  of  a  plethora  of  new 
techniques  and  concepts  concerned  with  the 
generation  of  biologically  relevant  molecular 
diversity  involving  the  use  of,  inter  alia^ 
techniques  of  de  novo  biosynthesis  for 
producing  functionally  annotated  chemome 
components, creation  of  new  metabolic 
pathways,i2  synthetic  fermentation,  and 
activity-directed  synthesis.i^  Simultaneously, 
new  synergies  are  being  recognized  between 
in  vitro,  in  vivo  and  in  silico  studies  of  drug 
metabolism  and  thus  allowing  for  much 
more  efficient/ rapid  assessments  of  the  utility 
of  certain  compounds  as  molecular  probes, 
drugs  and/ or  agrochemicals. 

The  development  of  new  methods  and 
protocols  for  effecting  the  chemical  synthesis 
of  biologically  active  natural  products  and 
various  analogues  remain  important  parts  of 
the  range  of  activities  concerned  with 


exploiting  components  of  the  global 
chemome  for  therapeutic  and  other  purposes. 
At  least  two  motivations  drive  such  efforts, 
the  first  being  the  need  to  address  issues  of 
supply.  Thus,  it  is  often  the  case  that 
secondary  metabolites^  are  only  available  in 
miniscule  amounts  from  their  natural  source 
with  the  result  that  insufficient  material  is 
available  for  development  purposes. 
Chemical  synthesis  is  often  the  best  method 
for  addressing  such  issues.  Secondly,  tmly 
useful  chemical  syntheses  offer  the  capacity  to 
generate  analogues  of  the  natural  product  that 
would  not  normally  be  available  through 
manipulation  of  the  natural  product  itself 

This  article,  which  is  based  on  a  lecture 
presented  by  the  senior  author  at  the 
University  of  Sydney  as  part  of  the  RSNSW’s 
2014  Liversidge  Award,  details  work  being 
undertaken  at  the  Australian  National 
University  on  the  exploitation  of  certain 
chemoenzymatic  methods  for  the  synthesis  of 
biologically  active  natural  products  and  thek 
analogues.  The  work  is  presented  according 
to  the  class  of  namral  product  being  targeted 
as  well  as  the  stmctural  and  chemical 
relationships  between  them. 

Results  and  discussion 

The  term  chemoenzymatic  synthesis  used  in 
this  article,  and  elsewhere, refers  to  the 
assembly  of  target  compounds  using  a 
combination  of  chemical  and  enzymatic 
techniques.  While  there  are  many  variations 
on  this  theme  that  reflect  the  extraordinarily 
diverse  range  of  chemical  and  enzymatic 
transformations  available  these  days,  the 
specific  form  of  the  latter  that  appHes  here 
involves  the  whole-ceU  bio  transformation  of 
a  range  of  simple  and  readily  available 
aromatic  compounds  of  the  general  form  1 
(Scheme  1)  into  the  corresponding  <^>-1,2- 
dihydrocatechols  (2).^^  When  genetically 
engineered  micro-organisms  such  as  E.  coli 
JM109  (pDTG601)i2  ^re  used  for  such 


35 


jouRN.'iL  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


purposes,  these  metabolites  can  be  readily 
produced  at  kilogram  scales  and  are  often 
obtained  in  >99.95  enantiomeric  excess  (ee). 
In  the  illustrated  cases  the  enzyme 
responsible  for  these  conversions  is  toluene 
dioxygenase  (TDO)  but  a  number  of  related 
ones  are  known  including  biphenyl 
dioxygenase,  naphthalene  dioxygenase  and 
toluate  dioxygenase.  The  end  result  is  that  a 
remarkable  suite  of  ahl  ,2-dihydrocatechols 
and  related  metabolites  is  known  -  these 
number  in  the  many  hundreds  at  the  present 
time.^^*^  Given  the  capacities  to  produce 
numerous  mutants,  and  thus  expand  the 
range  of  substrates  that  can  be 
biotrans formed,  the  possible  extensions  of 
such  processes  would  appear  to  be  vast.  A 
further  fascinating  aspect  of  them  is  the 
“chemoselectivities”  they  can  display.  So,  for 
example,  styrene  (1,  X  =  CH=CH2)  is 
converted  into  the  triene  2  (X  =  CH=CH2),  a 
process  wherein  the  aromatic  ring  is  oxidised 
in  preference  to  the  exocyclic  olefin,  a 
fonctional  group  selectivity  that  cannot  be 
achieved  by  any  of  the  strictly  chemical 
methods  known  at  the  present  time.^^ 


Pseudomonas 

putida 

39»D 


or 

E.  COUJM109 
(pDTG601) 


X 


1 


2 

>99.8%  ee 


X  =  H,  Me,  Cl,  Br,  I,  CN,  CH=CH2,  CF3,  COjH  etc 

Scheme  1 


The  utility  of  the  aYl,2"dihydrocatechols  (2) 
as  starting  materials  in  chemical  synthesis  has 
taken  some  time  to  be  recognised  in  a 


broader  sense.  Various  groups,  especially 
those  led  by  Ley  in  the  and  Hudlicky  in 
North  Americad^^’^  have  carried  out  the 
pioneering  work  in  the  area.  Such  studies 
established  the  reactivity  “patterns”  shown  in 
Figure  1  as  well  as  attendant  hazards  arising 
from  the  dehydrative  re-aromatisation  of 
these  substrates^o  and  the  propensity  of 
certain  derivatives,  most  notably  the 
corresponding  acetonides,  to  engage  in 
normally  unproductive  Diels-Alder  (DA) 
dimerization  reactionsdi 


jmorGin’dereZhydroxyl) 

Hazard: 

dehydration/aromatisation 


more  nucleophilic 
double-bond 
(when  X  =  halogen) 


allylic  alcohols 


H 


Claisen-type 

rearrangments 


Figure  1 

Our  own  contributions  in  tiie  area  began  in 
the  late  1 9808^2  and  in  the  intervening  period 
we  have  been  able  to  establish  a  series  of  total 
syntheses  (Figure  2)  that  emphasise  the 
extraordinary  range  of  natural  product  targets 
available  through  manipulation  of  these 
metabolites.  Some  specific  examples  arising 
from  our  recent  research  are  discussed  on  a 
case^by^case  basis  in  the  following  sections. 


36 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Banwell  et  al.-  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


NHAc 

^  ^NH2*H3P04 


lycorine 

degradation  product 


'tt. 


H02C.„_ 


(-)-tricholomenyn  A 


OH  O 


HO2C— d  />“OH 


H  .0 

HO  HN 


(+)-brunsvigme 


OMe  MeO 

HOv.A..„OH 


OH 

(+)-armillarivm 


platencin 


(-)-phomentrioloxin 


Figure  2 


The  Ribisins 

Ribisins  A-D  were  isolated  by  Fukuyama  and 
co-workers  from  Phellmus  ribis  (Schmach.) 
Qu£  (Hymenochaetaceae),“3  a  hingus  used  in 
traditional  medicine  for  various  purposes. 
Using  a  range  of  spectroscopic  methods  they 


were  assigned  structures  3-6  (Figure  3), 
respectively,  and  shown  to  enhance  neurite 
outgrowth  in  PC  12  cells  at  ca.  1  pM 
concentrations.  As  such  they  have  potential 
for  development  as  agents  for  the  treatment 
of  certain  neurological  disorders. 


37 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al™  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


Given  the  structural  resemblance  of  the 
polyoxygenated  cyclohexane  ring  of  these 
natural  products  to  the 
dihydrocatechols  2  (X  =  Br)  we  sought  a 
means  for  effecting  the  relevant  chemical 
conversions.  The  route  used  for  establishing 


a  synthesis  of  compound  5,  the  structure 
assigned  to  ribisin  C  and  the  most  active 
compound  in  the  series,  is  shown  in  Scheme 
2.24 


x-Q 

t)H 


HO 


2  (X  =  Br) 


(i)  2,2nMP, 
l?-TsOH 

(ii)  ot-CPBAs 
DCM 


■'-(7 


aq.  HCl, 
THF 


(90%  over  two  steps) 


pH 

OH 


X 


(i)  CH3I,  NaH, 

THF 

(ii)  AcOH/HjO 


,-p- 


hA 


,OMe 
j  OMe 
OH 


(81%  over  three  steps) 


OH 

111 


14  (49%  over  two  steps) 


Swem 

oxidation 


Scheme  2 


38 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  W7\les 
Banwell  et  al.—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


The  opening  stages  of  this  reaction  sequence 
are  typical  of  the  manner  in  which  the  as-1,2- 
dihydrocatechols  can  be  manipulated  and 
involve  the  initial  conversion  of  compound  2 
(X  =  Br)  into  the  corresponding  acetonide 
and  the  regio-  and  stereo-selective 
epoxidation  of  the  latter  to  give  the  oxirane  7. 
Treatment  of  compound  7  with  aqueous 
mineral  acid  resulted  in  a  regioselective  ring¬ 
opening  reaction  to  afford  the  trans-^o\  8  that 
could  be  bis-O-methylated  under  conven¬ 
tional  conditions  and  the  resulting  acetonide 
was  then  cleaved,  again  under  conventional 
conditions,  to  give  the  <7>-diol  9  that  embodies 
most  of  the  key  elements  of  the  Eastern 
hemisphere  of  target  3.  Compound  9  could 
be  engaged  in  a  Suzuki-Miyaura  cross¬ 
coupling  reaction  with  the  commercially 
available  boronate  ester  10  and  two  products 
thereby  formed,  namely  the  bis-phenol  11  and 
the  dihydrobenzohiran  12.  Product  12  is 
presumably  formed  through  cycHsation  of  the 
initially  produced  cross-coupHng  product 
while  congener  11  arises  from  successive  loss 
of  the  elements  of  water  and  methanol  (no 
particular  order  implied)  from  the  same 
intermediate.  The  lone  hydroxyl  group  within 
compound  11  could  be  protected  as  the 
corresponding  a-chloro-acetate  13,  a 
necessary  step  because  of  the  looming 
introduction  of  a  second  hydroxyl  group  as 
the  precursor  to  the  ketone  moiety.  The  use 
of  the  a-chloroacetate  as  a  protecting  group 
proved  essential  as  in  the  final  step  of  the 
reaction  sequence  attempts  to  remove  the  less 
labde  parent  acetate  resulted  in 
decomposition  of  the  substrate.  Epoxidation 
of  compound  13  using  ;5^-chloroperben2oic 
acid  (;^-CPBA)  led,  presumably  via 
spontaneous  rearrangement  of  the  initially 
formed  oxirane,  to  the  benzofiiran  alcohol  14 
that  could  be  oxidised  to  the  corresponding 
ketone  15  under  Swern  conditions.  Cleavage 
of  the  a-chloroacetate  residue  within  this  last 
compound  was  accomplished  using  zinc 


acetate  in  methanol  and  thus  forming  the 
target  compound  5.  While  aU  the  usual 
spectroscopic  data  acquired  on  compound  5 
matched  those  reported  for  ribisin  C,  the 
specific  rotation  derived  from  the  synthetic 
material  was  of  the  same  magnitude  but  the 
opposite  sign  to  that  reported  for  the  natural 
product.  The  implications  are  clear  —  the 
structure  of  ribisin  C  is  represented  by 
stmcture  entS  rather  than  5.  Since  we 
required  an  authentic  sample  of  ribisin  C  {ent- 
5)  for  biological  testing,  a  synthesis  of  it  was 
pursued.  This  could  be  achieved  (Scheme  3) 
using  the  same  starting  material  and  many  of 
the  same  transformations  as  employed  in 
generating  its  enantiomer  (5).  A  key  step  of 
the  fourteen-stage  reaction  sequence  involved 
the  inversion  of  configuration  at  C3  within  a 
derivative  of  compound  2  (X  =  Br)  using 
IVIitsunobu  chemistry.  As  a  result  ribisin  C 
was  obtained  and  all  of  the  derived  data, 
including  the  specific  rotation,  matched  those 
reported  for  the  natural  product. 


fourteen 

steps 


Mitsunobu  reaction 
using  CICH2CO2H  as 
nucleophile 


ent-S 


[I2]d  =  -  10.8(c  0.5,MeOH) 

Lit.  value  [0]d  =  -  1 1.1  (c  0.5,  MeOH) 


Scheme  3 


Extensions  of  this  sort  of  chemistry  enabled 
the  synthesis  of  all  of  the  stmctures  originally 
assigned  to  the  ribisins  and  thus  revealed  that 
while  ribisins  A  and  D  are  constituted  as 
originally  described-^  that  attributed  to 
congener  B  is,  Hke  C,  incorrect-s  The  true 
stmctures  of  all  the  ribisins  are  shown  in 
Figure  4  with  the  corrected  stereocentres 
within  compounds  B  (16)  and  C  {ent-S) 
highlighted  in  red.  Extensive  biological 
evaluations  of  the  ribisins  and  the  range  of 


39 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al  —  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


congeners  prepared  during  the  course  of  our 
synthetic  studies  are  now  underway. 


ribisin  A  (3) 


ribisin  C  (ent-S) 


ribisin  B  (16) 


ribisin  D  (6) 


Figure  4 

Analogues  of  Galanthamine 

Ribisin  D  (6)  bears  a  ‘‘provocative”  structural 
resemblance  to  the  ABC  ring-system  of  the 
alkaloid  galanthamine  (17)  that  is  used  in 
many  countries  for  the  symptomatic 
treatment  of  Alzheimer’s  disease  (Figure 
As  such  we  were  prompted  to  explore  means 
by  which  the  chemistry  described  above 
could  be  adapted  so  as  to  produce 
compounds  bearing  greater  similarities  to 
galanthamine  (or,  in  the  first  instance  at  least, 
the  enantiomer  thereof. 


ribisin  D  (6)  17 


Figure  5 

An  efficient  reaction  sequence  leading  to  a 
dioxygenated  derivative  of  ^///-galanthamine  is 
shown  in  Scheme  4“"^  and  involves  an  initial 
reaction  of  the  abovementioned  oxitane  7 
with  ^-methoxybenzyl  alcohol  (^-MBOH)  in 
the  presence  of  boron  trifluoride  diethyl 


etherate  to  generate  the  anticipated  addition 
product  that  upon  treatment,  in  a  second 
step,  with  methanol  containing  pyridinium  p~ 
toluenesulfonate  (PPTS)  affords  triol  18.  This 
last  compound  could  be  converted  into  the 
corresponding  Ley  ketal  19-^  through 
treatment  with  2,2,3, 3-tetramethoxybutane 
(2,2,3,3-TMB)  in  the  presence  of  p- 
toluenesulfonic  acid  ^-TsOH) /trimethyl 
orthoformate  (TMOF)  and  Suzuki-Miyaura 
cross-coupHng  of  this  with  the  boronate  ester 
20  (produced  dicectly  from  0-methoxyphenol 
using  a  C-H  functionalization  protocol) 
afforded  the  arylated  cyclohexene  21.  This  last 
compound  that  was  itself  engaged  in  an 
intramolecular  Mitsunobu  reaction  using  di- 
iso-propjl  azodicarboxylate  (DLAD)  to  afford 
the  dihydrobenzofuran  22. 

Despite  tlie  potential  for  aromatisation 
(through  simple  double-bond  migration), 
compound  22  could  be  engaged  in  an 
Eschenmoser-variant  of  the  Claisen 
rearrangement  reaction  using  the  dimethyl 
acetal  of  ATdV-dimethylacetamide-^  and  thus 
affording  the  angularly  substituted  ABC-ring 
analogue  23  of  ^///-galanthamine.  Over  three 
conventional  steps  compound  23  could  be 
converted  into  its  mono-methylated 
counterpart  24.  The  last  compound 
participated  in  a  Pictet-Spengler  cycHsation 
reaction  on  exposure  to  a  mixture  of 
paraformaldehyde  and  trifluoroacetic  acid 
(TEA)  and  the  presumably  first-formed 
product  25  underwent  cleavage  of  the  Ley 
acetal  residue  to  give  diol  26  as  the  only 
isolable  product  of  reaction.  Compound  26, 
representing  a  dioxygenated  derivative  of  ent- 
galanthamine  {ent-YT)^  and  various  congeners 
that  have  been  prepared  using  related  reaction 
sequences  are  currently  being  subjected  to 
evaluation  as  inhibitors  of  the  neurologically 
significant  enzyme  acetylcholine  esterase 
(AChE). 


40 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Banwell  et  al™  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


(i)  PMBOH, 


OPMB 


BF. 


OH 


(ii)  PPTS 
MeOH 


HO  OH 
18  (70%) 


2,2,3,3-TMB 

i?-TsOH,  TMOF 
MeOH 


HO  O 


OMe 


MeO 
19  (86%) 


OMe 


MeO  OH  HO  O 


MeO 


Ph3P,  DIAD, 


21  (71%) 


Pd(dppf)Cl2*DCM 

EtjN 

THF/HjO 


THF 

OH 

(Ty  /  \  ,xOMe 

MeC(OMe)2NMe2 

O 

MejN--^^ 

/r**\  / 

1  '' 

MeO 

- 

toluene 

yOi- 

MeO 

reflux 

MeO  M 

22  (96%) 

23  (86%) 

(CHO)„ 
TFA,  DCE 


Me  O 


three  steps| 
O 


Scheme  4 


26  (63%) 


It  is  worth  noting,  at  this  point,  that  the 
enantiomer  of  certain  of  the 
dihydrocatechols  described  above  are  also 
available.^o  So,  for  example,  biotransform¬ 
ation  of  ^-iodotoluene  or  ^-iodobromo- 
benzene  [27a  (X  =  Me)  and  27b  (X  =  Br), 
respectively]  (Scheme  5)  using  E.  coli]MlQ9 
(pDTG601)  affords  metabolite  28  that  upon 
exposure  to  dihydrogen  in  the  presence  of 
palladium  on  carbon  undergoes 
hydrogenolytic  cleavage  of  the  associated  C-I 
bond  and  thus  delivering  either  dsA,2- 


dihydrocatechol  ent-2  (X  =  Me)  or  ent-2  (X 
Br). 


27 


Scheme  5 


E.  coliJM109 
(PDTG601J 

X  =  Me  or  Br 


2 

(original  metabolite) 


ent-2 


41 


jouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  aL—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


The  Opiates 


Vinblastine,  Vincristine  and  VindoMne 


Morphine  and  its  congener  codeine  are 
members  of  opiate  family.  They  are  used 
extensively  for  the  management  of  pain  and 
represent  the  most  widely  applied  and  highest 
grossing  medicines  in  the  world  today.^^  Their 
structural  complexity  means  that  for  the 
moment,  at  least,  opiates  such  as  morphine 
are  obtained  from  natural  sources  and  then 
derivatized  by  simple  chemical  means  so  as  to 
produce  related  drugs.  Nevertheless,  much 
progress  has  been  made  in  terms  of 
developing  commercially  viable  total 
syntheses  of  these  systems.  HudMcky  and  co^- 
workers  have  defined  the  current  “gold 
standard”  in  the  area.^^  Given  the  tantalising 
structural  resemblance  between  the  readily 
available  compound  23  and  ^»Acodeine  (29) 
(Figure  6)  we  are  now  attempting  to  modify 
the  synthesis  of  the  former  so  as  to  access  the 
latter.  This  will  likely  involve  introducing  the 
necessary  additional  two-carbon  unit  by  using 
a  variant  of  boronate  ester  20  and  completing 
the  synthesis  of  the  less  fiinctionalised 
cyclohexane  ring  within  target  29  using  an 
intramolecular  Sn^  reaction  that 
simultaneously  cleaves  the  Ley  acetal  subunit. 


OMe 


Vinblastine  (30)  and  vincristine  (31)  (Figure 
7)  are  indole-indoline-based  alkaloids  derived 
from  various  plant  sources,  perhaps  most 
notably  the  Madagascan  rosy  periwinkle.^^ 
They  are  used  in  the  clinical  treatment  of 
non-Hodgkin's  lymphomas  as  well  as 
testicular,  breast  and  lung  cancers.  These 
compounds  are  derived  in  vivo  from  the 
significandy  more  abundant  and  co-occurring 
alkaloid  vindoline  (32),  Given  the 
development  of  direct,  chemically  based  and 
“bio-inspired”  methods  for  effecting  the 
conversion  of  this  simpler  compound  into 
alkaloids  30  and  31,  vindoline  has  become  the 
focus  of  considerable  attention  as  a  synthetic 

target,34 

Our  own  efforts  in  this  area  have  been 
inspired  by  the  observation  (Figure  8)^^  ^p^t 
the  mutant  organism  P.  putida  BGXMl  can 
effect,  in  an  enantioselective  fashion,  the 
whole-cell  bio  transformation  of  abundant  m- 
ethyltoluene  (33)  into  the  carboxylic  add  diol 
34  that  bears  a  striking  resemblance  to  the 
highly  fijnctionaMsed  C-ring  of  vindoline. 
Accordingly,  a  recent  focus  of  some  of  our 
work  in  the  area  of  chemoenzymatic  synthesis 
has  been  on  identifying  methods  for 
converting  this  metabolite  into  vindoline  (32) 
and  thence  into  vinblastine  (30)  and 
vincristine  (31). 


23  29 

fe«f-codeine) 

Figure  6 


Madagascan  rosy  periwinkle 


42 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


Figure  7 


Figure  8 

The  model  study  outlined  in  Scheme  6  has 
provided  encouragement.^^  Thus,  the  ^Yl,2- 
dihydrocatechol  2  (X  =  Br),  representing  a 
model  for  congener  34,  was  converted,  by  the 
means  described  earlier,  into  the  oxirane  7. 
Treatment  of  this  last  compound  with  acetic 
acid  in  the  presence  of  mineral  acid  afforded  a 
trans-dkA  mono-ester  that  was  protected 
under  standard  conditions  as  the 
corresponding  MOM-ether  and  thus 
affording  compound  35  that  could  be  cross- 
coupled  with  ethyl  boronic  acid  in  the 
presence  of  a  Pd[0]  catalyst  to  give,  after 
completing  cleavage  of  the  acetate  residue 
using  methanolic  potassium  carbonate,  the 
allylic  alcohol  36.  This  last  compound  was 
engaged  in  a  sluggish  Eschenmoser-Claisen 
rearrangement  reaction  to  give  amide  37,  the 
side-chain  of  which  could  be  elaborated,  over 
three  steps,  into  the  nitrile  38.  Over  a  further 
three  conventional  steps  this  was  converted 
into  the  a-iodocyclohexenone  39  that  itself 
served  as  a  substrate  for  a  palladium-catalysed 
UUmann  cross-coupling  reaction^^  with  o- 
iodonitroarene  40  and  so  delivering  the  a- 


arylated  cyclohexenone  41.  On  exposure  to 
dihydrogen  in  the  presence  of  Raney  cobalti^ 
and  a  proton  source  compound  41  engaged  in 
a  series  of  chemoselective  reductions  and  two 
cyclisation  reactions  with  the  result  that  the 
tetracycHc  compound  42  was  formed.  The 
completion  of  the  synthesis  of  the  pentacyclic 
framework  of  vindoline  proved  straight¬ 
forward  and  involved  reaction  of  the  last 
compound  with  2-bromoethanol  in  the 
presence  of  base,  mesylation  of  the  resulting 
alcohol  43  and  treatment  of  the  sulfonate 
ester  so  formed  with  potassium  /(?/f-butoxide 
to  generate  the  isoindole  44. 

In  an  effort  to  introduce  the 
carbomethoxy  group  associated  with  alkaloid 
32,  compound  44  was  subjected  to  successive 
treatment  with  /(?//-butyllithium  then  Mander's 
reagent  (NCC02Me).3^  However,  rather  than 
obtaining  the  hoped-for  C-carbomethoxy- 
lated  imine,  carbamate  45  was  produced, 
presumably  by  a  pathway  whereby  the  tert- 
butyllithium  acts  as  a  hydride  source^o  with 
the  resulting  indoHne  anion  then  reacting  (at 
nitrogen)  with  the  added  electrophile.  Efforts 
are  now  underway  to  adapt  these  chemistries 
so  as  to  convert  metabolite  34  into  vindoline. 
The  most  challenging  issue  associated  with 
doing  so  will  be  finding  a  means  for 
introducing  the  C-C  double  bond 
incorporated  within  the  D-ring  of  target  32. 


43 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  aL—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


2  (X  =  Br) 


(i)  2,2-DMP, 
l?-TsOH 


(ii)  m-CPBA, 
DCM 


(i)  AcOH/H'" 
(ii)  MOM^Cl/base 


7  (90%  over  two  steps) 


Br 


OMOM 
3S  (89%) 


(i)  EtB(OH)2,  I  00  K2CO3, 
Pd[0]  j  MeOH 


NC 


OMOM 
38  (71%) 


three  steps 


MeC(OMe)2NMe2 

heat 


Raney 


aey  cobalt  |  MeOH 


MeO 


(OMsCI.EtjN  jjQ- 
(ii)  r-BuOK 


MeO 


44  (73%) 


43  (92%) 


t-BuLi 

then  NCCOjMe 


Scheme  6 

The  ProtoiHudanes 

The  title  sesquiterpenes  embody  a  distinctive 
tricyclic  framework  wherein  a  central 
cyclohexane  ring  is  annulated,  in  an  angular 
arrangement,  to  both  a  four-  and  a  five- 
membered  ring.^^  The  protoilludane  aryl 
ester  (+)-armillarivin  (46)  (Figure  9)  has  been 


found  in  the  edible  sugar  mushroom 
A.rmiUaria  melk^-  while  representative 
additional  natural  products  in  this  family 
include  4743  ^nd  48^4  that  are  derived  from 
the  saprotrophic  wood  decomposing  fungus 
Granukhasidium  velkreum  (ElHs  &  Cragin) 
JuDlick 


44 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Banwell  et  al.--  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


Figure  9 

In  2013  we  described  the  first  and  thus  far 
only  total  synthesis  of  (+)-armiUarivin.45  A  key 
element  of  our  approach  (Scheme  7)  was  an 
initial  high-pressure  promoted  and  completely 
regio-  and  stereo-selective  Diels-Alder 
reaction  between  the  as-1 ,2-dihydrocatechol  2 
(X  =  Me)  and  cyclopentenone.^^  Relatively 
conventional  but  rather  extensive 
manipulations  of  the  resulting  adduct  lead  to 
the  cyclop entannulated  bicyclo  [2.2.2] octen- 
one  49  that  engaged,  as  a  second  pivotal  step 
of  the  synthesis,  in  a  photochemicaUy- 
promoted  1,3-acyl  migration  reaction  (Givens 
rearrangement) to  afford  the  tricyclic  isomer 
50.  This  last  compound,  which  embodies  the 
tricyclic  protoiUudane  framework,  was  readily 
manipulated  over  just  three  steps  to  deliver 
(+)-armillarivin.  The  structure  of  this 


synthetically  produced  material  was 
confirmed  by  single-crystal  X-ray  analysis  and 
aU  the  derived  spectroscopic  data,  including 
specific  rotation,  matched  those  reported  for 
the  natural  product. 

Subjection  of  the  acetonide  derivative  of 
compound  2  (X  =  Me)  to  a  Diels-Alder 
reaction  with  cyclopentenone  affords,  vm 
addition  of  the  dienophile  to  the  face  of  the 
diene  opposite  to  that  “occupied”  by  the 
hydroxyl  groups,  cyclopentannulated  bicyclo- 
[2.2.2]  octenones  that  are  enantiomericaUy 
related  to  those  obtained  by  the  pathway 
described  immediately  above.  In  essence, 
dien,  by  controlling  the  facial  selectivity  of 
such  cycloaddition  reactions  eidier 
enantiomeric  form  of  the  relevant  Diels-Alder 
adduct  can  be  obtained. 


sixteen  steps 
including  intital 
Diels-Alder  reaction 


2  (X  =  Me) 


reductionyesterification 


Scheme  7 


45 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al.—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


By  such  means  we  have  recently  been  able  to 
complete  total  syntheses  of  the  enantiomeric 
forms  of  the  protoilludanes  47  and  48^8  and 
thus  confirmingj  for  the  first  time,  the 
structures  assigned  to  them. 

Platencin 

The  Diels-Alder  cycloaddition  chemistry 
involving  aTl,2"dihydrocatechols  as  the 
component  can  be  effectively  extended  to 
intramolecular  variants.  This  is  perhaps  best 
exemplified  in  our  recently  completed  firsU 
and  second“generation  chemoenzymatic 
syntiieses  of  platendn  (51)549,50  ^  compound 
isolated  from  Streptomyces  platensis  MA7327 
that  acts  as  a  potent  and  dual  inhibitor  of 
FabH  and  FabF,  key  enzymes  associated  with 
fatty  acid  biosynthesis  in  bacteria  (Figure 
10)  By  virtue  of  its  novel  structure  and 
modes  of  action,  platencin  is  regarded  as  an 
important  new  lead  in  the  development  of 
urgently  needed,  nexUgeneration  anti= 
bacterial  agents4“ 

In  our  first  generation  synthesis  of 
compound  51  (Scheme  8)5^9  the  acetonide 


derivative,  52,  of  the  aTl,2-dihydrocatechol  2 
(X  =  I)  was  engaged  in  a  Stille  cross-coupling 
reaction  with  the  Z-configured 
aU^enylstannane  53  to  give  tlie  tetra-ene  54. 
Substrate  53  was  prepared  in  a 
straightforward  manner  with  the 
stereochemistry  at  the  quaternary  carbon 
centre  being  controlled  through  the  agency  of 
a  chiral  auxiliary. 

WWle  compound  54  failed  to  engage  in 
an  intramolecular  Diels-Alder  (IMDA) 
reaction,  the  readily  derived  ketone  55  did  so 
when  heated  in  refluxing  toluene  and  thus 
affording,  in  stereochemically  pure  form, 
adduct  56  embodying  the  tricarbocyclic  core 
of  platendn.  Over  a  further  thirteen  steps 
compound  56  could  be  converted  into  (“■)- 
platendn  (51). 

Some  of  these  steps  were  needed  to  deal 
with  functional  group  incompatibilities,  an 
issue  that  has  been  addressed,  albeit  in  a 
modest  way,  through  our  recently  disclosed 
second-generation  synthesis.^®  In  a  devel¬ 
oping  collaboration  with  the  Hudlicky  group 
at  Brock  University  (Canada),  efforts  are  now 
focussed  on  a  third-generation  approach. 


Figure  10 


46 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


51  56  (70%) 

[(-)-platencin] 


Scheme  8 


Conclusions 

Enzymes  have  an  almost  unparalleled 
capacity  to  transform  simple  organic 
substrates  into  synthetically  more  valuable 
ones,  especially  enantiomericaUy  pure 
compounds  (EPCs).  Through  the  use  of 
various  genetic  engineering,  gene  shuffling 
and  directed  evolution  techniques  the 
opportunities  to  expand  upon  the  existing 
‘Tbrary”  of  metabolites  seem  almost  infinite. 
Furthermore,  pathway-engineering  techniques 
provide  a  capacity  to  produce  (mutant) 
organisms  that  effect,  through  the 
orchestrated  action  of  a  series  of  enzymes, 
multistep  transformations.  The  conversion 
of  /W-ethyltoluene  (33)  into  compound  34^^  is 
a  case  in  point  and  wherein  both  mono¬ 
oxygenases  and  dioxygenases  act  in  concert  to 
produce  a  potentially  high-value  metaboHte. 
When  combined  with  the  power  of  chemical 
synthesis  (as  manifest  in  the  techniques  of 
chemoenzymatic  synthesis),  such  bio¬ 
transformations  provide  a  powerful  tool  kit 
for  preparing  a  wide  range  of  compounds  of 


biological  relevance.  Ironically,  perhaps, 
while  microbiologists  have  a  remarkable 
capacity  to  generate  a  diversity  of  low 
molecular  weight  metabolites  (and  often  at 
multi-kilogram  or  larger  scale)  and  synthesis 
chemists  have  an  almost  insatiable  appetite 
for  new  synthons,  the  often  siloed  nature  of 
academic  research  activities  results  in  less  than 
desirable  overlap  of  the  relevant  sets  of 
expertise.  Changing  this  situation  can  only 
benefit  both  discipHnes. 

Acknowledgements 

We  thank  the  Australian  Research  Council 
and  the  Institute  of  Advanced  Studies  at  the 
AustraKan  National  University  for  ongoing 
support.  The  contributions  of  our  colleagues 
who  co-authored  the  publications  referenced 
below  are  also  gratefully  acknowledged,  as  are 
the  useful  comments  of  Rob  Capon  and 
Craig  Williams  (University  of  Queensland), 
Ron  Quinn  (Griffith  University)  and  Peter 
Kamso  (Macquarie  University). 


47 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al  —  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


References  and  notes 

1 J.  L.  Reymond,  Chem.  R^s.,  2015, 48,  722„ 

2.  The  term  chemome  is  used  here  in  the  sense 
defined  by  Wender  (see  re£  3)  and  taken  to 
mean  that  vast  collection  of  secondary 
metabolites  produced  by  the  planet’s  flora  and 
fauna. 

3. P.  A.  Wender,  Nal  Prod  2014, 31,  433. 

4. The  temi  “terpenome”  has  been  introduced  to 
define  that  subset  of  the  chemome  that  is 
terpenoid  in  origin:  M.  B.  Quin,  C.  M.  Flynn  and 
C.  Schmidt-Dannert,  Nat.  Prod.  2014,  31, 
1449. 

5.  See,  for  example,  H.  van  Hattum  and  H. 
Waldmann, Am.  Chem.  Soc.,  2014,  136,  11853; 
(b)  S.  Rizzo  and  H.  Waldmann,  Chem.  R£p.,  2014, 
114,  4621;  (c)  M.  E.  Maier,  0^.  BiomoL  Chem., 
2015, 13,  5302. 

6. B.  C.  Gerwick  and  T.  C.  Sparks,  Pest  Manag.  Set., 
2014,  70,1169. 

7. M.  A.  T.  Blaskovich,  J.  Zuegg,  A.  G,  Elliot  and 
M.  A.  Coo^&T,  ACS  Infect.  DA,  2015, 1,  285. 

8. R.  F.  Service,  Science,  2013, 341, 1329. 

9.  A  very  limited  number  of  drugs  has  thus  far 
emerged  from  the  de  novo  applications  of 
combinatorial  chemistry  techniques:  D.  J. 
Newman  and  G.  M.  Cra^,  J.  Nat.  Prod.,  2012, 
75,311. 

10.  (a)  E.  Kellenberger,  A.  Hofmann  and  R.  J. 
Quinn,  Nat.  Prod.  Rfp.,  2011,  28,  1483;  (b)  J.  L. 
Fox,  Nat.  Biotech.,  2014, 32,  305;  (c)  A.  L.  Harvey, 
R.  Edrada-Ebel  and  R.  J.  Quinn,  Nat  Rev.  Drug 
Discov.,  2015,  14,  111;  (d)  M.  Pascolutti,  M. 
CampitelJi,  B.  Nguyen,  N.  Pham,  A.-D.  Gorse 
and  R.  J.  Quinn,  PPmS  ONE,  2015,  10, 
e0120942. 

11.  J.  R.  Doroghazi,  J.  C.  Albright,  A.  W.  Goering, 
K.=S.  Ju,  R.  R.  Haines,  K.  A.  Tchalukov,  D.  P. 
Labeda,  N.  L.  KeUeher  and  W.  W.  Metcalf, 
Nature  Chem.  Biol,  2014, 10,  963. 

12. x.  Zhu,  J.  Liu  and  W.  Zhang,  Nat  Chem.  Biol, 
2015, 11,115. 

13. Y.  Huang  and  J.  W.  Bode,  Nat  Chem.,  2014,  6, 
877. 

14. G.  Karageorgis,  S.  Warriner  and  A.  Nelson, 
Nat  Chem.,  2014,  6,  872. 

15J.  Kirchmair,  A.  H.  GoUer,  D.  Lang,  J.  Kunze, 
B.  Testa,  1.  D.  Wilson,  R.  C.  Glen  and  G. 
Schneider,  Nat  Rev.  Drug  Discov.,  2015, 14,  387. 


16. For  reviews  on  methods  for  generating  cis~\,2- 
dihydrocatechols  by  microbial  dihydroxylation 
of  the  corresponding  aromatics,  as  well  as  the 
synthetic  applications  of  these  metabolites,  see: 
(a)  T.  Hudlicky,  D.  Gonzalez  and  D.  T.  Gibson, 
AMrichimica  Acta,  1999,  32,  35;  (b)  M.  G. 
Banwell,  A.  J.  Edwards,  G.  J.  Harfoot,  K.  A. 
Jollffe,  M.  D.  McLeod,  K.  J.  McRae,  S.  G. 
Stewart  and  M.  Voegtie,  Pure  AppL  Chem.,  2003, 
75,  223;  (c)  R.  A.  Johnson,  Org.  React,  2004,  63, 
117;  (d)  T.  Hudlicky  and  J.  W.  Reed,  Sjn/ett, 
2009,  685;  (e)  D.  J.-Y.  D.  Bon,  B.  Lee,  M.  G. 
Banwell  and  L  A.  Cade,  Chimka  O^i,  2012,  30, 
No.  5,  (Chiral  Technologies  Supplement),  22;  {£) 
U.  Rinner,  Chiral  Pool  Synthesis:  Chiral  Pool 
Syntheses  from  aYCyclohexadiene  Diols  In:  E. 
M.  Carreira  and  H.  Yamamoto,  (Eds) 
Comprehensive  Chirality,  2012, 2,  240. 

17. G.  J.  Zylstra  and  D.  T.  Gibson,/.  Biol  Chem., 
1989, 264,14940. 

18. The  chemical  dihydroxylation  of  benzene  has 
been  reported  as  a  means  of  preparing  the 
cyclitol  (±)-pimtol:  P.  M.  J.  Jung,  W.  B. 
Motlierwell  and  A.  S.  Williams,  Chem.  Commun., 
1997, 1283. 

19.  See,  for  example,  S.  V.  Ley,  F.  Sternfeld  and  S. 
Taylor,  Tetrahedron  Rett.,  1987,  28,  225. 

20.  (a)  S.  M.  Brown  and  T.  Hudlicky,  in  Organic 
Synthesis:  Theory  and  Applications,  1992,  JAI 
Press  Inc.,  Greenwich,  Connecticut,  1992,  voL 
II,  113;  (b)  D.  R.  Boyd,  J.  Blacker,  B.  Bryne,  H. 
Dalton,  M.  V.  Hand,  S.  C.  Kelly,  R.  A.  More 
O’Ferral,  S.  N.  Rao,  N.  D,  Sharma  and  G.  N. 
Sheldrake,  /.  Chem.  Soc.,  Chem.  Commun.,  1994, 
313. 

21.  These  types  of  acetonides  are  prone  to 
dimerization:  (a)  S.  V.  Ley,  A.  J.  Redgrave,  S.  C. 
Taylor,  S.  Ahmed  and  D.  W.  Ribbons,  Sjnktt, 
1991,  741;  (b)  T.  HudHcky,  E.  E.  Boros,  H.  F. 
Olivo  and  J.  S.  Merola,  /  Org.  Chem.,  1992,  57, 
1026. 

22.  M.  G.  Banwell,  Org.  Prp.  Proced.  Int,  1989,  21, 
255. 

23.  Y.  Liu,  M.  Kubo  and  Y.  Fukuyama,  /  Nat 
Prod,  2012,  75,2152. 

24.  P.  Lan,  M.  G.  BanweU,  J.  S.  Ward  and  A.  C. 
Willis,  Org.  Lett.,  2014, 16,  228. 

25.  P.  Lan,  M.  G.  Banwell  and  A.  C.  Willis,  J.  Ofg. 
Chem.,  2014,  79,  2829. 

26.  For  points-of-entiy  into  the  relevant  literature 


48 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al.—  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


see:  (a)  J.  Nugent,  E.  Matousova  and  M.  G. 
Banwell,  Eur.  J.  Org,  Chem.^  2015,  3771;  (b)  M.  G. 
Banwell,}.  Buckler,  C.  J.  Jackson,  P.  Lan,  X.  Ma, 
E.  Matousova  and  J.  Nugent  J.  —  Devising  New 
Syntheses  of  the  Alkaloid  Galanthamine,  a 
Potent  and  Clinically  Deployed  Inhibitor  of 
Acetylcholine  Esterase  in  Strategies  and  Tactics  in 
Organic  Synthesis  (Ed.  M.  Harmarta),  2015  11,  29. 

27.  J.  N.  Buckler,  E.  S.  Taher  and  M.  G.  BanweU, 
unpublished  observations. 

28.  S.  V.  Ley,  D.  K.  BaeschHn,  D.  J.  Dixon,  A.  C. 
Foster,  S.  J.  Ince,  H.  W.  M.  Priepke  and  D.  J. 
Reynolds,  Chem.  Rer.,  2001, 101,  53. 

29.  For  a  relevant  application  of  this  process  see 
M.  G.  Banwell,  X.  Ma,  O.  P.  Karunaratne  and  A. 

C.  Willis,  /.  Chenf.,  2010,  63, 1437. 

30.  (a)  D.  R.  Boyd,  N.  D.  Sharma,  S.  A.  Barr,  H. 
Dalton,  J.  Chima,  G.  Whited,  R.  Seemayer,  J. 
Am.  Chem.  Soc.,  1994,  116,  1147;  (b)  C.  C.  R. 
Allen,  D.  R.  Boyd,  H.  Dalton,  N.  D.  Sharma,  1. 
Brannigan,  N.  A.  Kerley,  G.  N.  Sheldrake,  S.  C. 
Taylor,/.  Chem.  Soc.,  Chem.  Commun.^  1995, 117. 

31.  For  relevant  background  accounts  see:  (a)  L. 

D.  Kapoor,  Opium  Poppy:  Botany,  Chemisty,  and 
Phannacokgg,  Food  Products  Press,  New  York, 
1997;  (b)  M.  Booth,  Opium:  A  Histoy,  St. 
Martin’s  Press,  New  York,  1998. 

32.  J.  W.  Reed  and  T.  Hudlicky,  Acc.  Chem.  Res., 

2015,  48,  674  and  references  cited  therein. 

33.  (a)  M.  E.  Kuehne  and  1.  Marko,  The  Alkaloids, 
1990,  37,  77;  (b)  H.  L.  Pearce,  The  Alkaloids, 
1990;  37,  145;  (c)  N.  Neuss  and  M.  N.  Neuss, 
The  Alkaloids,  1990, 37,  229. 

34.  J.  E.  Sears  and  D.  L.  Boger,  Acc.  Chem.  Res., 
2015, 48,  653. 

35.  M.  G.  Banwell,  A.  J.  Edwards,  D.  W.  Lupton 
and  G.  Whited,  J.  Chem.,  2005,  58, 14. 

36.  L.  V.  White  and  M.  G.  Banwell,/.  Org.  Chem., 

2016,  81,1617. 

37.  M.  G.  BanweE,  M.  T.  Jones  and  T.  A.  Reekie, 
Chem.  N.  Z.,  2011,  75, 122. 

38.  M.  G.  BanweU,  M.  T.  Jones,  T.  A.  Reekie,  B. 
D.  Schwartz,  S.  H.  Tan  and  L.  V.  White,  Ofg. 
Biomol  Chem.,  2014, 12,  7433. 

39.  S.  R.  Crabtree,  W.  L.  A.  Chu  and  L.  N. 
Mander,  Synlett,  1990, 169. 

40.  G.  B.  Bennett,  W.  J.  HouHhan  and  R.  B. 
Mason,/  Organomet.  Chem.,  1975,  99, 185. 

41.  For  a  recent  and  comprehensive  review  of  the 
area,  see  P.  Siengalewicz,  J.  Mulzer  and  U. 


Rinner,  Eur.  J.  Ofg.  Chem.,  2011,  7041. 

42.  (a)  J.  S.  Yang,  Y.  L.  Su,  Y.  L.  Wang,  X.  Z. 
Feng,  D.  Q.  Yu,  and  X.  T.  Liang,  Yaoxue  Xuebao 
(Acta  Phamaceutica  Sinica),  1991,  26,  117;  (b)  P. 
Cremin,  D.  M.  X.  DonneUy,  J.-L.  Wolfender  and 
K.  Hostettmann,  /  Chromatogr.  A,  1995,  710, 
273;  (c)  D.  M.  X.  DonneUy,  T.  Konishi,  O. 
Dunne  and  P.  Cremin,  Phytochem.,  1997,  44, 
1473. 

43.  C.  L.  Nord,  A.  Menkis,  R.  Vasaitis  and  A. 
Broberg,  Phytoche?n.,  2013,  90, 128. 

44.  C.  L.  Nord,  A.  Menkis,  C.  Lendel,  R.  Vasaitis 
and  A.  Broberg,  Phytochem.,  2014, 102, 197. 

45.  B.  D.  Schwartz,  E.  Matousova,  R.  White,  M. 
G.  BanweU  and  A.  C.  WiUis,  Org.  Lett.,  2013, 15, 
1934. 

46.  See,  for  example,  M.  G.  BanweU,  K.  A.  B. 
Austin  and  A.  C.  WUUs,  Tetrahedron,  2007,  63, 
6388. 

47.  For  a  review  of  this  and  related 
photochemicaUy-promoted  rearrangements  see 
M.  G.  BanweU  and  D.  J.-Y.  D  Bon,  AppUcations 
of  the  Di-rt-Methane  and  Related 
Rearrangement  Reactions  in  Chemical  Synthesis 
in  Molecular  Rfarrangements  in  Ofganic  Synthesis  (Ed. 
C.  M.  Rojas),  2015,  261. 

48.  E.  L.  Chang,  B.  Bolte,  P.  Lan,  A.  C.  WiUis  and 
M.  G.  BanweE,  J.  Org.  Chem.,  2016,  81,  2078. 

49.  E.  L.  Chang,  B.  D.  Schwartz,  A.  G.  Draffan, 
M.  G.  BanweU  and  A.  C.  WiUis,  Chem.  Asian  /., 
2015, 10, 427. 

50.  R.  N.  Muhammad,  A.  G.  Draffan,  M.  G. 
BanweU,  M.  G.  and  A.  C.  WUUs,  Synlett,  2016,  27, 
61. 

51.  For  useful  reviews  of  this  topic  see  (a)  K. 
Tiefenbacher  and  J.  Mulzer,  Angew.  Chem.  Int 
Ed,  2008,  47,  2548;  (b)  K.  Palanichamy  and  K. 
P.  KaUappan,  Chem.  Asian  /.,  2010,  5,  668;  (c)  E. 
Martens  and  A.  L.  Deamin,/  Antibiot.,  2011,  64, 
705;  (d)  M.  Saleem,  H.  Hussain,  1.  Ahmed,  T. 
van  Ree,  and  K.  Krohn,  Nat.  Prod.  Rep.,  2011, 28, 
1534;  (e)  A.  M.  AUahverdiyev,  M.  Bagirova,  E.  S. 
Abamor,  S.  C.  Ates,  R.  C.  Koc,  M.  Miralogu,  S. 
Elcicek,  S.  Yaman  and  G.  Unal,  Infect.  Drug. 
Resist.  2013,  6,  99. 

52.  (a)  R.  E.  W.  Hancock,  Nat.  Rsv.  Drug  Discov., 
2007, 6,  28;  (b)  P.  C.  Appelbaum,/  Antimicrob. 
Chemother.,  2012,  67,  2062;  (c)  S.  Shapiro,/. 
Antibiot,  2013,  66,  371;  (d)  R.  Tommasi,  D.  G. 


49 


JouRN.^L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Roy.4l  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Banwell  et  al  —  Chemoenzymatic  Pathways 


Brown,  G.  K.  Walkup,  J.  1.  Manchester  and  A. 

A.  Miller,  Nat.  Rep.  DmgDiscov..,  2015, 14,  529. 

Martin  Banwell  is  a  Professor  of  Chemistry  in 
the  Research  School  of  Chemistry  at  the 
Australian  National  University.  His  research 


focus  is  on  the  total  synthesis  of  biolo^cally 
active  natural  products  and  his  contributions 
in  this  area  have  formed  the  basis  of  his 
award  of  the  2014  Liversidge  Lectureship  and 

Medal. 


50 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  51-58.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010051-08 


The  curious  economist:  William  Stanley  Jevons  in 

Sydney 

Address  at  the  Dinner  to  Mark  the  Opening  of  the  Exhibition  at  the 
Powerhouse  Museum^ 

The  late  Ian  Casdes^ 

Former  Australian  Statistician,  28  October  2004 


Abstract 

In  2004,  which  marked  the  150th  anniversary  of  William  Stanley  Jevons  arrival  in  Sydney, 
the  Powerhouse  Museum  mounted  an  exhibition  on  “Jevons:  The  Curious  Economist/’  Jevons 
was  born  in  Liverpool,  in  England.  He  studied  chemistry  in  London,  and  came  to  New  South 
Wales  at  the  age  of  1 9  to  work  at  the  Sydney  Mint.  The  Gold  Rush  was  in  full  swing,  and  his 
job  was  to  assess  the  quality  and  purity  of  the  precious  metal  from  the  diggings.  This  work  put 
him  in  a  unique  position,  at  the  intersection  of  geology,  chemistry,  economics  and  industry. 
Wanting  to  document  as  many  aspects  of  life  in  Australia  as  he  could,  Jevons  also  took  up 
photography,  even  taking  his  camera  equipment  to  the  goldfields.  After  five  years  in  Sydney, 
Jevons  returned  to  England,  where  he  eventually  became  the  first  Professor  of  Economics  at 
University  College  in  London.  He  became  a  member  of  the  N.S.W.  Philosophical  Society  on 
13  June  1856.  He  left  Australia  in  April  1859.  He  drowned  in  1882,  aged  46. 

At  a  dinner  to  celebrate  the  opening  of  the  Exhibition,  the  late  Ian  Castles  gave  this  address. 
Ian  Castles  (1935-2010)  was  an  accomplished  statistician  and  civil  servant.  He  was  Secretary 
of  the  Commonwealth  Department  of  Finance  (1979-1986),  the  Australian  Statistician  (1986- 
1994),  and  Visiting  Fellow  at  A.N.U.  between  1995  and  2000.  He  was  Executive  Director 
and  Vice  President  of  the  Academy  of  the  Social  Sciences  in  Australia.  His  family  has  given 
permission  for  the  Journal  to  publish  the  address,  lightly  edited  by  Robert  Marks. 


Introduction 

begin  by  congratulating  the  Powerhouse 
Museum  and  especially  the  exhibition 
curators  —  Matthew  Connell  and  Lindsay 

^  http://www.powerhousemuseum.com/ exhibitions/ 
jevons. php 

2  Lightly  edited,  with  references,  by  Robert  Marks, 
2016. 


Barrett  —  on  the  splendid  exhibition  we’ve 
had  the  privilege  of  viewing  this  evening. 
I’m  sure  that  the  curators  would  agree  that 
they  had  in  ‘'the  curious  economist”  an 
extraordinary  subject  upon  which  to  focus. 

My  job  tonight  is  to  try  and  give  some 
added  context  to  the  amazing  story  that 
began  just  150  years  ago  when  the  teen¬ 
age  Stanley  Jevons  landed  in  this  city.  Em 


51 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Castles  —  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney 


honoured  that  the  Powerhouse  has  invited 
me  to  perform  this  task,  and  especially 
grateful  in  diat,  ten  or  twelve  years  ago,  the 
Museum  could  only  have  seen  me  as  a  nagger 
and  a  nuisance. 

My  interest  in  persuading  the 
Powerhouse  to  mount  an  exhibition  on 
Jevons’  years  in  Sydney  dates  back  to  a 
conference  that  I  attended  at  the  Reserve 
Bank  in  the  early  1990s.  I  can’t  remember  the 
subject  of  the  conference,  but  I  remember 
well  that,  during  the  luncheon  break,  I  strolled 
southward  along  Macquarie  Street  with  a 
visiting  British  economist.  I  pointed  across 
the  street  to  the  fine  building  that  formerly 
housed  the  Sydney  branch  of  the  Royal  Mint, 
and  remarked  tiiat  that  was  where  Jevons  had 
spent  the  first  four  or  five  years  of  his 
working  Hfe. 

My  companion’s  initial  reaction  was  one 
of  disbelief  So  we  crossed  the  road  and  spent 
a  few  minutes  in  the  building  known  as  the 
Mint  Museum,  which  at  that  time  was  part  of 
the  Powerhouse  Museum.  To  my  satisfaction, 
we  were  able  to  confirm  immediately  that 
Jevons  had  indeed  worked  at  the  Mint. 

But  to  my  consternation,  and  that  of  my 
economist  colleague,  the  captions  to  the 
display  revealed  nothing  about  who  Jevons 
was  or  what  he  had  done.  Let  me  quote: 

This  room  ...  focuses  on  the  lives  of  two 
Mint  employees  and  social  aspects  of  the 
gold  msh  era.  [It]  focuses  on  contrasting 
experiences  of  those  years:  life  on  the 
diggings  and  the  experiences  of  two 
gentlemen  who  worked  at  the  Mint, 
William  Jevons  and  Robert  Hunt... 

This  was  tme  as  far  as  it  went,  but  my 

companion  and  I  thought  that  visitors  to  the 
Mint  Museum  should  have  been  told  that 
‘"Wniiam  Jevons”  was  later  to  become  one  of 
the  founders  of  modern  economics.  And 


perhaps  also  that  he  pursued  a  remarkable 
range  of  interests  in  his  Sydney  years. 

So  strongly  did  I  believe  this  that  I  wrote 
to  the  director  of  the  Powerhouse  Museum  to 
suggest  that  the  a  museum  of  applied  arts  and 
sciences  was  missing  an  opportunity  by  not 
making  a  good  deal  more  of  the  young 
Jevons’  association  with  Sydney  —  and  his 
contribution  to  the  applied  arts  and  sciences 
during  his  five  years  in  this  city.  I  had  a  polite 
response,  and  one  or  two  useful  meetings 
with  people  at  the  Powerhouse. 

But,  just  at  this  stage,  the  Powerhouse 
Museum  announced  a  major  acquisition:  the 
famous  difference  engine  invented  by  Charles 
Babbage,  commonly  recognised  as  the 
foremnner  to  the  modern  computer.  In 
discussions  at  the  Powerhouse,  I  said  that  this 
was  all  very  well,  and  that  the  engine  was 
indeed  an  eminently  appropriate  artefact  for  a 
museum  of  applied  arts  and  sciences.  But 
Babbage  had  had  no  connection  with 
Australia. 

I  argued  that  the  Museum  should  take  an 
interest  in  the  fact  that  Jevons  too  had  built  a 
proto-computer.  Moreover,  unlike  Babbage, 
the  former  resident  of  Sydney  had  done  the 
whole  thing  at  his  own  expense.  And  Jevons’ 
machine  was  the  first  machine  that  could 
solve  a  complex  logical  problem  faster  than 
that  problem  could  be  solved  without  using 
the  machine. 

Then  there  was  a  further  development. 
The  Powerhouse  Museum  acquired  Jevons’ 
telescope  —  not  just  a  telescope  like  the  one 
Jevons  used,  but  the  instmment  that  he 
actually  used.  I  was  told,  and  of  course  I 
agreed,  that  one  object  directly  relating  to 
Jevons  was  not  enough  to  build  an  exhibition 
around.  The  inscription  on  the  telescope 
reveals  that,  not  long  after  leaving  Sydney, 
Jevons  gave  it  to  his  cousin  who  was  then  in 
Penang  in  what  is  now  Malaysia.  It  is  not  clear 
how  or  why  this  telescope  found  its  way  back 
to  Australia. 


52 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Castles  —  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney 


The  instmment  is,  I  suggest,  a  deeply 
symbolic  artefact.  It  encapsulates  Jevons’ 
passionate  interest  in  the  means  and  meaning 
of  observation  and  measurement  of  the 
natural  and  the  social  world.  It  was  through 
this  telescope  that  the  young  Jevons 
whom  we  now  know  to  have  been  Australia’s 
first  urban  sociologist  ■ —  first  viewed  an 
Australian  city.  The  city  was  Melbourne,  not 
Sydney.  In  a  ship  anchored  off  the  port  of 
Melbourne  on  24  September  1854,  Jevons 
confided  to  his  journal  that: 

the  town  is  very  curious;  it  looks  like  a 
crowd  of  ugly  buildings  of  every  size 
chiefly  iron  and  wood  arranged  as  if  no 
two  houses  were  in  one  street.  There 
seem  to  be  very  few  large  buildings  and 
these  are  as  ugly  as  the  rest,  but  we  can 
make  out  by  the  telescope  an  Exhibition 
building,  2  or  3  churches  ...  [and]  a 
railway  station  on  the  other  side  of  the 
bay.  (Black  &  Konekamp  1972,  p.  109) 

This  would  have  been  the  jusucompleted 
collection  of  weatherboard  train  sheds  on  the 
site  now  occupied  by  Flinders  Street  station. 

In  Sydney,  Jevons  used  the  same  Httle 
telescope  to  observe  two  eclipses  of  the  sun 
in  1857.  In  an  extended  report  written  after 
the  second  of  these  events,  he  told  the 
readers  of  Henry  Parkes’  newspaper.  The 
Empire,  that 

The  first  contact  of  the  moon  with  the 
lower  limb  of  the  sun  could  be  easily 
observed  with  the  aid  of  an  ordinary 
telescope,  and  seemed  to  take  place 
within  a  few  seconds  after  the  time  ... 
calculated  by  Mr.  Tebbutt,  of  Windsor, 
my  watch  being  regulated  by  the  noon 
gun  at  Fort  Philip.  The  coincidence 
would,  no  doubt,  have  been  the  more 
complete  the  more  accurate  the  means  of 


observation.  (The  Empire,  19  Sept.  1857, 
p.4) 

“Mr.  TebbutT,  of  Windsor”  was  later  to 
become  the  world-famous  amateur 
astronomer  who  formerly  appeared  on  the 
Australian  $100  banknote.  At  this  time,  he 
was  23  years  of  age,  one  year  older  than 
Jevons.  The  report  of  the  eclipse  in  The 
Empire  on  the  day  after  the  eclipse  is  quite  an 
extended  one,  and  Jevons’  diary  on  the  day 
that  he  wrote  this  report  survives  in  the  John 
Rylands  library  in  Manchester. 

Let  me  quote  the  entry  for  this  day  in  the 
life  of  W.  S.  Jevons,  a  22-year-old  public 
servant: 

After  sleepless  night  got  up  about  3.30 
and  started  to  Bellevue  HiU  in  dark. 
About  5  a.m.  commenced  observations 
concerning  eclipse.  Returned  to  Mint 
[this  was  presumably  where  he  wrote  the 
report  that  was  published  on  the 
following  day].  Tea  at  Mr.  Newton’s 
fMr.Newton  was  Chief  Engineer  at  the 
Mint]  and  then  to  Victoria  Theatre. 
Brooke  and  Airs.  Hek  very  good  in 
Much  Ado  About  Nothing. 

Nature  books  for  WiQy  Newton  8/6 
[presumably  his  host’s  son],  WheweU’s 
Lect.  on  Political  Economy  11/-. 

On  the  facing  page  of  the  diary,  the  entry 
for  the  succeeding  day  (28  March  1857)  reads: 

Played  much  music  in  evening  [this 
would  have  been  on  the  harmonium  that 
appears  in  the  photograph  of  his  study  at 
Double  Bay,  which  appears  in  the 
exhibition].  Meteorological  work,  etc. 
Wrote  and  sent  letter  to  Empke  with  aim 


^  Like  Jevons,  John  Tebbutt  Jr.  was  also  a  member  of 
the  Philosophical  Society  of  N.S.W. 


53 


jouRN.-\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Castles  ~  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney 


of  shutting  up  writers  about  “Protective 

humbug”^. 

Jevons  was  a  strong  free-trader. 

During  Jevons’  stay  in  Sydney,  The 
Empire  published  many  reports  and  letters 
authored  by  him,  on  subjects  as  diverse  as 
meteorology;  the  land  and  railway  policy  of 
New  South  Wales;  the  resolutions  passed  at 
the  protection  meeting;  “A  Cure  for  the 
Revenue”;  lead  poison  in  the  Sydney  water; 
the  danger  from  lightning  strikes  on  the 
ammunition  stores  on  Goat  Island;  a  new 
sun-gauge^;  the  royal  prerogative  of  mercy; 
the  conflict  between  the  archaelogical  and 
Biblical  accounts  of  the  length  of  human 
existence  on  earth;  and  “New  Facts 
Concerning  the  Interior  of  AustraHa’’.^" 

Many  of  Jevons’  pieces  in  The  Empire 
were  quite  combative.  He  acknowledged  this 
in  a  letter  to  his  cousin  toward  the  end  of  his 
sojourn  in  Sydney  (9  October  1858): 

I  am  becoming  quite  accustomed  to  the 
pen  as  a  weapon  of  offence  &  defence, 
indeed  I  suffer  under  such  a  rage  for 
writing  that  I  am  scarcely  to  be  tmsted 
with  a  pen  in  my  hand.  I  often  write  a 
newspaper  article  and  am  then  on  thorns 
for  ever  so  long  after  for  fear  of  a  Hbel 
action.  But  alas!  my  organ  the  ’Empire’ 
has  passed  away  in  bankruptcy  and  I  am 
now  reduced  to  that  milk  &  water  affair 
the  “Herald”  which  too  has  not  yet 
learned  to  appreciate  me,  and  sticks  to 
small  type,  on  the  backpages,  whereas 
Parkes  always  gave  me  large  type  next 
after  the  leading  article,  &  usually 
reprinted  me  for  the  monthly  summary. 


4  See  his  letter  to  The  Empire  of  March  30,  1 857,  listed 
below. 

5  Jevons'  paper,  “On  a  sun-gauge,  or  new  actinometer,” 
was  presented  at  the  Philosophical  Society  of  N.S.W.  on 
8  July  1857. 

^  See  the  Reference  list  below  for  many  of  these,  with 
links. 


I  send  you  the  monthly  summary  of  the 
Herald  which  is  certainly  a  wondertiil 
publication  for  a  single  day;  the  number 
of  copies  sold  too  is  something 
enormous.  You  wiU  find  in  it  every  scrap 
of  colonial  news...  (Black  1973-1981,  2, 
pp.  345-346). 

Some  of  these  comments  are  somewhat 
unfair  to  the  Herald,  which  had  done  Jevons 
proud  by  publishing  his  long  and  fascinating 
review  of  the  first  consolidated  volume  of  the 
monthly  Sydney  Magazine  of  Science  and  Art, 
to  which  Jevons  himself  had  made  significant 
contributions.’^ 

In  the  event,  it  has  turned  out  to  be  for 
the  best  that  the  plans  for  an  exhibition  on 
Jevons  in  Sydney,  including  especially  the 
Symposium,  have  come  to  fruition  in  2004 
rather  than  in  1994.  Because,  in  the 
intervening  ten  years,  Jevons’  life  and  work  in 
Sydney  and  afterwards  has  attracted 
unprecedented  attention  from  researchers  in  a 
wide  range  of  disciplines,  both  in  Australia 
and  overseas.  At  least  a  dozen  peer-reviewed 
journals  have  published  papers  focusing 
solely  or  mainly  on  aspects  of  Jevons’  work. 
The  kst  of  the  names  of  the  journals  in  which 
these  smdies  have  appeared  testifies  to  the 
diversity  of  Jevons’  interests,  and  of  the 
continuing  scholarly  interest  in  Jevons:® 

The  EListory  of  Political  Economy, 

The  History  of  Economics  Eeview, 

The  Journal  of  the  Histoy  of  Economic 
Thought, 

European  Journal  of  the  Histoy  of  Economic 
Thought, 

Economic  Inquiy, 


''  Sjdn^ MomingHerald,  27  Sept.  1858,  p.8. 

8  Ian  Castles  did  not  specify  which  papers  the  following 
list  refers  to,  but  in  the  References  below  I  have  included 
possible  papers  —  Ed. 


54 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Castles  ~  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney 


Measurement  in  Phjsics  and  Economics 
Discussion  Papers  at  the  London  School  of 
Economics, 

The  Histog  and  Philosophy  of  Logic, 
A.ustralasian  Music  Pesearch, 

The  Australian  Meteorological  Maga^ne, 

The  Journal  of  Physical  Oceanography, 
and 

Scientific  American. 

I  would  like  to  be  able  to  talk  about  the 
significance  of  some  of  this  work,  much  of 
which  has  been  produced  by  one  or  other  of 
the  distinguished  scholars  who  are  with  us 
this  evening  and  will  be  presenting  papers  at 
tomorrow’s  symposium.^  But  it  would  be 
beyond  my  capacity  to  do  these  scholars 
justice,  and  I  can  only  urge  those  who  may  be 
able  to  come  to  the  symposium  to  do  so. 

The  primary  source  material  for  those 
who  are  engaged  in  research  on  Jevons 
consists,  of  course,  of  his  own  writings, 
published  and  unpublished.  Only  a  small 
fraction  of  his  writings  in  Australia  appeared 
in  print  during  his  lifetime.  In  a  volume 
published  soon  after  his  death,  Jevons’  widow 
published  edited  extracts  from  his  personal 
journal  and  from  many  of  the  surviving  letters 
(Jevons  1886).  Much  more  extensive  extracts 
of  his  papers  and  correspondence  have  been 
published  in  subsequent  years. 

Yet  much  of  Jevons’  Australian  work 
remains  unpublished.  In  a  paper  published  as 
recently  as  1999,  the  leading  Jevons  scholar 
Bert  Mosseknans  and  a  Belgian  colleague 
(Mosselmans  &  Mathijs  1999)  published 
extracts  from  a  manuscript  by  Jevons  — 
uncompleted  but  mnning  to  50  pages  — 
entitled  “On  the  Science  and  Art  of  Music” 


^  Mike  White,  Monash;  Harro  Maas,  University  of 
Amsterdam;  Lindsay  Barrett,  University  of  Western 
Sydney;  Geoff  Barker,  University  of  Sydney;  Megan 
Martin,  Historic  Houses  Trust  NSW;  Neville  NichoUs, 
Bureau  of  Meteorology;  Matthew  ConneU,  Powerhouse 
Museum;  Jamie  Kassler,  Australian  Academy  of 
Humanities;  Ian  Castles,  A.  N.  U. 


which  is  located  at  the  John  Rylands  Library 
at  Manchester  University.  The  work  was 
written  in  Sydney  and  sent  to  Jevons’  sister  in 
London  as  each  chapter  was  completed.  The 
John  Rylands  Library^o  ^nd  the  Public  Library 
of  New  South  Wales  hold  many  letters  and 
other  manuscripts  relating  to  Jevons’ 
Australian  years  which  have  never  been 
published. 

It  is  a  pity  that  much  of  Jevons’  writings 
in  Australia  —  whether  published  in 
contemporary  journals  and  newspapers, 
intended  for  publication  in  Sydney  or  in 
Britain,  or  never  intended  for  publication  at 
aU  ■ —  is  not  now  readily  available.  They  are  of 
value  not  only  as  a  record  of  several  formative 
years  in  Jevons’  own  development,  but  to 
tiiose  interested  in  the  history  of  Sydney  and 
of  Australia  at  this  time. 

It  is  now  possible  for  manuscript 
material  to  be  “digitised”,  enabling  it  to  be 
disseminated  freely.  This  has  the  further 
advantage,  by  comparison  with  publication  in 
hard  copy,  of  providing  the  user  access  to 
interactive  facilities  for  selective  searching  and 
retrieval  of  the  contents. 

So  I  am  led  to  conclude  with  a 
suggestion.  I’ll  introduce  it  by  pointing  out 
that,  some  thirty  years  ago,  the  Royal 
Economic  Society  felt  justified  in  publishing 
hundreds  of  pages  of  letters  and  papers 
written  by  Jevons  while  in  Australia,  in  the 
handsome  seven-volume  set  edited  by 
Professor  Collison  Black.  It  is  fait  to  say  that 
much  of  this  material  is  of  interest  to 
Australian  social  historians  but  sheds  little 
light  upon  the  history  of  economic  thought: 
this  is  tme,  for  example,  of  the  accounts  of 
Jevons’  journeys  to  the  Hunter  Valley  and 
Maitland,  the  Macquarie  towns  ,  the 


http:/ /www.library^manchester.ac.uk/ search- 
resources/  guide-to-special-coUections/  atoz/jevons- 

family-papers/ 

Black  &  Konekamp  1972,  pp.  123-130, 23  May  1856. 


55 


JouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Castles  ~  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney 


lUawarra  district  Bathurst  and  Sofala^^^ 
Braidwood  and  Araluen  and  the  Victorian 
gold  fields^ Ironically,  this  wealth  of  material 
is  Utde  known  in  Australia  except  among 
those  who  have  been  led  to  it  by  their  interest 
in  the  life  and  work,  especially  the  economic 
work,  of  Stanley  Jevons. 

With  the  advances  of  technology  that 
have  now  occurred,  the  opportunity  now 
arises  to  link  all  of  the  Australian-related 
Jevons  material  that  is  readily  available  in 
published  sources  with  the  as-yet  unpublished 
letters,  papers  and  photographs  that  are  held 
in  research  libraries.  The  result  would  be  an 
interactive  product  of  considerable  potential 
interest  and  value,  and  not  only  to  scientists 
of  all  colours.  The  cost  would  not  be  small, 
but  nor  need  it  necessarily  be  prohibitive.  If 
the  exhibition  that  opens  tomorrow 
stimulates  as  much  interest  in  ""the  curious 
economist”  in  Sydney  as  I  hope  that  it  wiU,  I 
believe  that  the  publication  of  a  consolidated 
archive  in  digitised  form  of  the  surviving 
record  of  Jevons’  years  in  Sydney,  published 
and  unpublished,  would  be  a  worthy  and 
imaginative  project.  It  is  something  that  the 
Powerhouse  Museum  and  its  supporters 
might  wish  to  consider. 

I  am  confident  that  such  a  project  would 
attract  international  interest  —  and  not  only 
among  research  scholars  but  among  people  in 
many  walks  of  Hfe  who  find  fascination  in  the 
development  of  an  extraordinary  mind 
one  of  the  minds  of  the  century,  as  John 
Maynard  Keynes  wrote  to  Lytton  Strachey  in 
1905,  when  Keynes  was  22. 


12  Black  &  Konekamp  1972,  pp.  1344  54,  24-28 
December  1856. 

13  Black  &  Konekamp  1972,  pp.  159-178,  9-13  April 
1856. 

14  Black  &  Konekamp  1972,  pp.  213-238,  9  March 
1856. 

13  Three  letters  to  his  sister,  Lucy  Jevons,  13  and  16 
March  1859  and  9  April  1859,  reprinted  in  Black 
1973-1981,2,  pp.  366-373. 


In  the  Preface  to  her  book  M  World  'Ruled 
bj  Number,  the  first  fuU-length  study  of  the  life 
and  work  of  William  Stanley  Jevons,  Dr. 
Margaret  Schabas,  now  Professor  of 
Philosophy  at  the  University  of  British 
Columbia,  wrote  that  she  ""had  found,  over 
the  course  of  six  or  seven  years,  that  my  views 
on  these  subjects  have  changed  considerably 
and  that  Jevons  had  an  even  richer  set  of 
insights  than  I  had  initially  suspected...  That 
the  world  is  ruled  by  number  may  still  be 
subject  to  dispute,  but  not  the  element  of 
simplicity  and  beauty  in  Jevons’s  vision  of 
mind  and  matter.” 

Thank  you  again  for  inUting  me  to  speak 
this  evening.  I  wish  the  Exhibition  and  the 
accompanying  Symposium  every  success. 

Primary  Writings 

Black,  R.  D.  C.  and  Kdnekamp  R.  (ed.),  (1972). 
Papers  and  Correspondence  of  William  Stankj  Jevons. 
Volume  1.  Biographj  and  Personal  Journal  London: 
Macmillan  in  association  with  the  Royal 
Economic  Society. 

Black,  R.  D.  C.  (ed.),  (1973-1981).  Papers  and 
Correspondence  of  William  Stankj  Jevons.  Volumes 
20  7.  London:  Macmillan  in  association  with  the 
Royal  Economic  Society. 

Jevons,  H.  A.  (ed.),  (1886).  Letters  and  Journal  ofW. 

Stankj  Jevons.  London:  Macmillan. 

Jevons,  W.  S.  Protection,  [a  letter],  The  Empire, 
Sydney,  30  March,  1857,  p.3 
http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6027 

3487 

Jevons,  W.  S.  Comparison  of  the  land  and  railway 
policy  of  New  South  Wales,  The  Empire,  Sydney, 
8  April  1857,  p.6 

http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6027 

_  6432 

Jevons,  W.  S.  On  the  resolutions  passed  at  the 
Protection  Meeting,  [a  letter].  The  Empire, 
Sydney,  4  May  1857,  p.3. 

http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6027 

4810 

Jevons,  W.  S.  The  public  lands  of  New  South 
Wales.  The  Empire,  Sydney,  24  June  1857,  p.4 


56 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Castles  -  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney 


http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6498 

4880 

Jevons,  W.  S.  On  a  sun-gauge,  or  new  actinometen 
The  Empire,  Sydney,  14  July  1857,  p.3 
http:/ / trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6498 

5980 

Jevons,  W.  S.  The  eclipse.  The  Empire,  Sydney,  19 
September  1857,  p.4. 

http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6026 

3467 

Jevons,  W.  S.  Lead  poison  in  the  Sydney  water,  [a 
letter].  The  Empire,  Sydney,  5  October  1857,  p.5. 
http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6026 

6124 

Jevons,  W.  S.  Gunpowder  and  lightning,  [a  letter]. 
The  Empire,  Sydney,  14  November  1857,  p.3. 
http:/ / trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6026 

1514 

Jevons,  W.  S.  A  cure  for  the  Revenue.  The  Empire, 
Sydney,  14  April  1858,  p.4. 
http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6042 

7881 

Jevons,  W.  S.  The  royal  prerogative  of  mercy.  The 
E?7jpire,  Sydney,  10  June  1858,  p.3. 
http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/  article/ 6042 

5807 

Jevons,  W.  S.  New  facts  concerning  the  interior  of 
Australia.  The  Empire,  Sydney,  10  August  1858, 

p.3. 

http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 6042 

4807 

Jevons,  W.  S.  Review  of  The  Sydney  Maga^ne  of 
Science  and  Art.  Vol  1.  Sydney:  James  W.  Waugh, 
1858.  The  Sydney  Morining  Herald,  27  September 
1858,  p.8. 

http:/  /  trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/  article/ 1 302 

0816 

Day  &  Day  1984  record  that  Jevons  was  admitted 
as  a  member  of  the  Philosophical  Society  of 
N.S.W.  at  its  second  meeting,  13  June  1856.^*^ 
He  remained  a  member  until  he  left  the  colony 
for  England,  in  March,  1859. 


See  also  The  Empire  of  14  June  1856,  p.3. 
http:/ / trove.nla.gov.au/ newspaper/ article/ 60249242 


References. 

Bowman,  Rhead  S.  (1997)  Policy  implications  of 
W.  S.  Jevons’s  economic  theory.  Journal  of  the 
Histoy  of  Economic  Thought,  19,  02, 196-221.  Day, 

A.  A.  and  Day,  J.  A.  F.  (1984).  A  biographical 
register  of  members  of  the  AustraKan 
Philosophical  Society  (1850L5J  and  the 
Philosophical  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
(1856-66).  Part  1.  Journal  and  Proceedings  of  the  Royal 
Society  of  New  South  Wales,  117:  119-127.  http:/  / 
biodiversipEbraiT.org/ page/ 46349357 

Flatau,  Paul  (2004)  Jevon’s  one  great  disciple: 
Wicksteed  and  the  Jevonian  revolution  in  the 
second  generation.  History  of  Economics  Review,  40: 
69-107,  Summer. 

Kassler,  Jamie  C.  (1996)  William  Stanley  Jevons: 
music  and  the  mechanisation  of  logic. 
Australasian  Music  Research,  1 . 

Maas,  Harro  (1999)  Mechanical  rationality:  Jevons 
and  the  making  of  economic  man,  Studies  in 
History  and  Philosophy  of  Science,  Part  A  30  (4): 
587-619. 

McChesney,  Fred  S.,  Shughart,  William  F.  II,  and 
Haddock,  David  D.  (2004)  On  the  internal 
contradictions  of  the  law  of  one  price.  Economic 
Inquiry,  42.4:  706-716. 

Mosseknans,  Bert  (1998)  William  Stanley  Jevons 
and  the  extent  of  meaning  in  logic  and 
economics.  History  and  Philosophy  ofEogic,  19,  2, 
83-99,  January. 

Mosseknans,  Bert  and  Mathijs,  Ernest  (1999) 
Jevon’s  music  manuscript  and  the  political 
economy  of  music,  Histoiy  of  Political  Economy, 
suppL  Economic  Engagements  with  Art,  31: 121-156. 

NichoUs,  N  (1998)  William  Stanley  Jevons  and  the 
climate  of  Australia,  Australian  Meteorological 
Magacfne,  47,  pp.  285-93. 

Owen,  David  (2010)  The  efficiency  dilemma.  The 
New  Yorker,  Dec.  20  &  27. 
http:  /  /  www.newyorker.com/ m2Lg2am.tl  2010/1 
2/ 20/ the-efficiency-dilemma 

Schabas,  Margaret  (1990)  A  World  Railed  ly  Number: 
William  Stanley  Jevons  and  the  Rise  of  Mathematical 
Economics,  Princeton  University  Press. 

Schabas,  Margaret  (1999)  The  economics  of  W.  S. 
Jevons,  History  of  Political  Economy,  31.3:  604-605. 

Schmitt,  Raymond  W.  (1995)  The  salt  finger 
experiments  of  Jevons  (1857)  and  Rayleigh 
(1880),  The  Journal  of  Physical  Oceanography,  25: 
8-1 7,  January  1995. 


57 


JouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Castles  —  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney 


Steedman,  Ian  (1997)  Jevon’s  Theory  of  Political 
Economy  and  the  ’Marginalist  Revolution,’ 
'European  Journal  of  the  History  of  Economic  Thought, 
4, 1,  43-65,  Spring. 

White,  Michael  V.  (2006)  Cultivated  circles  of  the 
Empire:  Bibliographical  notes  on  W.S.  Jevons’s 


antipodean  interlude  (1854-1859),  Histoy  of 
Economics  Review,  AT.  101-122. 


58 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  59-64.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010059-06 


William  Stanley  Jevons, 

Fellow  of  the  Philosophical  Society  of  New  South  Wales, 

1856-1859 


Robert  E.  Marks 

Economics,  University  ofN.S.W. 

Email:  robert.marks@gmaiLcom 

Abstract 

This  paper  attempts  to  accomplish  three  things:  to  report  on  Jevons’  activities  while  in  Sydney,  specifi¬ 
cally  with  the  Philosophical  Society;  to  argue  that  his  activities  in  Sydney  led  dkectly  to  his  work  in 
economic  theory  and  application  on  his  return  to  England;  and  to  underhne  Jevons’  achievements  in 
independently  pioneering  what  is  now  known  as  “neo-classical”  microeconomics,  along  with  writers 
in  France  and  Austria.  It  complements  Castles’  2004  address  (Castles,  2016). 


Introduction 

illiam  Stanley  Jevons  v^as  born  in  Liv¬ 
erpool  on  September  1,  1835.  His 
father,  Thomas  Jevons,  was  an  iron  merchant 
and  engineer  who  constructed  one  of  the 
first  iron  boats.  His  maternal  grandfather 
was  the  historian  William  Roscoe.  Aged 
16,  he  entered  University  College,  London, 
and  studied  chemistry  and  botany  In  1853, 
before  graduating,  he  accepted  a  well-paid 
post  as  assayer  at  the  new  Sydney  Mint  on 
Macquarie  Street,  possibly  as  a  consequence 
of  his  fathers  business  having  collapsed.  He 
arrived  in  Melbourne  on  September  24, 
1854,  and  in  Sydney  soon  after. 

He  threw  himself  into  the  intellectual 
Hfe  of  the  colony:  he  collected  and  studied 
local  plants;  he  documented  the  geology  of 
the  Hawkesbury  basin;  he  wrote  the  first 
study  of  Australasian  weather  patterns;  he 
researched  the  formation  of  clouds;  he 
made  pioneering  “social  surveys”  of  Sydney 
and  Goulburn;  he  debated  the  economics  of 


railway  construction  and  land  allocation  in 
the  pages  of  the  newspapers.  ^ 

It  is  recorded  that  Jevons  attended 
meetings  of  the  Philosophical  Society  on 
the  following  dates:  13  June  1856,  8  July 
1857,  and  9  December  1857,  and  later  in 
the  monthly  Sydney  Magayine  of  Science  and 
A.rts\  photographs  of  his  were  included  in  a 
Photographic  Exhibition  of  the  Philosophi¬ 
cal  Society  at  the  Australian  Library  on  19 
December  1859,  although  he  had  left  Aus¬ 
tralia  months  previously,  returning  to  Eng¬ 
land  via  North  America. 

While  in  Sydney  Jevons  kept  a  detailed 
journal  and  diaries,  and  sent  regular  letters 
to  his  cousin,  his  sisters,  his  brother,  and 
his  father,  describing  the  environment,  his 
activities,  his  ideas,  and  innermost  thoughts. 
These  have  since  been  published,  first,  by 
his  widow,  in  1886,  and,  then,  in  several  vol¬ 
umes,  by  the  Royal  Economic  Society,  in 
1973-81. 


1  He  was  not  above  sending  the  odd  riddle  to  the 
papers:  “Why  ought  the  officers  of  the  Mint  to  be 
prosecuted  for  treason?  Because  they  are  constantly 
engaged  in  carrying  out  a  design  upon  the  sovereign. 
—  J.  Jevons,  Royal  Mint.”  Sydney  Morning  Herald,  20 
Jan.  1859,  p.  5. 


59 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Marks  —  William  Stanley  Jevons  FPhSN  1856-59 


Consequently,  we  have  a  reasonable  idea  of 
the  development  of  his  intellectual  life  during 

his  Sydney  sojourn. 

So  what  influence  did  his  time  in  Sydney 
have  on  Jevons’  thinking,  and  what  role  did  it 
play  in  bringing  liis  ideas  to  fruition?  In  fact, 
Jevons  said  later  that  nearly  aU  his  ideas  came 
to  him  during  the  period  he  spent  in  Sydney. 
The  new  colonial  city  certainly  gave  him  the 
time,  the  money  and  the  intellectual  freedom 
to  undertake  work  in  a  wide  range  of  areas: 
meteorology,  photography,  geography, 
geology,  botany  and  natural  science  and  a 
social  survey  of  the  city  itself 

From  Black  (1973),  we  know  that  on 
June  25,  1854,  he  writes,  though  I  have 
got  a  pretty  complete  set  of  common 
chemical  Apparatus  and  chemicals,  I  feel  as  if 
I  should  take  more  to  Geology  &  botany, 
though  I  don’t  at  all  intend  to  stick  to  Science 
above  everything  else  all  my  life”  (Black,  p. 
78).  On  October  31,  1855,  he  talks  of 
intending  to  compile  and  send 
“Meteorological  Reports  to  some  paper” 
(Black,  p.  198);  the  first  such  published  report 
appeared  in  the  Empire  on  3  September  1856. 

On  July  19,  1856,  the  Sydney  Morning 
Herald  published  his  first  letter  on  “the 
science  of  economy,”  about  the  need  for 
profitability  in  railway  construction  (Black, 
pp.  235).  This  was  in  reaction  to  the 
Governor’s  declaration  “that  a  railway  need 
not  necessarily  be  capable  of  paying  any 
profits,  since  indirect  benefits  to  the 
population  may  repay  its  costs.”  (Black,  p. 
265).  Sir  WilHam  Denison  had  been  an  officer 
in  the  Royal  Engineers. 

On  October  21,  1856,  Jevons  writes  that 
“a  Scientific  education  is  one  of  the  best 
things  possible  ...  It  tends  to  give  your 
opinions  and  thoughts  a  sort  of  certainty ^  force ^ 
and  clearness  which  forms  an  excellent 
foundation  for  other  sorts  of  knowledge  less 
precisely  determined  and  established”  (Black, 
p.  244).  Apart  from  his  meteorological  work, 


he  was  very  interested  in  botany,  music,  and 
the  theatre. 

On  April  4,  1857,  Jevons  writes  “I  have 
been  much  occupied  lately  with  a  new  Subject 
viz.  Political  Economy,  which  seems  to 
mostly  suit  my  exact  method  of  thought.” 
(Black,  p.  280).  He  had  read  Smith’s  Wealth  of 
Nations,  as  well  as  more  recent  books,  and  had 
just  published  a  letter  in  the  Empire  “on  some 
questions  of  Economy  here”  (against 
protection)  and  followed  that  with  a  letter  on 
the  need  for  “wise  regulations  on  the  sale  or 
distribution  of  unoccupied  lands  of  the 
colony,  and  of  a  right  poHcy  in  the  formation 
of  railways”  (Black,  pp.  282).  On  June  17,  he 
writes  “the  subject  I  have  been  most  of  all 
concerned  in  for  the  last  sik  months  is 
Political  Economy,”  having  read  books  by 
Smith,  Chambers,  Martineau,  Mill,  Whately, 
and  Chaning.  (Black,  p.  292) 

In  a  letter  of  February  28,  1858,  Jevons 
expounds  to  his  sister:  '‘Economy,  scientifically 
speaking,  is  a  very  contracted  science;  it  is  in 
fact  a  sort  of  vague  mathematics  which 
calculates  the  causes  and  effects  of  man’s 
industry,  and  shows  how  it  may  best  be 
applied.  ...  I  have  an  idea  ...  that  my  insight 
into  the  foundations  and  nature  of  the 
knowledge  of  man  is  deeper  than  that  of 
most  men  or  writers  ...  To  extend  and  perfect 
the  abstract  or  the  detailed  and  practical 
knowledge  of  man  and  society  is  perhaps  the 
most  useful  and  necessary  work  in  which  any 
one  can  now  engage.  There  are  plenty  of 
people  engaged  with  physical  science,  and 
practical  science  and  arts  may  be  left  to  look 
after  themselves,  but  thoroughly  to 
understand  the  principles  of  society  appears 
to  me  now  to  be  the  most  cogent  business.” 
(Black,  pp.  321). 

On  June  9,  1 858,  he  says:  “Social  science 
is  the  wide  subject  before  me,  and  I  have 


2  See  also  the  Extracts  from  the  Personal  Diaries,  R.  D. 
C  Black  (ed),  G?/  KTJ,  1981,  pp.  115. 


60 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Marks  —  William  Stanley  Jevons  FPhSN  1856-59 


even  had  for  many  years  the  idea  of  a  work 
on  'Towns  &  Cities,’  to  analyse  their 
constitution,  and  causes,  the  relative  character 
of  their  parts,  &  the  relative  character  of 
particular  cities  &  thus  eventually  lead  to  such 
knowledge  of  their  nature  &  shall  ensure  their 
improvement,  as  any  Scientific  knowledge  is 
eventually  reduced  to  practice.”  (Black,  pp. 
327). 

On  August  4,  1858,  Jevons  says,  'Tt 
seems  to  me  that  Man  is  a  subject  as  little 
understood  now  as  the  Heavens  (Astronomy) 
were  by  the  Ancients.  Within  the  last  hundred 
years,  sciences  almost  innumerable  have 
spmng  up,  but  mostly  devoted  to  physical 
Nature.  Comparatively  few  have  perceived 
that  Human  Namre  may  also  be  the  subject 
of  a  science.  It  is  indeed  a  many-sided  subject. 
Religion,  metaphysics,  ethics,  jurispmdence, 
political  economy,  politics,  &  even,  medicine, 
art,  poetry  and  many  other  studies  aU  have 
man  for  the  subject.  But  the  social  condition 
of  man  as  influenced  by  the  many  internal  & 
external  circumstances  is  perhaps  an 
indefinite  but  a  wide  &  rich  field  for  future 
research.”  (Black,  pp.  335). 

In  his  penultimate  letter  from  Sydney,  on 
January  30,  1859,  Jevons  asks  his  sister,  "... 
does  it  not  strike  you  that  just  as  in  Physical 
Science  there  are  general  &  profound 
principles  deducible  from  a  great  number  of 
physical  phenomena,  so  in  treating  of  Man  or 
Society  there  must  also  be  general  principles 
and  laws  which  underlie  all  the  present 
discussions  &  partial  arguments?  ...  Man  is 
said  to  possess  free  will  but  however  this  may 
be,  he  is  at  least  a  phenomenon  in  which 
effect  is  always  connected  with  cause.  All  the 
investigations  of  Social  Science  must  proceed 
on  the  assumption  that  there  are  causes  as 
make  people  good  &  bad,  happy  &  miserable, 
rich  &  poor,  as  weU  as  strong  &  feeble.  It 
foUows  that  each  individual  man  must  be  a 
creature  of  cause  (&  effect.  ...  To  attempt  to 


define  the  foundations  of  our  knowledge  of 
man,  is  surely  a  work  worth  a  lifetime  ...” 

He  socialised  with  members  of  the 
Philosophical  Society:  on  13  July  1857  he 
spent  the  day  "taking  a  bush  walk  with  the 
old  Rev.  Mr.  Clarke,  the  geologist,  afterwards 
dining  with  him,  &  Mrs.  Clarke,  and  the  two 
Miss  Clarkes.”  (Black,  p.  298).  It  was, 
ironically,  W.  B.  Clarke,  who,  as  president  of 
the  Society,  urged  it  in  a  direction  away  from 
Jevons’  emerging  interests:  for  the  next 
century  it  focussed  very  much  on  the  physical 
sciences,  largely  excluding  economics  and 
other  social  sciences. 

So  he  returned  to  England,  completed 
his  B.A.  and  M.A.  degrees,  and  was  elected  to 
a  chair  as  the  professor  of  logic  and  mental 
and  moral  philosophy  and  Cobden  professor 
of  political  economy  at  Owens  College, 
Manchester,  in  1866.  Meanwhile,  in  Australia 
he  was  remembered  as  the  inventor  of  a  sun 
gauge  (1857),  and  the  author  of  a  contentious 
study  of  clouds  (1857)  and  of  The 
Climatology  of  Australasia  (1859),  as  well  as 
being  a  pioneering  photographer  (Bourke, 
1955).  Later,  the  newspapers  reported  his 
analysis  of  gold  prices  (1863),  and  his 
influential  book  on  the  effects  of  the 
exhaustion  of  British  coal  mines  (1866). 
Australian  newspapers  were,  however,  almost 
mute  on  his  advances  in  theoretical 
economics. 

On  the  basis  of  entries  in  Jevons’  diary 
for  1860,  La  Nauxe  (1953)  states  that  "young 
Jevons  arrived  on  one  identifiable  day, 
Febmary  19,  1860,  at  a  comprehension  of  the 
true  Theory  of  TcommyT  This  is  less  than  twelve 
months  after  his  leaving  Sydney.  In  a  letter  to 
his  brother,  he  says  that  his  theory  is  "so 
thorough-going  and  consistent,  that  I  cannot 
now  read  other  books  on  the  subject  without 
indignation.  ...  One  of  the  most  important 
axioms  is,  that  as  the  quantity  of  any 
commodity,  for  instance,  plain  food,  which  a 
man  has  to  consume,  increases,  so  the  utility 


61 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Marks  -  WMam  Stanley  Jevons  FPhSN  1856-59 


or  benefit  derived  from  last  portion  used 
decreases  in  degree.”  (H,  Jevons,  1886,  p. 
151).  This  is  decreasing  mar^al  utility,  as  we 
now  know  it. 

Jevons  wrote  up  his  theory  of  value  in  a 
paper  for  the  British  Association  for  the 
Advancement  of  Science  in  1862,  which  was 
printed  in  1866.  There  was  little  recognition 
in  Britain,  given  the  sway  of  John  Stuart  Mills' 
ideas.  In  his  1871  book  he  described  his 
theory  in  greater  depth. 

In  establishing  his  utility  theory,  Jevons' 
training  in  science  and  measurement  was  very 
important.  The  quantities  in  the  theory 
(quantities,  prices)  could  be  exactly  measured, 
although  its  maximand,  utility,  was  subjective. 
“A  unit  of  pleasure  or  of  pain  is  difficult  even 
to  conceive;  but  it  is  the  amount  of  these 
feelings  which  is  continually  prompting  us  to 
buying  and  selling,  borrowing  and  lending, 
labouring  and  resting,  producing  and 
consuming;  and  it  is  from  the  quantitative 
effects  of  the  feelings  that  we  must  estimate 
their  comparative  amounts.  We  can  no  more 
know  or  measure  gravity  in  its  own  nature 
than  we  can  measure  a  feeling;  but,  just  as  we 
measure  gravity  by  its  effects  in  the  motion  of 
a  pendulum,  so  we  may  estimate  the  equality 
or  inequality  of  feelings  by  the  decisions  of 
tine  human  mind.”  (fevons,  1871,  p.  11), 

For  Jevons,  value  was  directly  a  function 
of  utility.  Perhaps  I  can  illuminate  how  this 
notion  was  new  in  1871  by  an  anecdote  from 
1961. 1  had  just  turned  15,  the  age  in  Victoria 
in  those  days  when  boys  became  men,  at  least 
as  far  as  the  barber  was  concerned:  we  were 
now,  under  the  current  price  regulations, 
charged  men's  prices  for  our  haircuts.  I 
remember  sitting  in  Mr.  Merrknan's  chair  and 
arguing  with  him  that  the  prices  should  be 
reversed:  cutting  men’s  hair  is  easier  than 
cutting  boys’  hair;  men  might  begin  to  lose 
their  hair  as  they  age;  the  conversation  with 
men  is  more  interesting  for  the  barber;  and 
men  sit  still  without  willing.  So  men’s 


haircuts  should  cost  less,  young  Robert 
argued  =  in  vain. 

Turns  out,  although  I  didn’t  know  it,  that 
my  argument  was  consistent  with  the  classical 
theory  of  value  (from  before  1860),  which 
states,  roughly,  tliat  value,  broadly  speaking, 
derives  from  the  labour  used  to  produce  the 
product,  here  the  haircut:  the  cost  to  the 
barber  of  a  man’s  hairciit  is  less  than  a  boy’s, 
so  the  price  charged  should  be  lower.^ 

I  had  overlooked  a  development  dating 
from  Jevons’  writings  of  the  1860s,  in  which 
he  argued  that  the  value  (of  the  haircut) 
depends  on  the  utility  the  customer  associates 
with  it.  And  men  care  more  about  their 
appearance  than  do  boys,  and  moreover  are 
able  to  pay  more  than  boys  can.  So,  on 
Jevons’  theory  of  neoclassical  value,  men’s 
haircuts  should  cost  more  than  boys’  do,  so 
long  as  the  barber  is  happy  to  cut  at  that 
price. 

From  his  theory  of  utility  and  value, 
Jevons  constructed  a  theory  of  exchange  and 
a  theory  of  labour  supply  and  capital. 
Although  he  did  not  know  it  in  1862  or  1871, 
his  utility  theory  was  not  the  first,  which  he 
generously  acknowledged  in  the  preface  to 
the  second  edition  of  his  book  (in  18794^). 
But  many  of  his  theoretical  contributions, 
developed  independently,  were  ori^al, 
unassailable,  and  of  great  usefulness.^ 

Jevons’  economic  ideas  continue  to 
resonate.  Two  of  Ms  applied  studies  received 
much  more  attention  at  the  time.  His  1863 


3  My  argument  also  echoed  the  “labour  theory  of  value,” 
used  in  Karl  Marx’s  Capital  (1867)  in  a  misguided 
attempt  to  explain  relative  prices.  Marx  has  been 
criticised  for  ignoring  developments  in  economic  theory, 
such  as  those  of  Jevons’. 

4  See  http:/ / oIl.libert\Hnd.org/ titles /jevons-the-tlieoiv- 
of-poHtical-economv 

5  It  must  have  been  the  Zeitgeist  two  other  men,  Carl 
Menger  (184(D  1921),  an  Austrian,  and  Leon  Wakas 
(1834D  1910),  a  Frenchman,  published  similar  books  in 
the  1870s.  These  three  are  the  pioneers  of  the 
marginalist  revolution  of  neo-classical  microeconomics. 


62 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Marks  —  William  Stanley  Jevons  FPhSN  1856-59 


pamphlet  on  the  price  of  gold  made  a 
remarkably  accurate  estimate  of  a  9  per  cent 
fall  in  the  value  of  gold  between  1848  and 
1860,  a  time  when  many  gold  mines  had 
opened  in  California  and  Australia.  In  doing 
so,  he  virtually  invented  the  technique  for 
constructing  price  index  numbers;  John 
Maynard  Keynes,  a  first-rate  mathematician, 
stated  that  Jevons  had  “made  as  much 
progress  in  this  brief  pamphlet  as  has  been 
made  by  aU  succeeding  authors  put  together.” 
(Keynes,  1936,  p.  525.)6 

In  his  influential  1865  book.  The  Coal 
Question^  Jevons  was  pessimistic  about  Great 
Britain’s  hiture  as  its  coal  resources  —  the 
fuel  of  its  industrial  revolution  — -  became 
economically  exhausted.  He  argued  that 
increased  “economy”  of  coal  use,  by  which 
he  meant  increased  energy  efficiency,  would 
not  delay  this  date.  He  concluded: 

It  is  wholly  a  confusion  of  ideas  to 
suppose  that  the  economical  use  of  fuel 
is  equivalent  to  a  diminished 
consumption.  The  very  contrary  is  the 
tmth. 

That  is,  he  was  arguing  that  increased  energy 
efficiency  “renders  the  employment  of  coal 
more  profitable,  and  thus  the  present  demand 
for  coal  is  increased.” 

This  is  the  so-called  Jevons  paradox: 
technological  progress  increases  energy 
efficiency  (reducing  the  amount  necessary  for 
any  one  use)  but  the  rate  of  consumption  of 
that  fuel  might  rise  because  of  the  lower 
effective  price  and  increased  demand  (the 
rebound  effect).  Which  of  these  effects 
predominates  continues  to  be  a  contentious 
issue,  and  the  debate  has  even  escaped  from 
the  pages  of  the  learned  journals.  For 


‘"Indeed,  according  to  Harrod  (1951,  pp.  106),  the  22- 
year-old  Keynes,  on  first  reading  Jevons’  work  wrote,  “I 
am  convinced  that  he  was  one  of  the  minds  of  the 
century.” 


instance,  in  2010,  an  article  in  the  New  Yorker 
(Owen  2010)  discussed  the  Jevons  paradox, 
and  there  was  a  debate  in  the  pages  of  tlie 
New  York  Times  in  2012.^  Castles  (2016) 
overlooked  this  continuing  influence  of 
Jevons  on  economic  thinking,  150  years  after 
Coal  was  published. 

In  1864  Jevons  published  a  book  based 
on  George  Boole’s  system  of  logic.  In  1869 
he  built  his  “Logic  Piano,”  a  device  for 
performing  a  function  provided  today  by  a 
truth  table.  He  had  essentially  mechanized 
Boolean  logic,  a  key  aspect  of  contemporary 
computing;  he  was  the  first.  ^  (Barrett  and 
Connell,  2006).  Later  he  became  Professor  of 
Economics  at  University  College,  London.  In 
1872  he  became  only  the  second  economist 
to  be  elected  as  a  Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society 
of  London.  Flis  son,  Herbert  Stanley  Jevons, 
published  papers  in  this  Journal  in  1911  and 
1912  on  geology. 

He  was  a  true  polymath.  No  other 
Fellow  of  our  Royal  Society  or  its  antecedents 
(apart  from  Charles  Darwin^)  has  had  such  an 
impact  on  the  intellectual  life  of  the  world. 
Swimming  in  the  English  Channel  on  August 
13,  1882,  he  drowned,  aged  46.  We  should 
honour  his  memory. 

Acknowledgements 

I’d  like  to  acknowledge  assistance  from  Geoff 
Harcourt,  Eve  Wynhausen,  Chris  Adam,  and 
Raja  Junankar. 

References 

Anon.,  2012,  The  siren  song  of  energy  efficiency. 
The  New  York  Times,  March  19. 

Indeed,  there  are  over  2,200  articles/books  in  Google 
Scholar  that  include  the  phrase  “Jevons  Paradox.” 

^  The  original  Jevons’  Logic  Machine  is  held  at  the 
Museum  for  the  History  of  Science,  Oxford. 

^  Kelly  (2009)  includes  a  copy  of  a  letter  firom  Darwin  of 
Oct.  28,  1879,  accepting  his  honorary  membership  of 
the  Royal  Society. 


63 


JouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Marks  -  William  Stanley  Jevons  FPhSN  1856-59 


Barrett,  Lindsay,  and  Connell,  Matthew,  2005, 
Jevons  and  the  Logic  Tiano,’  The  Tutherford 
Journal  1,  No.  1,  December 
http:/ /v^vi^.rudierfordi  ournal.org/ artideOlOlOS 

.hanl 

Black,  R.  D.  CoUison  (ed.),  1973,  Tapers  and 
Correspondence  of  William  Stanley  Jevons,  Volume  IJ 
Correspondence,  1850-1862,  London:  Macmillan, 
for  the  Royal  Economic  Society. 

Bourke,  Iris,  1955,  Australia’s  first  pictoriakst, 
Australian  Photo  Review,  pp.  6— 23,  Jan. 

Castles,  Ian,  2016,  The  curious  economist:  William 
Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydnty,  Journal  and  Proceedings  of 
the  Royal  Society  ofN.S.W.,  this  issue. 

Harrod,  Roy,  The  life  of  John  Maynard  Kynes. 

London:  Macmillan.  1951. 

Jevons,  Harriet  A,  (ed.),  1886,  letters  and  journal  of 
W.  Stanley  Jevons,  London:  Macmillan. 
https:/  /  arcliive.org/ stream /letters]  ournalofOOie 

voiala#page/  n7  /  mode/  2up 
Jevons,  William  Stanley,  1859,  The  climatology  of 
Australasia,  nine  chapters  m  Waugh's  Australian 
Almanac  1859.  Sydney:  James  William  Waugh. 
Jevons,  William  Stanley,  1863,  A  serious  fall  in  the 
value  of  gold  ascertained,  and  its  social  effects  set  forth, 
London:  Edward  Stanford. 
https:/  /  arcliive.org/ stteam/ aseriousfaUinvOOiev 

ogoog 

Jevons,  William  Stanley,  1862,  Notice  of  a  general 
mathematical  theory  of  political  economy, 
presented  to  the  British  Association  for  the 
Advance  of  Science,  Cambridge,  October. 


Jevons,  William  Stanley,  1866,  Brief  account  of 
a  general  mathematical  theory  of  political 

economy,  Journal  of  the  Royal  Statistical  Society,  29: 

282-87,  June. 

http:/ /la.utexas.edu/ users /hcleaver/ 368/ 368iev 

onsmathecotable.pdf 

Jevons,  William  Stanley,  1866,  The  coal  question:  An 

inquiry  concerning  the  progress  of  the  national  and  the 

probable  exhaustion  of  our  coal-mines.  (2nd.  ed.) 
London:  Macmillan. 

http:/ / w^wvceconlib.org/librar)AYPDBooks/Je 

vons  /  ivnCQCover.html 

Jevons,  William  Stanley,  1871,  The  theory  of  political 

economy,  first  edition,  London:  Macmillan. 

Kelly,  Jak,  2009,  Editorial:  A  well  known  member. 
Journal  and  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  ofM.S.W. 
142(1-2):  1-3. 

Keynes,  John  Maynard,  1936,  William  Stanley 
Jevons,  1835—1882,  a  centenary  allocution  on  his 
life  and  work  as  economist  and  statistician, 
Journal  of  the  Rpyal  Statistical  Society,  99:  516-  555. 

La  Nau2e,  John  A.,  1953,  The  concept  of  Jevons’ 
utility  theory.  Economica,  20:  356—8,  Nov.  Marx, 
Karl,  1867,  Capital:  critique  of  political  economy, 

Vol  1  (first  English  edition,  1886). 

Owen,  David,  2010,  The  efficiency  dilemma.  The 
New  Yorker,  Dec.  20  and  27. 
http:/ / www.newt^orker.com/ maga2ine/201 0/ 1 

2/20/  the-efficiency-dilemma 
Vaughn,  Kelly,  2012,  Jevons  paradox:  the  debate 
that  just  won’t  die,  RMl  Outlet,  March  20. 
http://blog.mii.org/blog  Tevons  Paradox 


64 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  1 49,  parts  1  &  2,  20 1 6, 
pp.  65-82.  ISSN  0033-9173/16/010065-18 


The  evolutionary  history  of  flowering  plants 

Charles  S.P.  Fosteri 

1  School  of  Life  and  Environmental  Sciences,  University  of  Sydney,  New  South  Wales  2006,  Australia 
This  paper  was  an  RSNSW  Scholarship  Winner  in  2015 


Email:  charles.foster@sydney.edu.au 


Abstract 

In  terms  of  species  richness  and  important  ecological  roles,  there  are  fev/  biological  groups 

that  rival  the  success  of  flotvering  plants  (Angiospermae).  Angiosperm  evolution  has  long 
been  a  topic  of  interest,  with  many  attempts  to  clarify  their  phylogenetic  relationships  and 
timescale  of  evolution.  However,  despite  this  attention  there  remain  many  unsolved  questions 
surrounding  how  and  when  flowers  first  appeared,  and  much  of  the  angiosperm  diversity 
remains  to  be  quantified.  Here,  I  review  the  evolutionary  history  of  angiosperms,  and  how 
our  understanding  of  this  has  changed  over  time.  I  begin  by  summarising  the  incredible 
morphological  and  genetic  diversity  of  flowering  plants,  and  the  ways  in  which  this  can  be 
studied  using  phylogenetic  inference.  I  continue  by  discussing  both  the  relationships  between 
angiosperms  and  the  other  major  lineages  of  seed  plants,  and  the  relationships  between  the 
main  groups  within  angiosperms.  In  both  cases,  I  outline  how  our  knowledge  has  changed 
over  time  based  on  factors  such  as  the  different  conclusions  drawn  from  morphological  and 
genetic  data.  I  then  discuss  attempts  to  estimate  the  timescale  of  angiosperm  evolution  and 
the  difficulties  of  doing  so,  including  the  apparent  conflict  between  ages  derived  from  fossil 
and  molecular  evidence.  Finally,  I  propose  future  directions  for  angiosperm  research  to  help 
clarify  the  evolutionary  history  of  one  of  the  most  important  groups  of  organisms  on  the 
planet. 


Introduction 

he  diversity  and  interactions  of  life  on 
Earth  have  long  been  of  scientific  inter¬ 
est.  Quantifying  biodiversity  and  the  times¬ 
cale  over  which  it  arose  allows  inferences 
about  the  biological  history  of  the  planet 
to  be  made,  and  can  provide  insight  into 
how  ecosystems  might  change  in  response 
to  events  such  as  cHmate  change  (ThuiUer 
et  al.  2011;  Bellard  et  al.  2012).  Flowering 
plants  (angiosperms)  have  been  of  particular 
focus  because  of  their  important  economic 
and  cultural  roles  within  society,  as  well  as 
their  ubiquity  and  importance  within  natu¬ 
ral  ecosystems.  Specifically,  angiosperms 
sequester  large  amounts  of  carbon  from 


the  atmosphere,  and  act  as  primary  produc¬ 
ers  of  food  for  many  animal  groups,  with 
their  spread  and  appearance  shaping  habitat 
strucmre  globally  (Brodribb  and  Feild  2010; 
MagaUon  2014).  In  addition,  angiosperms 
have  developed  important  mutualistic  rela¬ 
tionships  with  many  groups  of  organisms, 
such  as  pollination  interactions  with  insects, 
birds,  and  small  mammals  (van  der  Niet  and 
Johnson  2012;  Rosas-Guerrero  et  al.  2014). 

However,  to  properly  quantify  the  extent 
and  impact  of  groups  such  as  angiosperms, 
biological  entities  must  first  be  recog¬ 
nised  and  described  into  distinct  groups 
such  as  species,  and,  ideally,  placed  into 
higher-order  classifications.  The  goal  is  to 


65 


JouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  Piistory  of  Flowering  Plants 


recognise  groups  that  contain  only  the 
descendants  of  a  common  evolutionary 
ancestor  (monophyletic  groups),  which 
represent  natural  evolutionary  groups. 

For  most  of  history,  biological  groups 
and  the  relationships  between  them  have 
been  recognised  through  observations  of  the 
form  and  stmcture  of  organisms.  When 
these  data  are  shared  between  two  or  more 
taxa  after  being  inherited  from  their  most 
recent  common  ancestor,  they  are  known  as 
synapomorphies.  In  addition  to  aiding  the 
classification  of  extant  taxa,  these 
morphological  data  are  also  able  to  link 
extant  and  extinct  diversity  through 
comparison  with  the  fossil  record,  which  can 
suggest  a  timescale  of  evolution.  However, 
morphological  data  often  cannot  reliably 
distinguish  between  competing  taxonomic 
h}podieses  because  of  a  lack  of  informative 
characters,  or  can  be  misled  by  the 
independent  evolution  of  similar  traits  in 
organisms  that  are  not  closely  related 
(convergent  evolution).  Morphological  data 
have  been  supplemented  by  molecular  data 
since  the  inception  of  molecular 
phylogenetics  in  the  mid-20^^  Century. 

Molecular  data  typically  comprise 
sequences  of  the  nucleotides  of  DNA,  or  the 
amino  acids  that  they  encode.  Each 
nucleotide  or  amino  acid  within  a  sequence 
represents  a  character  that  can  be  used  for 
phylogenetic  analysis.  Therefore,  molecular 
data  sets  can  contain  millions  of  characters 
for  phylogenetic  reconstruction,  which 
makes  such  data  sets  especially  usefial  for 
evaluating  the  taxonomic  hypotheses  that 
have  been  suggested  by  morphology. 
Analysis  of  molecular  data  is  also  useful  for 
estimating  the  evolutionary  timescale  of 
organisms  using  molecular  clocks  (Lee  and 
Ho  2016),  especially  for  groups  with  poor 
fossil  records. 

Both  morphological  and  molecular  data 
have  been  used  extensively  to  evaluate  the 


diversity  of  angiosperms.  Angiosperms  are 
among  the  most  species-rich  groups  of 
organisms  on  the  planet,  and  are  by  far  the 
largest  group  of  plants.  The  exact  number  of 
species  is  difficult  to  determine  because  of 
high  amounts  of  taxonomic  synonymy,  and 
the  fact  that  many  species  potentially  remain 
to  be  discovered  (Bebber  et  al.  2010;  Pimm 
and  Joppa  2015).  Despite  this,  we  can  be 
fairly  certain  that  there  are  at  least  350,000 
species  of  angiosperms,  and  probably  c. 
400,000  in  total  (Pimm  and  Joppa  2015).  As 
expected  in  a  group  of  this  sEe,  there  is 
extreme  variation  in  morphology,  life  history 
characteristics,  and  growth  form. 
Angiosperms  variously  exist  as  herbaceous 
annuals,  vines,  lianas,  shrubs  or  trees,  and 
can  be  found  growing  in  aquatic  or  terrestrial 
environments,  or  even  growing  on  and/or 
parasitising  other  plants. 

Similarly,  there  is  large  variation  in 
genome  size  and  content  withiu 
angiosperms.  For  example,  it  is  estimated 
that  throughout  their  evolutionary  history 
over  70%  of  angiosperms  have  had  an 
increase  in  the  number  of  copies  of 
chromosomes  contained  within  each  cell 
(ploidy  level)  from  the  typical  diploid  state 
(Levin  2002),  Most  of  the  fiinctions  essential 
for  growth  and  development  are  controlled 
by  genes  located  within  the  cell  nucleus, 
which  are  collectively  known  as  the  nuclear 
genome.  Vans  japonica  Franch.,  a  small 
herbaceous  plant  native  to  Japan,  has  the 
largest  accurately  measured  genome  known 
to  science  (Pellicer  et  al.  2010).  At  nearly  150 
billion  nucleotides,  its  octoploid  genome  is 
more  than  50  times  larger  than  the  human 
genome,  and  nearly  2500  times  larger  than 
the  smallest  known  plant  nuclear  genome  of 
Genlisea  tuherosa  Rivadavia,  Gonella  & 
A.Fleischm.,  a  carnivorous  angiosperm  from 
Brazil  (Fleischmann  et  al.  2014). 

Plant  cells  also  contain  specialised 
organelles  known  as  chloroplasts  and 


66 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Foster  -  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


mitochondria,  which  are  responsible  for  the 
essential  processes  of  photosynthesis  and 
cellular  respiration,  respectively.  Both  of 
these  organelles  are  predominantly 
uniparentaUy  inherited  and  contain  thek  own 
independent  genomes,  which  is  thought  to 
be  because  of  thek  origins  as  free-living 
organisms  that  were  engulfed  by  early 
eukaryotic  cells  in  separate  endosymbiotic 
events  (Sagan  1967;  Schwartz  and  Dayhoff 
1978).  The  chloroplast  genome  varies 
substantially  among  angiosperms,  with  the 
order  of  genes  differing  between  groups,  and 
with  some  genes  being  lost  completely.  For 
example,  the  chloroplast  genome  is 
drastically  reduced  in  many  parasitic  plants, 
with  many  genes  important  for 
photosynthesis  having  been  lost  (Bungard 
2004). 

The  mitochondrial  genome  of  plants  is 
more  enigmatic,  and  is  disproportionally  less 
studied  than  the  nuclear  and  chloroplast 
genomes.  Plant  mitochondrial  genomes  are 
large  compared  with  animal  mitochondrial 
genomes,  and  thek  content  is  highly 
dynamic,  with  many  gene  gains,  losses, 
transfers,  duplications  and  rearrangements, 
as  weU  as  a  large  proportion  of  repeated 
elements  and  introns  (Kitazaki  and  Kubo 
2010;  Galtier  2011).  Of  dkect  importance 
for  reconstmcting  the  evolutionary  history  of 
plants  is  that  the  three  genomes  evolve  at 
very  different  rates.  The  nuclear  genome 
evolves  at  the  highest  rate,  the  chloroplast 
genome  evolves  at  an  intermediate  rate,  and, 
in  contrast  to  its  dynamic  nature,  the 
mitochondrial  genome  has  by  far  the  lowest 
evolutionary  rate  (Wolfe  et  al.  1987). 

The  global  dominance  of  angiosperms 
indicates  that  they  are  ideally  adapted  to  exist 
within  many  different  habitats,  and  thek 
great  morphological  and  genomic  variation 
suggests  a  history  of  varied  selective 
pressures.  This  has  long  challenged  those 
who  have  sought  to  quantify  how  such  a 


diverse  group  arose  over  a  supposedly  short 
period  of  time.  Indeed,  the  traditional  view 
is  that  angiosperms  originated  in  the  early 
Cretaceous.  The  subsequent  appearance  of 
fossils  with  highly  diverse  morphologies, 
over  what  was  apparently  an  extremely  rapid 
timescale,  was  famously  described  by  Darwin 
as  an  “abominable  mystery”  in  a  letter  to 
Joseph  Hooker  in  1879  (first  published  in 
Darwin  and  Seward  1903). 

To  understand  fully  the  evolutionary 
history  of  angiosperms,  thek  diversity  needs 
to  be  characterised  in  a  phylogenetic  context. 
This  approach  indicates  whether  key  traits 
for  success  are  clade-specific,  or  have 
evolved  multiple  times  in  parallel. 
Additionally,  incorporating  temporal 
information  into  these  analyses  can  allow 
inferences  to  be  made  about  the 
envkonmental  conditions  that  might  have 
driven  angio sperm  diversification. 

In  this  review,  I  begin  by  discussing  our 
understanding  of  the  relationships  among 
the  major  seed  plant  Kneages,  and  the 
importance  of  this  for  reconstructing  the 
origin  of  flowers.  I  then  discuss  the 
relationships  of  the  major  lineages  within 
Angiospermae,  and  examine  estimates  of  the 
evolutionary  timescale  of  angiosperms.  I 
propose  a  number  of  the  future  dkections 
that  are  likely  to  improve  our  understanding 
of  the  evolutionary  history  of  angiosperms. 

Higher  relationships  of  angiosperms 
and  the  origin  of  flowers 

Angiosperms  are  recognised  as  members  of 
the  superdivision  Spermatophyta  along  with 
cycads,  conifers,  gnetophytes,  and  Ginkgo. 
The  last  four  extant  cone-bearing  lineages  are 
known  as  acrogymnosperms,  whereas  extant 
and  extinct  cone-bearing  lineages  combined 
are  known  as  gymnosperms  (Cantino  et  al. 
2007).  The  five  extant  spermatophyte 
lineages  are  linked  by  the  production  of 


67 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


seeds.  Estimates  of  the  number  of  seed 
plant  species  vary,  but  are  consistently  in  the 
region  of  many  hundred  thousand  species 
(Govaerts  2001;  Scotland  and  Wortley  2003). 
Among  other  potential  factors,  the  success 
of  these  lineages  is  perhaps  due  to  the 
diversification  of  regulatory  genes  important 
for  seed  and  floral  development  following 
ancient  whole-genome  duplication  events 
along  the  lineages  leading  to  seed  plants  and 
angiosperms  (Jiao  et  al.  2011). 

Angiosperms  can  be  readily 
distinguished  from  gymnosperms  through  a 
suite  of  synapomorphies.  These  include  the 
presence  of  flowers  with  at  least  one  carpel, 
which  develop  into  fruit  (c£  the  “naked” 
seeds  of  gymnosperms);  stamens  with  two 
pairs  of  poUen  sacs  (cf.  the  larger,  heavier 
corresponding  organs  of  gymnosperms);  a 
range  of  features  of  gametophyte  structure 
and  development,  including  drastically 
reduced  male  and  female  gametophytes 
compared  with  gymnosperms;  and  phloem 
tissue  with  sieve  tubes  and  companion  cells 
(cf.  sieve  cells  without  companion  cells  in 
gymnosperms)  (Doyle  and  Donoghue  1986; 
Soltis  and  Soltis  2004).  The  production  of 
endosperm  through  double  fertilisation  was 
previously  considered  to  be  a  further 
synapomorphy  of  angiosperms,  but  this 
phenomenon  has  also  been  observed  in 
some  gnetophyte  lineages  (Friedman  1992; 
Carmichael  and  Friedman  1996). 

Collectively,  the  synapomorphies  of 
angiosperms  are  thought  to  be  responsible 
for  providing  the  evolutionary  advantages 
that  led  to  theit  global  dominance,  which 
coincided  with  a  decline  in  gymnosperm 
diversity  (Bond  1989).  However,  to 
reconstruct  the  evolution  of  these  characters 
and  evaluate  their  importance  for 
angiosperm  evolution,  it  is  necessary  to 
determine  which  lineage  of  seed  plants  is 
most  closely  related  to  angiosperms.  The 
majority  of  earlier  studies  focused  on 


evaluating  the  seed  plant  phylogeny, 
including  determining  the  sister  lineage  to 
angiosperms,  using  comparative  morphology 
to  assess  homology  of  the  reproductive  and 
vegetative  structures  of  the  seed  plant 
lineages  (e.g.,  Doyle  and  Donoghue  1986). 

One  major  hope  was  that  determining 
the  sister  lineage  to  angiosperms  might  prove 
especially  useful  for  inferring  the  origin  and 
structure  of  the  first  flowers.  Throughout 
the  20*  cenmry,  the  two  main  hypotheses 
for  the  origin  of  flowers  were  that  they 
evolved  from  branched,  unisexual 
reproductive  structures  found  in  most 
gymnosperms  ("pseudanthial"  theory, 
Wettstein  1907),  or  that  flowers  evolved 
from  bisexual,  flower-like  structures,  such  as 
in  the  extinct  group  Bennettitales 
(’'euanthial”  theory,  Arber  and  Parkin  1907). 
The  inferred  homology  of  morphological 
structures  consistently  su^ested  that 
gnetophytes  were  the  extant  sister  lineage  to 
angiosperms,  with  several  potential  close 
(non-angiosperm)  fossil  relatives. 
Specifically,  various  features  of  wood 
anatomy  and  flower-Hke  structures  seemed 
to  suggest  a  close  relationship  between 
angiosperms,  gnetophytes,  and  the  extinct 
order  Bennettitales,  with  this  group  being  the 
sister  lineage  to  the  rest  of  the  gymnosperms 
(Crane  1985;  Doyle  and  Donoghue  1986). 
Therefore,  based  on  the  strength  of 
morphological  evidence,  the  euanthial  theory 
was  the  most  popular  view  in  the  20* 
Century. 

The  acceptance  of  the  euanthial  theory, 
coupled  with  the  predominance  of 
Cretaceous  Magnolia-\^^  fossils  at  the  time, 
led  to  suggestions  that  the  ancestral  flowers 
were  similar  to  present-day  magnolias.  This 
implies  that  magnolias  and  their  close 
relatives  were  some  of  the  earliest-diverging 
angiosperm  lineages  (Endress  1987). 
However,  most  molecular  phylogenetic 
studies  from  the  1990s  onwards  have 


68 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  Plistory  of  Flowering  Plants 


recovered  different  relationships  between  the 
extant  seed  plant  lineages.  The  dominant 
theme  in  these  modern  studies  is  that  all 
extant  gymnosperm  lineages  form  a 
monophyletic  sister  group  to  angiosperms 
(Chaw  et  al.  1997;  Bowe  et  al.  2000;  Chaw  et 
al.  2000;  Ruhfel  et  al.  2014;  Wickett  et  al. 
2014)  (Figure  1).  Particularly  strong  evidence 
has  emerged  for  a  close  relationship  between 
gnetophytes  and  conifers  (Qiu  et  al.  1999; 
Winter  et  al.  1999).  Indeed,  the  evidence 
seems  to  surest  that  gnetophytes  might 
even  be  nested  within  conifers  and  the  sister 
group  to  Pinaceae  (Bowe  et  al.  2000;  Chaw  et 
al  2000;  Zhong  et  al  2010). 

Overall,  because  none  of  the  extant 
gymnosperm  lineages  is  more  closely  related 
to  angiosperms  than  to  other  gymnosperms, 
they  cannot  directly  inform  hypotheses  on 
the  homologies  of  angiosperm  characters,  or 
on  the  sequence  of  development  of  these 
characters  (Doyle  2012).  Therefore,  while 
the  relationships  among  the  major  seed  plant 
lineages  have  been  largely  resolved,  the 
structural  origin  of  flowers,  and  the  affinity 
of  the  earliest  flowers  to  modern  species, 
remains  controversial.  Progress  in  this  area 
is  likely  to  be  achieved  through  improved 
understanding  of  the  relationships  among 
the  major  angiosperm  groups. 

Major  relationships  within 
Angiospermae 

The  major  relationships  within  angiosperms 
have  historically  proved  difficult  to 
determine,  and  have  long  been  in  a  state  of 
flux.  This  has  largely  been  due  to  differing 
ideas  of  the  characters,  initially 
morphological  but  later  molecular,  needed  to 
reconstmct  the  angiosperm  phylogeny.  An 
early  discovery  was  that  flowering  plants 
have  either  one  or  two  embryonic  leaves 
(Ray  1686""1704).  While  John  Ray  was  the 
first  to  observe  this  dichotomy,  he  later 


followed  Marcello  Malpighi  in  referring  to 
these  leaves  as  ‘cotyledons’.  Accordingly, 
flowering  plants  with  one  cotyledon  have 
subsequently  been  referred  to  as 
monocotyledons  or  ‘monocots’,  and  those 
with  two  cotyledons  have  been  called 
dicotyledons  or  ‘dicots’. 

Although  the  most  widely  known  early 
classification  scheme  by  Linnaeus  was  based 
solely  on  floral  reproductive  characters,  the 
division  into  monocots  and  dicots  has  since 
been  recognised  as  an  important  diagnostic 
feature  to  inform  classification,  with  varying 
implications  for  the  angiosperm  phylogeny. 
A  minority  of  early  authors  argued  that  some 
key  morphological  differences  between 
monocots  and  dicots,  such  as  vascular 
bundle  anatomy,  were  irreconcilable  with  a 
monophyletic  origin  of  angiosperms. 
Instead,  these  authors  argued  that 
angiosperms  should  be  recognised  as  a 
polyphyletic  group  (=  derived  from  more 
than  one  common  evolutionary  ancestor) 
(e.g,  Meeuse  1972;  Krassilov  1977). 
However,  the  predominant  view  was  that 
angiosperms  are  monophyletic,  and  the 
division  into  monocots  and  dicots 
constitutes  a  natural  split  within  flowering 
plants.  This  was  echoed  in  many  angiosperm 
classification  systems  developed  in  the  20^^ 
century,  including  the  highly  influential 
Takhtajan  (1980)  and  Cronquist  (1981) 
systems. 

To  infer  the  evolutionary  relationships 
within  monocots  and  dicots,  many  cladistic 
analyses  were  undertaken  in  the  latter  half  of 
the  20*  century  using  pollen,  floral,  and 
vegetative  characters.  This  approach  led  to 
many  informal  subgroups  being  proposed. 
For  example,  Donoghue  and  Doyle  (1989b) 
recognised  five  major  groups  of 
angiosperms,  corresponding  to  MagnoHales, 
Laurales,  Winteraceae-like  plants, 
‘paleoherbs’  (‘primitive’  herbaceous  lineages 
including  water  lilies  and  A.mhorelld)^  and 


69 


JouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  ~  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


Figure  1:  The  relationships  among  seed  plant  lineages,  scaled  to  geological  time  based  on  fossil 
ages.  Numbers  in  green  circles  refer  to  the  following:  (1)  oldest  Ginkgo  fossil  (Yang  et  al  2008); 
(2)  oldest  cycad  fossil  (Gao  and  Thomas  1989);  (3)  oldest  gnetophyte  fossil  (Rydin  et  al.  2006); 
(4)  oldest  conifer  fossils  (Wieland  1935);  (5)  oldest  angiosperm  fossils  (discussed  in  Doyle 
2012);  (6)  oldest  acrogymnosperm  fossil ;  (7)  an  estimated  maximum  age  for  crown-group  seed 
plants  (discussed  in  MagaUon  and  CastiUo  2009;  Foster  et  al.  2016). 


plants  with  tricolpate  pollen.  Although  the 
constituent  members  of  the  subgroups 
varied  across  studies,  the  recognition  of 
tricolpates  as  a  monophyletic  group  was  a 
consistent  finding  (e.g.,  Donoghue  and 
Doyle  1989b;  Donoghue  and  Doyle  1989a), 
leading  to  suggestions  that  dicots  had 
multiple  evolutionary  origins  (Endress  et  al. 
2000;  Endress  2002).  Indeed,  stratigraphical 
studies  in  which  triaperturate  pollen 
(tricolpate)  fossils  were  consistently  found  to 
originate  in  younger  sediments  than  both 
monocots  and  non-tricolpate  dicots  had 
already  hinted  that  dicots  did  not  form  a 


monophyletic  group  (Doyle  1969). 
Consequently,  Doyle  and  Hotton  (1991) 
chose  to  recognise  tricolpates  as  distinct 
from  the  rest  of  the  dicots,  coining  the  term 
‘eudicots’  for  this  group. 

Taxonomic  concepts  for  the  major 
angiosperm  groups  have  changed  over  time, 
which  makes  it  difficult  to  chronicle 
concisely  the  changing  opinions  about  the 
earliest-diverging  angiosperms.  For  example, 
the  group  Magnoliidae  now  has  a  very 
different  circumscription  compared  with  the 
past,  so  statements  in  earlier  studies 
regarding  the  relationships  between 


70 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  IListory  of  Flowering  Plants 


magnoliids  and  other  groups  might  no 
longer  be  applicable.  Nevertheless,  it  is  clear 
that  the  most  common  view  historically  was 
that  Magnolia-like  flowers  probably  occupied 
a  position  at  or  near  the  root  of  the 
angiosperm  phylogeny.  However,  there 
were  other  suggestions  for  the  earliest- 
diverging  angiosperm  lineages,  including 
Piperales+Chloranthales,  several  of  the 
lineages  in  the  formerly  recognised  paleoherb 
group,  or  even  monocots  (Burger  1977, 
1981). 

Attempts  to  clarify  the  relationships 
within  the  angiosperm  phylogeny  have  since 
been  gready  strengthened  by  the  inclusion  of 
molecular  data.  Some  aspects  of  early 
classification  schemes  based  on  morphology 
have  been  strongly  supported  by  molecular 
data  (reviewed  by  Endress  et  al.  2000; 
Endress  2002).  For  example,  the  key 
concepts  of  the  monophyly  of  angiosperms, 
monocots  and  eudicots,  the  polyphyly  of 
dicots,  and  the  position  of  magnoHids  as  an 
early  diverging  angiosperm  lineage,  were  all 
further  supported  by  molecular  data 
(Endress  et  al.  2000).  However,  many 
molecular  estimates  of  angiosperm 
evolutionary  relationships  have  contradicted 
estimates  based  on  morphological  data.  For 
example,  molecular  data  have  firmly  resolved 
the  family  Hydatellaceae  within 
Nymphaeales,  rather  than  within  Poales  as 
former  morphology-based  studies  had 
concluded  (Saarela  et  al.  2007).  Molecular 
data  have  also  helped  to  clarify  the  extent  of 
convergent  evolution  within  angiosperms, 
such  as  C4  photosynthesis  evolving 
independently  at  least  60  times  (Sage  et  al. 
2011). 

Arguably  the  most  important  finding 
from  analyses  of  molecular  data  has  been  the 
rooting  of  the  angiosperm  phylogeny. 
Success  was  not  immediate,  with 
disagreements  being  found  among  the  results 
of  molecular  analyses,  depending  on  the 


choice  of  molecular  markers.  An  influential 
early  attempt  with  molecular  data  to  resolve 
the  seed  plant  phylogeny  and,  necessarily,  to 
determine  the  earHest-diverging  angiosperm 
Hneage,  analysed  sequences  for  the 
chloroplast  rkL  gene  from  nearly  500  seed 
plant  taxa  using  maximum  parsimony  (Chase 
et  al.  1993).  In  this  case,  the  widespread 
aquatic  genus  Ceratophjllum  was  found  to  be 
the  sister  lineage  to  all  other  flowering  plants. 
However,  this  has  subsequently  been  found 
to  be  an  anomalous  result  seemingly  unique 
to  single-gene  parsimony  analyses  of  rAL.  A 
series  of  studies  in  1999  found  that  the 
monotypic  genus  Mmhorella  is  strongly 
supported  as  being  the  sister  lineage  to  all 
other  flowering  plants  (Mathews  and 
Donoghue  1999;  Parkinson  et  al.  1999;  Qiu 
et  al.  1999;  Soltis  et  al.  1999),  and  this  finding 
has  subsequently  been  supported  by  nearly 
aU  large  multigene  analyses  (Moore  et  al. 
2007;  Soltis  et  al.  2011;  but  see  Goremykin  et 
al.  2013;  Ruhfel  et  al.  2014;  Wickett  et  al. 
2014;  Xi  et  al.  2014;  Goremykin  et  al.  2015). 
These  studies  have  also  revealed  that  the 
base  of  the  angiosperm  phylogeny 
constitutes  a  grade  of  several  successive 
lineages,  originally  referred  to  as  the  ANITA 
(M/;^^or^/Z:?/Nymphaeale  s  /  lUiciaceae- 
"kv^mem'Aeem-Austrohaikjd)  grade,  but  now 
known  as  the  ANA 

(M/^/?^?r(?/Z:7/Nymphaeales/Austobaileyales) 
grade. 

The  remaining  -99.95%  of  angiosperms 
are  collectively  referred  to  as 
Mesangiospermae.  Within  this  group,  five 
major  Hneages  are  recognised:  Chloranthales, 
MagnoHidae,  CeratophyUales,  monocots,  and 
eudicots  (clade  names  here  are  standardised 
to  Cantino  et  al.  2007).  Unfortunately, 
despite  large  increases  in  the  amount  of 
available  genetic  data  and  improved  analytical 
techniques,  the  relationships  among  these 
mesangiosperm  groups  have  remained 
uncertain  (Figure  2).  When  analysing 


71 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  =  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


chloroplast  genome  sequences,  the  most 
common  finding  is  that  eudicots 
+Ceratophjlkm  form  the  sister  group  to 
monocots,  with  these  three  lineages  being 
the  sister  group  to  magnoMds 
TChloranthales.  Large  nuclear  DNA  data 
sets,  which  have  only  become  available  in 
recent  years,  tend  to  resolve  different 
relationships.  For  example,  they  have 
supported  a  sister  relationship  between 
eudicots  and  magnoliids+Chloranthales,  with 
monocots  being  the  sister  group  to  these 
three  lineages  (Wickett  et  al.  2014). 
However,  the  number  and  choice  of  nuclear 
DNA  markers  can  affect  inferred 
relationships  within  Mesangiospermae.  For 
example,  analysis  of  a  selection  of  59  low= 
copy  nuclear  genes  inferred  a  grouping  of 
Ceratophjlkm+ChlomnAi'Ae.s  and  eudicots, 
with  successive  sister  relationships  to 
magnoliids  and  monocots  (Zeng  et  al.  2014), 
Additionally,  the  choice  of  phylogeny 
reconstruction  method  can  lead  to  the 
estimation  of  different  topologies  (Xi  et  al. 
2014). 

Nevertheless,  despite  conflicting 
topologies  sometimes  being  inferred,  we 
currently  have  an  understanding  of  tine 
angiosperm  phylogeny  that  is  greater  than  at 
any  other  time  in  history.  The  power  of 
molecular  data  to  resolve  the  historically 
challenging  relationships  among  flowering 
plants  is  now  well  established.  In  response 
to  the  rapid  advances  in  the  field,  a 
cosmopolitan  consortium  of  researchers 
regularly  collaborate  to  release  timely 
summaries  of  the  state  of  knowledge  of  the 
angiosperm  phylogeny  (see  Angiosperm 
Phylogeny  Group  1998,  2003,  2009,  2016). 
We  now  have  a  viable  framework  to  allow 
fields  related  to  phylogenetics  to  flourish  and 
provide  a  greater  understanding  of  the 
important  evolutionary  steps  that  have 
contributed  to  the  overwhelming  success  of 
angiosperms,  such  as  through  evolutionary 


developmental  biology  (evo^devo)  studies 
(Preston  and  Hileman  2009).  However,  to 
gain  a  fuller  understanding  of  the 
evolutionary  history  of  angiosperms,  it  is 
necessary  to  know  more  than  just  the 
relationships  among  the  major  flowering 
plant  groups;  a  reliable  estimate  of  the 
angiosperm  evolutionary  timescale  is  also 
needed. 

Evolutionary  timescale  of 
angiosperms 

To  understand  how  an^osperms  came  to 
dominance,  including  how  the  crucial 
morpholo^cal  traits  that  led  to  their  success 
first  evolved,  it  is  necessary  to  have  some 
idea  of  the  timescale  of  angiosperm 
evolution.  Traditionally,  the  evolutionary 
timescale  of  organisms  has  been  elucidated 
through  study  of  the  fossil  record.  In  this 
approach,  the  first  appearance  of  each  taxon 
in  the  fossil  record,  as  determined  by 
morphology,  provides  an  indication  of  when 
it  first  evolved.  When  considering  the  fossil 
record,  it  is  important  to  distinguish  between 
“crown”  and  “stem”  groups.  A  crown  group 
is  the  least  indusive  monophyletic  group  that 
contains  aU  extant  members  of  a  clade,  as 
well  as  any  extinct  lineages  that  diverged  after 
the  most  recent  common  ancestor  of  the 
dade  (MagaMon  and  Sanderson,  2001).  In 
contrast,  a  stem  group  is  the  most  indusive 
monophyletic  group  that  contains  aU  extant 
members  of  a  dade,  as  well  as  any  extinct 
lineages  that  diverged  from  the  lineage 
leading  to  the  crown  group  (Magallon  and 
Sanderson,  2001), 

The  fossil  record  of  seed  plants  is 
ancient,  with  the  oldest  fossils  of 
progymnosperms  occurring  in  sediments 
from  the  Late  Devonian,  ^365  mUHon  years 
ago  (Ma)  (Fairon-Demaret  and  Schedder 
1987;  Rothwell  et  al,  1989;  Fairon-Demaret 
1996).The  fossil  record  of  gymnosperms 


72 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


Eudicots 

Ceratophyllales 

Monocots 

Magnoliids 

Chloranthales 

ANA 


(d) 


Eudicots 

Monocots 

Magnoliids 

Ceratophyllales 

Chloranthales 

ANA 


cpDNA 


Morphology 
+  cpDNA 


Monocots 

Magnoliids 

Eudicots 

Ceratophyllales 

Chloranthales 

ANA 


Figure  2:  A  comparison  of  several  different  estimates  of  the  relationships  among  eudicots, 
magnoliids,  monocots,  Ceratophyllum,  Chloranthales,  and  ANA-grade  angiosperms,  based 
on  the  comparison  presented  in  Zeng  et  al.  (2014),  The  different  topologies  represent 
findings  from  studies  using  nuclear  DNA  (nrDNA),  chloroplast  DNA  (cpDNA), 
mitochondrial  DNA  (mtDNA),  and  a  combination  of  morphological  and  molecular  data. 
A  sample  of  suitable  references  for  the  topologies  are  as  follows:  (a)  Zhang  et  al.  (2012);  (b) 
Moore  et  al.  (2011);  Zeng  et  al.  (2014);  (c)  Moore  et  al.  (2007);  Moore  et  al.  (2010);  Foster  et 
al.  (2016);  (d)  Qiu  et  al.  (2010);  (e)  Endress  and  Doyle  (2009). 


is  rich,  with  fossils  becoming  common  from 
the  Late  Carboniferous  to  Early  Triassic 
(MagaUon  2014),  and  reveaHng  an  extinct 
diversity  far  greater  than  the  extant  diversity. 

The  oldest  known  fossil  that  can  be 
confidently  assigned  to  the  stem  group  of 
angiosperms  has  suggested  that  angiosperms 
arose  as  early  as  247.2-242.0  Ma  (million 
years  ago)  (HochuH  and  Feist-Burkhardt 
2013).  Accepted  poUen  fossils  (microfossils) 
suggest  that  crown-group  angiosperms  first 


Unfortunately,,  the  fossil  record  of 
angiosperms  is  not  as  extensive  or 
informative. 

appeared  in  the  Valanginian  to  early 
Hauterivian  (early  Cretaceous,  -139.8-129.4 
Ma),  albeit  ia  sparse  amounts,  with  vast 
amounts  of  angiospermous  microfossils 
occurring  by  the  Barremian  (—129.4-125 
Ma)  (Doyle  2012).  There  is  a  noticeable 
disparity  in  the  number  and  presence  of 


73 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


fossils  between  lineages,  particularly  at  the 
family  level  and  below,  with  many  excellent 
fossils  being  present  for  some  groups  but 
none  for  others  (Magalon  2014). 

While  fossil  data  have  traditionally 
provided  the  only  source  of  information 
about  the  evolutionary  timescale  of  major 
groups,  molecular  dating  techniques  provide 
a  compelling  alternative,  especially  for  groups 
that  lack  fossils.  In  these  approaches, 
evolutionary  timescales  can  be  estimated 
using  phylogenetic  methods  based  on 
molecular  clocks.  When  the  concept  of  the 
molecular  clock  was  &st  proposed, 
evolutionary  change  was  assumed  to 
correlate  linearly  with  time  and  to  remain 
constant  across  lineages  (‘'strict”  molecular 
clock)  (Zuckerkandl  and  Pauling  1962). 
However,  it  has  since  become  dear  that 
strictly  clocklike  evolution  is  the  exception, 
rather  than  the  rule  (Welch  and  Bromham 
2005). 

Rates  of  molecular  evolution  vary 
substantially  across  vascular  plant  lineages 
(Soltis  et  al.  2002),  and  are  often  strongly 
correlated  with  Mfe  history  strategies.  For 
example,  substitution  rates  in  herbaceous 
annual  lineages  of  angiosperms  are  known  to 
be  substantially  higher  than  in  woody 
perennial  plants  (Smith  and  Donoghue  2008; 
Lanfear  et  al.  2013).  Consequently,  a  variety 
of  molecular  clock  models  have  been 
developed  to  account  for  evolutionary  rate 
variation  among  lineages  (Ho  and  Duchene 
2014).  Fossil  data  are  still  intricately  linked 
with  these  methods,  because  fossils  are  used 
to  provide  temporal  information  to  calibrate 
the  molecular  dock,  thereby  providing 
absolute  rather  than  relative  ages  of  nodes. 
For  example,  in  Bayesian  analyses,  temporal 
information  is  incorporated  through 
calibrations  priors,  which  can  take  the  form 
of  a  variety  of  probability  distributions  (Ho 
and  Phillips  2009).  In  the  absence  of  fossils 
for  a  particular  group  being  studied, 


biogeographic  events  and  rate  estimates  from 
other  groups  can  be  used  as  calibrations,  but 
these  are  subject  to  a  wide  range  of  errors 
(Ho  et  al.  2015). 

Collectively,  molecular  dating  studies 
have  yielded  remarkably  disparate  estimates 
for  the  age  of  crown-group  angiosperms 
(summarised  in  Bell  et  al  2010;  Magallon 
2014;  Foster  et  al.  2016).  Inferred  ages  have 
ranged  from  the  extreme  values  of  86  Ma 
(when  considering  only  the  3rd  codon 
positions  of  r^rL;  Sanderson  and  Doyle 
2001)  to  332.6  Ma  (Soltis  et  al.  2002).  Most 
age  estimates  fall  between  140  and  240  Ma, 
but  this  still  represents  a  substantial  amount 
of  variation.  Additionally,  the  earliest 
analyses  found  that  crown-group 
angiosperms  were  considerably  older  than 
impKed  by  the  fossil  record,  in  some  cases  by 
more  than  100  million  years  (e.g.  Martin  et  al. 
1989).  Smaller  disparities  between  molecular 
and  fossil  estimates  were  obtained  in  later 
studies  (e.g.  Sanderson  and  Doyle  2001). 
However,  some  more  recent  estimates  have 
tended  to  support  a  more  protracted 
timescale  for  angiosperm  evolution  (e.g. 
Smith  et  al.  2010),  echoing  the  results  of  the 
earliest  molecular  studies. 

Progress  in  molecular  dating  can  be 
characterised  in  terms  of  increasing 
methodological  complexity  and  improving 
sampling  of  taxa  and  genes  (Ho  2014).  A 
persistent  problem,  however,  has  been  the 
need  for  a  trade-off  between  taxon  sampling 
and  gene  sampling.  Low  gene  sampling  has 
been  typical  of  studies  of  an^osperm 
evolution,  albeit  with  some  other  exceptions, 
including  the  12  mitochondrial  genes 
analysed  by  Laroche  et  al.  (1995),  58 
chloroplast  genes  analysed  by  Goremykin  et 
al.  (1997),  61  chloroplast  genes  analysed  by 
Moore  et  al.  (2007),  and  the  83  chloroplast 
genes  analysed  by  Moore  et  al.  (2010). 
However,  most  of  these  studies  had  sparse 
angiosperm  taxon  sampling.  Among  the  few 


74 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  --  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


other  studies  that  have  included  more  than 
50  taxa,  the  largest  number  of  genes  sampled 
was  five.  The  largest  taxon  samples  have 
been  those  of  Zanne  et  al.  (2014),  which 
used  a  sta^ering  32,223  species,  and 
MagaUon  et  al.  (2015),  which  included  792 
angiosperm  taxa  and  one  of  the  largest 
samples  of  fossil  calibration  points  ever  used. 
An  exception  to  the  above  trade-off  between 
taxon  and  gene  sampling  is  the  study  by 
Foster  et  al.  (2016),  which  analysed  76 
chloroplast  genes  from  193  angiosperm  taxa. 

The  most  controversial  aspect  of 
angiosperm  molecular  dating  studies  has 
been  an  apparent  incongruence  between 
molecular  estimates  and  those  extrapolated 
purely  from  fossil  occurrence  data.  Many 
modern  molecular  dating  estimates  without 
strongly  informative  temporal  calibrations 
tend  to  surest  that  angiosperms  arose  in  the 
early  to  mid-Triassic  (Figure  3)  (Foster  et  al. 
2016),  which  impHes  a  considerable  gap  in 
the  fossil  record  (Doyle  2012).  This 
contradicts  the  claim  that  the  evolutionary 
history  of  crown-group  angiosperms  is  well 
represented  in  the  fossil  record  (MagaUon 

2014),  despite  several  lines  of  evidence 
supporting  this  suggestion:  the  gradual 
increase  in  abundance,  diversity,  and 
distribution  of  fossU  angiosperms;  the 
ordered  progression  of  both  morphological 
and  functional  diversification;  and  the 
agreement  between  the  stratigraphic  record 
and  molecular  data  in  the  sequential 
appearance  of  angiosperm  lineages. 

If  the  fault  Hes  instead  with  the  molecular 
estimates,  then  it  has  been  su^ested  that  the 
substantial  disparity  between  molecular  and 
fossU-based  estimates  of  the  age  of  crown 
angiosperms  might  be  a  result  of  the  choices 
of  molecular  markers,  taxa,  caUbrations,  or 
models  of  rate  variation  (MagaUon  2014). 
Particular  blame  has  been  placed  on  the 
inabUity  of  molecular  dating  methods  to 
account  properly  for  non-representative 


sampling  of  angiosperms  and  Ufe  history- 
associated  rate  heterogeneity  (BeauHeu  et  al. 

2015) .  However,  comprehensive 

investigations  of  the  impact  of  models, 
priors,  and  gene  sampling  on  Bayesian 
estimates  of  the  angiosperm  evolutionary 
timescale,  using  a  genome-scale  data  set  and 
numerous,  widely  distributed  fossU 
caUbrations,  have  stiU  yielded  remarkably 
robust  estimates  of  a  Triassic  origin  of 
angiosperms  (Foster  et  al.  2016).  This 
impUes  a  long  period  of  no  angiosperm 
fossUisation,  or  that  fossUs  of  this  age  simply 
remain  to  be  discovered  (but  see  Wang  et 
al2007;  Gang  et  al.  2016). 

Despite  the  disparate  estimates  for 
the  origin  of  crown-group  angiosperms,  the 
timescale  of  evolution  within  this  group  is 
beginning  to  be  understood  with  increased 
precision.  Of  particular  note  is  that  estimates 
for  the  origin  of  most  modern  angiosperm 
orders  seem  to  be  consistent  regardless  of 
tlie  age  inferred  for  the  angiosperm  crown 
group  (MagaUon  et  al.  2015;  Foster  et  al. 

2016) .  Ordinal  diversification  is  most 
commonly  estimated  to  have  begun  in  the 
early  Cretaceous,  and  is  concentrated 
predominantly  from  this  time  through  to  the 
mid-Cretaceous  (MagaUon  et  al.  2015;  Foster 
et  al.  2016).  Modern  angiosperm  famiUes  are 
estimated  to  have  originated  steadUy  from 
the  early  Cretaceous,  with  the  peak  of  famUy 
genesis  occurring  from  the  late  Cretaceous  to 
the  early  Paleogene  (MagaUon  et  al.  2015) 
During  this  time,  the  supercontinent  Pangaea 
largely  completed  its  breakup  into  the 
continents  of  the  present  day.  Concurrently, 
there  were  dramatic  shifts  in  cHmate,  with 
global  temperatures  and  CO2  levels  far 
higher  than  in  the  present  day  (Hay  and 
Floegel  2012),  These  changes,  particularly  in 
temperature,  would  have  had  significant 
impacts  on  the  levels  and  efficiency  of. 


75 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


Figure  3:  A  recent  estimate  of  the  angiosperm  evolutionary  timescale^  modified  from  Foster  et 
al.  (2016).  Numbers  in  parentheses  after  taxon  names  refer  to  the  number  of  taxa  included 
from  those  groups  in  the  study.  Green  circles  indicate  estimates  of  the  crown  age  for  lineages 
when  more  than  one  taxon  has  been  included,  and  the  blue  star  indicates  the  inferred  age  for 
the  origin  of  crown-group  an^osperms.  The  dashed  line  indicates  the  time  by  which  aU 
modern  orders  were  inferred  to  have  arisen. 


photosynthesis  (ElHs  2010;  Hay  and  Floegel 
2012).  Selective  pressures  would  have  been 
high,  ultimately  influencing  the  evolution  of 
an^osperms  and,  presumably,  other  taxa  that 
interacted  with  them. 

Concluding  remarks  and  future 
directions 

The  substantial  diversity  and  global 
dominance  of  flowering  plants  have  puzzled 
and  intrigued  many  researchers  throughout 
history.  The  classification  of  angiosperms 
has  long  proved  difficult  because  of  the 
monumental  size  and  such  varied 
morphologies  within  this  group. 
Subsequently,  the  key  evolutionary 
innovations  that  first  occurred  to  produce 
flowers,  as  well  as  the  reasons  for  the 
overwhelming  success  of  angiosperms,  have 
historically  been  obscured.  Therefore,  it  is 
reasonable  to  surmise  that  for  most  of 


histojy,  the  relationship  of  angiosperms  to 
other  seed  plants,  the  relationships  within 
an^osperms,  the  timescale  of  angiosperm 
evolution,  and  the  reasons  for  the  relative 
success  of  an^osperms  compared  to 
gymnosperms  were  all  largely  unknown  or 
not  understood. 

Thankfully,  we  have  now  made  great 
progress  in  the  quest  to  answer  these 
questions.  Work  remains  to  identify 
potential  stem-group  relatives  of  seed  plants, 
but  we  now  have  reliable  estimates  of  the 
phylogeny  of  extant  seed  plants.  However, 
the  most  widely  accepted  seed  plant 
phylogeny  su^ests  that  no  extant 
gymnosperm  lineage  preserves  the 
evolutionary  steps  that  led  to  the  origin  of 
the  first  flowers.  Therefore,  in  some  respects 
the  resolution  of  the  seed  plant  phylogeny 
has  been  somewhat  of  a  disappointment  for 
those  wanting  to  reconstruct  the 


76 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  Fiistory  of  Flowering  Plants 


development  of  the  flower  (Doyle  2012). 
While  this  might  be  considered  a  setback, 
our  gready  improved  knowledge  of  the 
angiosperm  phylogeny,  including  a  strongly 
supported  position  for  the  root,  allows 
increasingly  sophisticated  questions  to  be 
asked  about  angiosperm  macroevolution 
(e.g,  Turcotte  et  al.  2014;  Zanne  et  al.  2014). 
Similarly,  our  modern  estimates  for  the 
timescale  of  angiosperm  evolution  allow  us 
to  explore  hirther  the  selective  pressures  that 
might  have  shaped  the  present-day 
distribution  and  diversity  of  flowering  plants. 

Despite  our  significant  improvements  in 
understandiug  the  patterns  and  timescale  of 
angiosperm  evolution,  the  field  is  far  from 
settled.  The  celebrated  consistent,  strongly 
supported  phylogeny  based  on  chloroplast 
markers  is  increasingly  being  recognised  as 
only  one  estimate  of  the  angiosperm 
phylogeny.  The  alternative  phylogenies 
inferred  through  analysis  of  nuclear  markers, 
and  through  the  choice  of  phylogeny 
reconstmction  methods,  suggests  that  more 
work  is  needed  to  reconcile  potentially 
conflicting  evolutionary  histories. 
Additionally,  the  controversy  surrounding 
the  age  of  flowering  plants  shows  no  signs  of 
abating.  Modern  knowledge  of  the  fossil 
record  suggests  that  the  rapid  radiation  of 
angiosperm  lineages  was  not  quite  as 
explosive  as  implied  by  Darwin’s 
“abominable  mystery”  proclamation,  yet  a 
new  mystery  is  why  molecular  date  estimates 
stiU  generally  far  pre-date  the  oldest 
angiosperm  fossils.  It  is  unlikely  that 
increasing  the  amount  of  genetic  data  will 
solve  this  problem  (Foster  et  al.  2016); 
instead,  increased  sampling  from 
underrepresented  groups  and 

methodological  improvements  in 

incorporating  fossil  data  appear  to  be  the 
way  forward.  The  last  point  appears  to  be  an 
especially  promising  avenue  of  research,  with 
new  methods  being  developed  for  the 


simultaneous  analysis  of  extant  and  extinct 
taxa  (Ronquist  et  al.  2012;  Gavryushkina  et 
al.  2014;  Heath  et  al.  2014).  Overall,  it  is 
clear  that  our  understanding  of  the 
evolutionary  history  of  angiosperms  has 
changed  considerably  over  time,  and  we  are 
now  in  an  exciting  new  era  of  angiosperm 
research. 

Acknowledgements 

I  would  like  to  thank  Simon  Ho  for  helpful 
feedback  on  this  manuscript. 

References 

Angiosperm  Phylogeny  Group,  A.  P.  G.  (1998) 
An  ordinal  classification  for  the  families  of 
flowering  plants,  A.nnals  of  the  Missouri  botanical 
Garden,  85,  531-553. 

Angiosperm  Phylogeny  Group,  A.  P.  G.  (2003) 
An  update  of  the  Angiosperm  Phylogeny 

Group  classification  for  the  orders  and  families 
of  flowering  plants.  Botanical  Journal  of  the  Unnean 
Society,  141,  399-436. 

Angiosperm  Phylogeny  Group,  A.  P,  G,  (2009) 
An  update  of  the  Angiosperm  Phylogeny 

Group  classification  for  the  orders  and  families 
of  flowering  plants:  APG  III,  Botanical  Journal  of 
the  Unnean  Society,  165, 105—121. 

Angiosperm  Phylogeny  Group,  A.  P.  G.  (2016) 
An  update  of  the  Angiosperm  Phylogeny 

Group  classification  for  the  orders  and  families 
of  flowering  plants:  APG  IV,  Botanical  Journal  of 
the  Unnean  Society,  181, 1, 1—20. 

Arber,  E.  A.  &  Parkin,}.  (1907)  On  the  origin  of 
angiosperms.  Journal  of  the  Unnean  Society  of 
Undon,  Botany,  38,  263,  29—80. 

Beaulieu,  J.  M.,  O’Meara,  B.,  Crane,  P.  & 
Donoghue,  M.  J.  (2015)  Heterogeneous  rates  of 
molecular  evolution  and  diversification  could 
explain  the  Triassic  age  estimate  for 
angiosperms,  Systematic  Biology,  64,  5,  869—878. 
Bebber,  D.  P.,  Carine,  M.  A.,  Wood,  J.  R.  L, 
Wortley,  A.  H.,  Harris,  D.  J.,  Prance,  G.  T., 
Davidse,  G.,  Paige,  J.,  Pennington,  T.  D.  & 
Robson,  N.  K.  B.  (2010)  Herbaria  are  a  major 
frontier  for  species  discovery.  Proceedings  of  the 


11 


jouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 

Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


National  Academy  of  Sciences^  107,  51,  22169- 
2217L 

BeU,  C,  D.,  Soltis,  D.  E.  &  Soltis,  P.  S.  (2010)  The 
age  and  diversification  of  the  angiosperms  re¬ 
revisited,  Journal  of  Botany,  97,  8,  1296— 

1303. 

BeUard,  C.,  Bertelsmeier,  C.,  Leadley,  P.,  ThuiUer, 
W.  &  Courchamp,  F.  (2012)  Impacts  of  climate 
change  on  the  hiture  of  biodiversity,  'Ecology 
Utters,  15, 4,  365-377. 

Bond,  W.  J.  (1989)  The  tortoise  and  the  hare: 
ecology  of  angiosperm  dominance  and 
g}^mnosperm  persistence,  Biological  Journal  of  the 
Unnean  Society,  36,  3,  227-249. 

Bowe,  L.  M.,  Coat,  G.  &  dePamphilis,  C.  W. 
(2000)  Phylogeny  of  seed  plants  based  on  all 
three  genomic  compartments:  Extant 

gymno  sperms  are  monophyletic  and  Gnetales' 
closest  relatives  are  conifers,  Pwceedings  of  the 
National  Academy  of  Sciences,  97,  8, 4092-4097. 

Brodribb,  T.  J.  &  Feild,  T.  S.  (2010)  Leaf 
hydraulic  evolution  led  a  surge  in  leaf 
photo  synthetic  capacity  during  early 
angiosperm  diversification,  Ecology  Utters,  13,  2, 
175-183. 

Bungard,  R.  A.  (2004)  Photosynthetic  evolution 
in  parasitic  plants:  insight  from  the  chloroplast 
genome.  Bioessays,  26,  3,  235-247. 

Burger,  W.  C.  (1977)  The  Piperales  and  the 
monocots,  The  Botanical  Uview,  43,  3,  345-393. 

Burger,  W.  C.  (1981)  Heresy  revived:  the 
monocot  theory  of  angiosperm  origin. 
Evolutionary  Theory,  5, 40, 189-226. 

Cantino,  P.  D.,  Doyle,  J.  A.,  Graham,  S.  W.,  Judd, 
W.  S.,  Olmstead,  R.  G.,  Soltis,  D.  E.,  Soltis,  P.  S. 
&  Donoghue,  M.  J.  (2007)  Towards  a 
phylogenetic  nomenclature  of  Tracheophyta, 
Taxon,  56,  3, 1E^4E. 

Carmichael,  J.  S.  &  Friedman,  W.  E.  (1996) 
Double  fertilisation  in  Gnetum  gnemon 
(Gnetaceae):  its  bearing  on  the  evolution  of 
sexual  reproduction  within  the  Gnetales  and  the 
anthophyte  clade,  American  Journal  of  Botany,  83, 
6,  767-780. 

Chase,  M.  W.,  Soltis,  D.  E.,  Olmstead,  R.  G., 
Morgan,  D.,  Les,  D.  H.,  Mishler,  B.  D.,  Duvall, 
M.  R,  Price,  R.  A.,  Hills,  H.  G.  &  Qiu,  Y.-L. 
(1993)  Phylogenetics  of  seed  plants:  an  analysis 
of  nucleotide  sequences  from  the  plastid  gene 


rAL,  Annals  of  the  Missouri  Botanical  Garden,  80,  3, 
528-580. 

Chaw,  S.-M.,  Parkinson,  C.  L.,  Cheng,  Y., 
Vincent,  T.  M.  &  Palmer,  J.  D.  (2000)  Seed 
plant  phylogeny  inferred  from  aU  three  plant 
genomes:  monophyly  of  extant  gymnosperms 
and  origin  of  Gnetales  from  conifers.  Proceedings 
of  the  National  Academy  of  Sciences,  97,  8,  4086- 
4091. 

Chaw,  S.-M.,  Zharkikh,  A.,  Sung,  H.-M.,  Lau,  T.- 
C.  &  Li,  W.-H.  (1997)  Molecular  phylogeny  of 
extant  gymnosperms  and  seed  plant  evolution: 
analysis  of  nuclear  18S  rRNA  sequences. 
Molecular  Biology  and  Evolution,  14, 1,  56-68. 

Crane,  P.  R.  (1985)  Phylogenetic  analysis  of  seed 
plants  and  the  origin  of  angiosperms.  Annals  of 
the  Missouri  Botanical  Garden,  72,  4,  716-793. 

Cronquist,  A.  (1981)  An  integrated  system  of 
classification  of flomring plants,  Columbia  University 
Press,  New  York  City,  USA. 

Darwin,  F.  &  Seward,  A.  C.  (1903)  More  letters  of 
Gharles  Darwin:  a  record  of  his  work  in  a  series  of 
hitherto  unpublished  letters,  John  Murray,  London, 
UK. 

Donoghue,  M.  J.  &  Doyle,  J.  A.  (1989a) 
"Phylogenetic  analysis  of  angiosperms  and  the 
relationships  of  Hamamelidae",  in  Crane,  P.  R. 
&  Blackmore,  S.  (eds.)  Evolution,  systematics,  and 
fossil  history  of  the  Hamamelidae.  UoL  1.  Introduction 
and  ”Uwed’  Hamamelidae.,  Clarendon  Press, 
Oxford. 

Donoghue,  M.  J.  &  Doyle,  J.  A.  (1989b) 
"Phylogenetic  studies  of  seed  plants  and 
angiosperms  based  on  morphological 
characters",  in  Fernhokn,  B.,  Bremer,  K.  & 
JornvaU,  H.  (eds.)  The  hierarchy  of  life:  molecules  and 
morphology  in  phylogenetic  analysis,  Elsevier  Science, 
Amsterdam,  181-193. 

Doyle,  J.  A.  (1969)  Cretaceous  angiosperm  pollen 
of  the  Atlantic  Coastal  Plain  and  its 
evolutionary  significance.  Journal  of  the  Arnold 
Arboretum,  50, 1—35. 

Doyle,  J.  A.  (2012)  Molecular  and  fossil  evidence 
on  the  origin  of  angiosperms.  Annual  Uview  of 

Earth  and  Planetary  Sciences,  40,  301-326. 

Doyle,  J.  A.  &  Donoghue,  M.  J.  (1986)  Seed  plant 
phylogeny  and  the  origin  of  angiosperms:  an 
experimental  cladistic  approach.  The  Botanical 
Review,  52, 4,  321-M-3L 


78 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


Doyle,  J.  A.  &  Hotton,  C.  L.  (1991) 
"Diversification  of  early  angiosperm  poUen  in  a 
cladistic  context",  in  Blackmore,  S.  &  Barnes,  S. 
H.  (eds.)  'Pollen  and  spores:  patterns  of  diversification^ 
Clarendon  Press,  Oxford,  169-195. 

Ellis,  R.  J.  (2010)  Biochemistry:  Tackling 
unintelligent  design,  Nature,  463,  7278, 164-165. 

Endress,  P.  K.  (1987)  The  early  evolution  of  the 
angiosperm  flower.  Trends  in  Ecologji  Evolution, 
2, 10,  300-304. 

Endress,  P.  K.  (2002)  Morphology  and 
angiosperm  systematics  in  the  molecular  era. 
The  Botanical  Rfvieiv,  68, 4,  545-570. 

Endress,  P.  K.,  Baas,  P.  &  Gregory,  M.  (2000) 
Systematic  plant  morphology  and  anatomy:  50 
Years  of  progress.  Taxon,  49,  3, 401-434. 

Fakon-Demaret,  M.  (1996)  Dorinnotheca  streelii 
Fairon-Demaret,  et  sp.  nov.,  a  new  early  seed 
plant  from  the  upper  Famennian  of  Belgium, 
Review  of  Palaeobotanj  and  Paljnok^,  93,  1,  217- 
233. 

Fairon-Demaret,  M.  &  Scheckler,  S.  E.  (1987) 
Typification  and  redescription  of  Moresnetia 
c(alesskji  Stockmans,  1948,  an  early  seed  plant 
from  the  Upper  Famennian  of  Belgium,  Bulletin- 
Institut  Royal  des  Sciences  Naturelles  de  Belgique. 
Sciences  de  la  Terre,  57, 183-199. 

Fleischmann,  A.,  Michael,  T.  P.,  Rivadavia,  F., 
Sousa,  A.,  Wang,  W.,  Temsch,  E.  M., 
Greilhuber,  J.,  MiiUer,  K.  F.  &  Heubl,  G.  (2014) 
Evolution  of  genome  size  and  chromosome 
number  in  the  carnivorous  plant  genus  Genlisea 
(Lentibulariaceae),  with  a  new  estimate  of  the 
minimum  genome  size  in  angiosperms,  Annals 
ofBotany,  114,  8, 1651-1663. 

Foster,  C.  S.  P.,  Sauquet,  H.,  van  der  Merwe,  M., 
McPherson,  H.,  Rossetto,  M.  &  Ho,  S.  Y.  W. 
(2016)  Evaluating  the  Impact  of  Genomic  Data 
and  Priors  on  Bayesian  Estimates  of  the 
Angiosperm  Evolutionary  Timescale,  Systematic 
Biolog)!,  in  press. 

Friedman,  W.  E.  (1992)  Evidence  of  a  pre- 
angiosperm  origin  of  endosperm:  implications 
for  the  evolution  of  flowering  plants,  Science, 
255,  5042, 336-339. 

Galtier,  N.  (2011)  The  intriguing  evolutionary 
dynamics  of  plant  mitochondrial  DNA,  BMC 
Biolog)!,  9, 1,  61. 

Gang,  H.  A.  N.,  Zhongjian,  L.  1.  U.,  Xueling,  L.  1. 
U.,  Limi,  M.  A.  O.,  Jacques,  F.  &  Xin,  W. 


(2016)  A  Whole  Plant  Herbaceous  Angiosperm 
from  the  Middle  Jurassic  of  China,  Acta 
Geologica  Sinica  (English  Edition),  90, 1, 19-29. 

Gavryushkina,  A.,  Welch,  D.,  Stacker,  T.  & 
Dmmmond,  A.  J.  (2014)  Bayesian  inference  of 
sampled  ancestor  trees  for  epidemiology  and 
fossil  calibration,  P1j)S  Computational  Biology,  10, 
12,  el003919. 

Goremykin,  V.  V.,  Hansmann,  S.  &  Martin,  W.  F. 
(1997)  Evolutionary  analysis  of  58  proteins 
encoded  in  six  completely  sequenced 
chloroplast  genomes:  revised  molecular 
estimates  of  two  seed  plant  divergence  times. 
Plant  Systematics  and  Evolution,  206, 1—4,  337—351. 

Goremykin,  V.  V.,  Nikiforova,  S.  V.,  Biggs,  P.  J., 
Zhong,  B.,  Delange,  P.,  Martin,  W.,  Woetzel,  S., 
Atherton,  R.  A.,  McLenachan,  P.  A.  & 
Lockhart,  P.  J.  (2013)  The  evolutionary  root  of 
flowering  plants,  Systematic  Biology,  62, 1,  50—61. 

Goremykin,  V.  V.,  Nikiforova,  S.  V.,  Cavalieri, 
D.,  Pindo,  M.  &  Lockhart,  P.  (2015)  The  Root 
of  Flowering  Plants  and  Total  Evidence, 
Systematic  Biolog!,  64,  5,  879-891. 

Govaerts,  R.  (2001)  How  many  species  of  seed 
plants  are  there?,  Taxon,  50, 4, 1085-1090. 

Hay,  W.  W.  &  Floegel,  S.  (2012)  New  thoughts 
about  the  Cretaceous  climate  and  oceans,  Earth- 
Science  Reviews,  1 15,  4,  262-272. 

Heath,  T.  A.,  Huelsenbeck,  J.  P.  &  Stacker,  T. 
(2014)  The  fossilized  birth-death  process  for 
coherent  calibration  of  ckvergence-time 
estimates.  Proceedings  of  the  National  Academy  of 
Sciences,  111,  29,  E2957-E2966. 

Ho,  S.  Y.  W.  (2014)  The  changing  face  of  the 
molecular  evolutionary  clock.  Trends  in  Ecology 
(Er  Evolution,  29,  9, 496-503. 

Ho,  S.  Y.  W.  &  Duchene,  S.  (2014)  Molecular- 
clock  methods  for  estimating  evolutionary  rates 
and  Molecular  Ecology,  23,  5947-5965. 

Ho,  S.  Y.  W.  &  Phikips,  M.  J.  (2009)  Accounting 
for  cakbration  uncertainty  in  phylogenetic 
estimation  of  evolutionary  ckvergence  times, 
Systematic  Biolog,  58,  3,  367-380. 

Ho,  S.  Y.  W.,  Tong,  K.  J.,  Foster,  C.  S.  P.,  Ritchie, 
A.  M.,  Lo,  N.  &  Crisp,  M.  D.  (2015) 
Biogeographic  calibrations  for  the  molecular 
clock,  Biolog  Letters,  11,9,  20150194. 

Hochuk,  P.  A.  &  Feist-Burkhardt,  S.  (2013) 
Ang^osperm-kke  poken  and  Afropollis  from  the 
Midcke  Triassic  (Anisian)  of  the  Germanic 


79 


jouRN.\L  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  ~  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


Basia  (Northern  Switzerland),  Frontiers  in  Plant 
Science^  4,  344. 

Jiao,  Y.,  Wickett,  N.  J.,  Ayyampalayam,  S., 
Chanderbali,  A.  S.,  Landherr,  L.,  Ralph,  P.  E., 
Tomsho,  L.  P.,  Hu,  Y.,  Liang,  H.  &  Soltis,  P.  S. 
(2011)  Ancestral  polyploidy  in  seed  plants  and 
angiosperms.  Nature,  473,  7345,  97-100. 

Kitazaki,  K.  &  Kubo,  T.  (2010)  Cost  of  having 
the  largest  mitochondrial  genome:  evolutionary 
mechanism  of  plant  mitochondrial  genome, 
Journal  of  Botanj,  20 1 0,  620 1 3 7 . 

Kjrassilov,  V.  A.  (1977)  The  origin  of 
angiosperms.  The  Botanical  Review,  43,  1,  143— 
176. 

Lanfear,  R,  Ho,  S.  Y.  W.,  Davies,  T.  J.,  Moles,  A. 
T.,  Aarssen,  L.,  Swenson,  N.  G.,  Warman,  L., 
Zanne,  A.  E.  &  AUen,  A.  P.  (2013)  Taller  plants 

have  lower  rates  of  molecular  evolution,  Nature 
Communications,  4, 1879. 

Laroche,  J.,  Li,  P.  &  Bousquet,  J.  (1995) 
Mitochondrial  DNA  and  monocot-dicot 
divergence  time.  Molecular  Biolo^  and  Evolution, 
12,  6,1151-1156. 

Lee,  M.  S.  Y.  &  Ho,  S.  Y.  W.  (2016)  Molecular 
clocks.  Current  Biology,  26, 10,  R399-R402. 

Levin,  D.  A.  (2002)  The  role  of  chromosomal  change  in 
plant  evolution,  Oxford  University  Press,  New 
York. 

MagaUon,  S.  (2014)  A  review  of  the  effect  of 
relaxed  clock  method,  long  branches,  genes, 
and  calibrations  in  the  estimation  of  angiosperm 
age.  Botanical  Sciences,  92, 1, 1-22. 

MagaUon,  S.  &  Sanderson,  M.  J.  (2001)  Absolute 
diversification  rates  in  angiosperm  clades. 
Evolution,  55,  9, 1762-1780. 

MagaUon,  S.,  Gomez-Acevedo,  S.,  Sanchez- 
Reyes,  L.  L.  &  Hernandez-Hernandez,  T. 
(2015)  A  metacaUbrated  time- tree  documents 
the  early  rise  of  flowering  plant  phylogenetic 
diversity,  New  Phjtologist,  207,  2,  437-453. 

Martin,  W.,  Gierl,  A.  &  Saedler,  H.  (1989) 
Molecular  evidence  for  pre-Cretaceous 
angiosperm  origins.  Nature,  339, 46-48. 

Mathews,  S.  &  Donoghue,  M.  J.  (1999)  The  root 
of  angiosperm  phylogeny  inferred  from 
dupUcate  phytochrome  genes.  Science,  286,  5441, 
947-950. 

Meeuse,  A.  D.  J.  (1972)  Facts  and  fiction  in  floral 
morphology  with  special  reference  to  the 


Polycarpicae  1.  A  general  survey,  Acta  Botanica 
Neerlandica,  21,  2, 113-127. 

Moore,  M.  J.,  BeU,  C.  D.,  Soltis,  P.  S.  &  Soltis,  D. 
E.  (2007)  Using  plastid  genome-scale  data  to 
resolve  enigmatic  relationships  among  basal 
angiosperms.  Proceedings  of  the  National  Academy  of 
Sciences,  104,  49, 19363-19368. 

Moore,  M.  J.,  Soltis,  P.  S.,  BeU,  C.  D.,  Burleigh,  J. 

G.  &  Soltis,  D.  E.  (2010)  Phylogenetic  analysis 
of  83  plastid  genes  further  resolves  the  early 
diversification  of  eudicots,  Proceedings  of  the 
National  Academy  of  Sciences,  107, 10, 4623-4628. 

Parkinson,  C.  L.,  Adams,  K.  L.  &  Palmer,  J.  D. 
(1999)  Multigene  analyses  identify  the  three 
earUest  lineages  of  extant  flowering  plants. 
Current  Biologf,  9,  24, 1485-1491. 

PeUicer,  J.,  Fay,  M.  F.  &  Leitch,  1.  J.  (2010)  The 
largest  eukaryotic  genome  of  them  aU?,  Botanical 
Journal  of  the  Einnean  Society,  1 64, 1 , 1 0—1 5. 

Pimm,  S.  L.  &  Joppa,  L.  N.  (2015)  How  many 
plant  species  are  there,  where  are  they,  and  at 
what  rate  are  they  going  extinct?.  Annals  of  the 
Missouri  Botanical  Garden,  100,  3, 170—176. 

Preston,  J.  C.  &  HUeman,  L.  C.  (2009) 
Developmental  genetics  of  floral  symmetry 
evolution.  Trends  in  Plant  Science,  14,  3, 147-154. 

Qiu,  Y.-L.,  Lee,  J.,  Bernasconi-Quadroni,  F., 
Soltis,  D.  E.,  Soltis,  P.  S.,  Zanis,  M.,  Zimmer,  E. 
A.,  Chen,  Z.,  Savolainen,  V.  &  Chase,  M.  W. 
(1999)  The  earUest  angiosperms;  evidence  from 
mitochondrial,  plastid  and  nuclear  genomes. 
Nature,  402,  6760, 404-407. 

Ray,  J.  (1686-1704)  Historia  Plantarum,  H. 
Faithorne,  London. 

Ronquist,  F.,  Klopfstein,  S.,  Vilheknsen,  L., 
SchuUneister,  S.,  Murray,  D.  L.  &  Rasnitsyn,  A. 
P.  (2012)  A  total-evidence  approach  to  dating 
with  fossUs,  appUed  to  the  early  radiation  of  the 
Hymenoptera,  Systematic  Biology,  61,  6,  973-999. 

Rosas-Guerrero,  V.,  AguUar,  R.,  Marten- 
Rodriguez,  S.,  Ashworth,  L.,  Lopezaraiza-Mikel, 
M.,  Bastida,  J.  M.  &  Quesada,  M.  (2014)  A 
quantitative  review  of  pollination  syndromes: 
do  floral  traits  predict  effective  pollinators?. 
Ecology  Fetters,  17,  3,  388-400. 

RothweU,  G.  W.,  Scheckler,  S.  E.  &  GiUespie,  W. 

H.  (1989)  Elkinsia  gen.  nov.,  a  Late  Devonian 
gymnosperm  with  cupulate  ovules,  Botanical 
Gazette,  150,  2, 170-189. 


80 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


Ruhfel,  B.  R.,  Gitzendanner,  M.  A.,  Soltis,  P.  S., 
Soltis,  D.  E.  &  Burleigh,  J.  G.  (2014)  From 
algae  to  angiosperms—mferring  the  phylogeny 
of  green  plants  (Viridiplantae)  from  360  plastid 
genomes,  BMC  Evolutionary  Biology,  14, 1,  23. 

Saarela,  J.  M.,  Rai,  H.  S.,  Doyle,  J.  A.,  Endress,  P. 
K.,  Mathews,  S.,  Marchant,  A.  D.,  Briggs,  B.  G. 
&  Graham,  S.  W.  (2007)  HydateUaceae 
identified  as  a  new  branch  near  the  base  of  the 
angiosperm  phylogenetic  tree.  Nature,  446, 
7133,312-315. 

Sagan,  L.  (1967)  On  the  origin  of  mitosing  ceUs, 
Journal  of  Theoretical  Biology,  14,  3,  225-274. 

Sage,  R.  F.,  Christin,  P.-A.  &  Edwards,  E.  J. 
(2011)  The  C4  plant  lineages  of  planet  Earth, 
Journal  of  Experimental  Botanj,  62,  9,  3155-3169. 

Sanderson,  M.  J.  &  Doyle,  J.  A.  (2001)  Sources  of 
error  and  confidence  intervals  in  estimating  the 
age  of  angiosperms  from  rAL  and  18S  rDNA 
data,  American  Journal  of  Botany,  88,  8,  1499— 
1516. 

Schwartz,  R.  M.  &  Dayhoff,  M.  O.  (1978)  Origins 
of  prokaryotes,  eukaryotes,  mitochondria,  and 
chloroplasts,  199,  4327,  395^03. 

Scotland,  R.  W.  &  Wordey,  A.  H.  (2003)  How 
many  species  of  seed  plants  are  there?.  Taxon, 
52, 1, 101-104. 

Smith,  S.  A.,  Beaulieu,  J.  M.  &  Donoghue,  M.  J. 
(2010)  An  uncorrelated  relaxed-clock  analysis 
suggests  an  earlier  origin  for  flowering  plants. 
Proceedings  of  the  National  Academy  of  Sciences,  107, 
13,  5897-5902. 

Smith,  S.  A.  &  Donoghue,  M.  J.  (2008)  Rates  of 
molecular  evolution  are  linked  to  life  history  in 
flowering  plants.  Science,  322,  5898,  86-89. 

Soltis,  D.  E.,  Smith,  S.  A.,  CeRinese,  N.,  Wurdack, 
K.  J.,  Tank,  D.  C.,  Brockington,  S.  F.,  RefuMo- 
Rodriguez,  N.  F.,  Walker,}.  B.,  Moore,  M.  J.  & 
Carlsward,  B.  S.  (2011)  Angiosperm  phylogeny: 
17  genes,  640  X2cm,  American  Journal  of  Botany,  98, 
4,  704-730. 

Soltis,  P.  S.  &  Soltis,  D.  E.  (2004)  The  origin  and 
diversification  of  angiosperms,  American  Journal 
of  Botany,  91, 10, 1614—1626. 

Soltis,  P.  S.,  Soltis,  D.  E.  &  Chase,  M.  W.  (1999) 
Angiosperm  phylogeny  inferred  from  multiple 
genes  as  a  tool  for  comparative  biology.  Nature, 
402,  6760, 402-404. 

Soltis,  P.  S.,  Soltis,  D.  E.,  Savolainen,  V.,  Crane,  P. 
R.  &  Barraclough,  T.  G.  (2002)  Rate 


heterogeneity  among  lineages  of  tracheophytes: 
integration  of  molecular  and  fossil  data  and 
evidence  for  molecular  Hving  fossRs,  Proceedings 
of  the  National  Academy  of  Sciences,  99,  7,  4430— 
4435. 

Takhtajan,  A.  L.  (1980)  Outiine  of  the 
classification  of  flowering  plants 
(MagnoHophyta),  The  Botanical  Review,  46,  3, 
225-359. 

ThuRler,  W.,  Lavergne,  S.,  Roquet,  C., 
Boulangeat,  L,  Lafourcade,  B.  &  Araujo,  M.  B. 
(2011)  Consequences  of  cRmate  change  on  the 
tree  of  Rfe  in  Europe,  Nature,  470,  7335,  531- 
534. 

Turcotte,  M.  M.,  Davies,  T.  J.,  Thomsen,  C.  J.  M. 
&  Johnson,  M.  T.  J.  (2014)  Macroecological  and 
macroevolutionary  patterns  of  leaf  herbivory 
across  vascular  plants,  Proceedings  of  the  Rnyal 
Society  of  Eondon  B:  Biological  Sciences,  281,  1787, 
20140555. 

van  der  Niet,  T.  «&  Jolinson,  S.  D.  (2012) 
Phylogenetic  evidence  for  poRinator-driven 
diversification  of  angiosperms.  Trends  in  Ecology 
Cn  Evolution,  27,  6,  353-361. 

Wang,  X.,  Duan,  S.,  Geng,  B.,  Cui,  J.  &  Yang,  Y. 
(2007)  Is  Jurassic  Schmeissneria  an  angiosperm?, 
Acta  Palaeontologica  Sinica,  46, 4, 490. 

Welch,  J.  J.  &  Bromham,  L.  (2005)  Molecular 
dating  when  rates  vary,  Trends  in  Ecology 
Evolution,  20,  6,  320-327. 

Wettstein,  R.  (1907)  Handbuch  der  systematischen 
Botanik,  2  edn.,  Franz  Deuticke,  Leipzig. 

Wickett,  N.  J.,  Mirarab,  S.,  Nguyen,  N.,  Warnow, 
T.,  Carpenter,  E.,  Matasci,  N.,  Ayyampalayam, 
S.,  Barker,  M.  S.,  Burleigh,  J.  G.  & 
Gitzendanner,  M.  A.  (2014) 
Phylotranscriptomic  analysis  of  the  origin  and 
early  diversification  of  land  plants,  Proceedings  of 
the  National  Academy  of  Sciences,  111,  45,  E4859— 
E4868. 

Winter,  K.-U.,  Becker,  A.,  Munster,  T.,  Kim,  J.  T., 
Saedler,  H.  &  Theissen,  G.  (1999)  MADS-box 
genes  reveal  that  gnetophytes  are  more  closely 
related  to  conifers  than  to  flowering  plants. 

Proceedings  of  the  National  Academy  of  Sciences,  96, 
13,  7342-7347. 

Wolfe,  K.  H.,  Li,  W.-H.  &  Sharp,  P.  M.  (1987) 
Rates  of  nucleotide  substitution  vary  greatly 
among  plant  mitochondrial,  chloroplast,  and 


81 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Foster  —  History  of  Flowering  Plants 


nuclear  DNAs,  Proceedings  of  the  'National  Academy 
of  Sciences,  84,  24,  9054—9058. 

Xi,  Z.,  Liu,  L.,  Rest,  J.  S.  &  Davis,  C.  C.  (2014) 
Coalescent  versus  concatenation  methods  and 
the  placement  of  AmboreUa  as  sister  to  water 
lilies.  Systematic  Bio logjj,  63,  6,  919-932. 

Zanne,  A.  E.,  Tank,  D.  C.,  CornweU,  W.  K., 
Eastman,  J.  M.,  Smith,  S.  A.,  Fitzjohn,  R.  G., 
McGlinn,  D.  ].,  O’Meara,  B.  C.,  Moles,  A.  T., 
Reich,  P.  B.,  Doyer,  D.  L.,  Soltis,  D.,  Stevens, 
P.,  Westoby,  M.,  Wright,  L,  Aarssen,  L.,  Benin, 
R.,  Calaminus,  A.,  Govaerts,  R,  Hemmings,  F., 
Leishman,  J.,  Soltis,  P.  S.,  Swenson,  N.  G., 
Warman,  L.  &  Beaulieu,}.  M.  (2014)  Three  keys 
to  die  radiation  of  angiosperms  into  freezing 
environments.  Nature,  506,  7486,  89-92. 

Zeng,  L.,  Zhang,  Q.,  Sun,  R,,  Kong,  H.,  Zhang, 
N.  &  Ma,  H.  (2014)  Resolution  of  deep 


angiosperm  phylogeny  using  conserved  nuclear 
genes  and  estimates  of  early  divergence  times, 
Nature  Communications,  5, 4956. 

Zhong,  B.,  Yonezawa,  T.,  Zhong,  Y.  & 
Hasegawa,  M.  (2010)  The  position  of  Gnetales 
among  seed  plants:  overcoming  pitfaUs  of 
chloroplast  phylogenomics.  Molecular  Biolog)i  and 
'Evolution,  21, 12,  2855-2863. 

Zuckerkandl,  E.  &  Pauling,  L.  (1962)  "Molecular 
disease,  evolution  and  genic  heterogeneity.",  in 
Kasha,  M.  &  Pullman,  B.  (eds.)  Horizons  in 
Biochemistry.,  Academic  Press.,  New  York,  189— 
225. 


82 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  83.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010083-01 


Tliesis  abstract 

Adherence  to  self-management  and  psychological  distress  in 
women  with  breast  cancer-related  lymphoedema 

Jessica  Alcorso 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Macquarie  University,  Sydney,  Australia 


Nonadherence  to  breast  cancer-related 
lymphoedema  self-management  is  sub- 
optimal.  In  addition,  women  with  breast 
cancer-related  lymphoedema  experience 
psychological  distress  associated  with  this 
chronic  illness.  Adopting  a  social-cogni¬ 
tive  theoretical  framework,  the  aim  of  this 
thesis  is  to  identify  cognitive  and  affective 
predictors  of  adherence  to  self-management 
behaviours  and  predictors  of  psychological 
distress  in  women  living  with  breast  cancer- 
related  lymphoedema.  To  achieve  this  aim, 
a  longitudinal  study  was  conducted  that 
measured  adherence  to  self-management 
behaviours,  psychological  distress,  and 
cognitive  and  affective  factors  at  baseline, 
6-  and  12-months.  An  additional  cross- 
sectional  study  was  conducted  to  identify 
lymphoedema  therapists’  and  affected 
women’s  beliefs  about  barriers  to  adherence 
to  self-management.  The  findings  from 
the  empirical  studies  on  adherence  suggest 
that  cognitive  and  affective  factors  are  not 
informative  for  understanding  self-man¬ 
agement  behaviour  in  women  with  breast 
cancer-related  lymphoedema.  Furthermore, 
a  disconnect  between  therapists’  and  affec¬ 
tive  women’s  beliefs  about  barriers  to  self¬ 
management  was  identified,  with  therapists 
believing  more  strongly  than  the  affected 
women  that  financial  cost,  time,  concerns 
about  appearance,  difficulty  accessing  treat¬ 


ment,  insufficient  knowledge,  and  physical 
limitations  negatively  impact  adherence.  In 
contrast,  a  number  of  cognitive  and  affective 
factors  significantly  predicted  distress.  Based 
on  the  results  from  the  longitudinal  study,  an 
online  self-compassion  based  writing  activ¬ 
ity  was  developed  to  minimise  distress  and 
body  image  disturbance  in  this  population  of 
lymphoedema-affected  women.  The  online 
intervention  received  moderate  to  high  user 
acceptability  ratings  from  women  affected 
with  breast  cancer-related  lymphoedema 
suggesting  the  potential  viability  of  this 
intervention.  In  sum,  the  findings  from 
this  thesis  have  important  implications  for 
researchers  and  health  professionals.  Regard¬ 
ing  self-management,  medical  characteristics 
and  knowledge  were  identified  as  important 
factors  for  identifying  women  at  risk  of  non¬ 
adherence.  In  addition,  it  may  be  beneficial 
to  screen  women  for  symptoms  of  psycho¬ 
logical  distress  and  body  image  disturbance 
in  order  to  identify  who  may  benefit  from 
additional  psychosocial  support. 

Jessica  Alcorso, 

Department  of  Psychology, 

Macquarie  University, 

Sydney  NSW  2109AUSTRALIA 

Email:  jessica.alorso@mq.edu.au 


83 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  84.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010084-01 

Thesis  abstract 

A  social  psychological  examination  of  factors  shaping 
career  and  education  aspirations  through  childhood  and 

adolescence 

Nathan  Berger 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  University  of  Newcastle,  Newcastle, 

Australia 


Young  people  often  are  asked  what  they 
want  to  be  when  they  grow  up.  What  fac™ 
tors  influence  their  responses  to  this  most 
common  of  questions?  This  study  used 
theoretical  perspectives  from  social  and 
vocational  psychology,  including  Gottfred- 
sons  (1981,  2002)  career  circumscription 
and  compromise  theory,  to  investigate  the 
formation  of  career  aspirations  during  pri¬ 
mary  and  secondary  schooling.  A  particu¬ 
lar  emphasis  was  the  relationship  between 
social  cognition  and  socioeconomic  status 
(SES)  is  SES  associated  with  young  peo¬ 
ple  s  thinking  about  careers-related  identity 
questions?  The  study  drew  on  data  gathered 
during  the  first  three  years  (2012-2014)  of 
the  Aspirations  Longitudinal  Study  (ALS) 
in  the  State  of  New  South  Wales,  Australia. 
Students  in  Years  3-11  were  sampled  in  an 
accelerated  longitudinal  design,  whereby 
three  cohorts  completed  a  comprehensive 
career  aspirations  questionnaire  for  three 
years.  The  sample  comprised  7,462  ques¬ 
tionnaires  from  5j304  students.  In  addi¬ 
tion  to  the  questionnaires,  the  ALS  accessed 
standardised  demographic  and  literacy/ 
numeracy  data  held  by  the  state  for  each 
student.  To  examine  the  influence  of  stu¬ 
dents’  social-cognitive  styles  on  their  career 
aspirations,  they  also  completed  a  modified 


version  of  Berzonsky  et  ah  s  (2013)  Identity 
Style  Index  as  part  of  the  2014  questionnaire. 
The  latent  class  mixture  modelling  (LCMM) 
technique  was  used  to  analyse  the  acceler¬ 
ated  longitudinal  data.  LCMM  identified 
four  discrete  change  trajectories  in  the  pres¬ 
tige  of  career  aspirations  during  nine  years 
of  schooling.  Students’  identity  styles  were 
found  to  differ  between  SES  backgrounds, 
with  high  SES  students  more  information- 
oriented  and  less  diffiise/ avoidant  when  deal¬ 
ing  with  identity  questions  compared  to  low 
SES  students.  Identity  styles  also  differed  by 
SES  background  within  the  LCMM  trajec¬ 
tories,  with  high  aspiring  low  SES  students 
more  information-oriented  and  less  diffuse/ 
avoidant  than  their  low  aspiring  peers.  The 
implications  of  these  findings  for  theory 
research,  and  practice  are  discussed. 

Dr  Nathan  Berger, 

School  of  Education, 

University  of  Newcastle, 

Newcastle  NSW  2300 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  n.berger@westernsydney.edu.au 


84 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  20 1 6, 
pp.  85-86.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010085-02 


Thesis  abstract 

The  cognitive  and  neural  mechanisms  of  joint  attention: 
a  second  person  approach 

Nathan  Caruana 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Macquarie  University,  Sydney,  Australia 


This  project  investigated  the  cognitive  and 
neural  mechanisms  of  joint  attention  in  typi¬ 
cal  development  and  in  high-functioning 
autism.  A  novel  gaze-contingent  virtual  real¬ 
ity  tasks  was  developed  and  implemented 
in  a  number  of  studies  using  a  range  of 
techniques,  including  functional  magnetic 
resonance  imaging  (fMRI),  event-related 
potentials  (ERP)  and  eye  tracking. 

The  first  aim  of  this  project  was  to  develop 
an  experimental  joint  attention  paradigm 
that  (1)  captured  both  the  initiating  and 
responding  functions  of  joint  attention,  (2) 
could  be  applied  in  both  behavioural  and 
neurophysiological  experiments,  (3)  pro¬ 
vided  full  experimental  control  over  non¬ 
social  task  demands,  and  (4)  established  an 
ecologically  valid  context  for  joint  attention 
interactions. 

Chapter  2  of  this  dissertation  reviewed 
the  current  approaches  for  measuring  joint 
attention  in  experimental  settings  and  intro¬ 
duced  a  new  virtual  reality  paradigm  of  joint 
attention  that  achieves  both  experimental 
control  and  ecological  validity.  Critical 
issues  associated  with  the  measurement  of 
joint  attention  are  discussed. 

The  second  aim  of  this  project  was  to  use 
this  paradigm  to  investigate  the  neural  and 
cognitive  mechanisms  that  support  joint 


attention  in  typical  development  and  in 
autism. 

In  Chapter  3,  fMRI  was  used  to  investi¬ 
gate  the  neural  correlates  that  were  unique 
and  common  to  initiating  and  responding 
to  joint  attention  bids  in  13  adults  with  typi¬ 
cal  development.  A  right-lateralised  fronto- 
temporoparietal  network  was  found  to  be 
common  to  both  initiating  and  respond¬ 
ing  to  joint  attention  bids  and  comprised 
the  middle  frontal  gyrus  (MFC),  inferior 
frontal  gyrus  (IFG),  middle  temporal  gyrus 
(MTG),  precentral  gyrus,  posterior  superior 
temporal  sulcus  (pSTS),  temporoparietal 
junction  (TPJ)  and  precuneus.  Compared 
to  responding  to  joint  attention  bids,  ini¬ 
tiating  joint  attention  was  associated  with 
additional  activation  of  the  MFG,  IFG,  TPJ 
and  precuneus. 

In  Chapter  4,  eye-tracking  was  used  to 
investigate  joint  attention  performance  in  17 
adults  with  high-functioning  autism  and  1 7 
adults  with  typical  development  (controls). 
Individuals  with  autism  made  significantly 
more  errors  than  controls  when  initiating 
and  responding  to  joint  attention  bids. 

In  Chapter  5,  another  virtual  reality  para¬ 
digm  was  developed  and  employed  in  an 
event-related  potential  study  which  inves¬ 
tigated  the  time  course  of  neural  processes 
associated  with  evaluating  self-initiated  joint 


85 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Camana — Mechanisms  of  Joint  Attention 


attention  bids.  In  a  sample  of  19  partici¬ 
pants  with  typical  development,  centro-pari- 
etal  P350  and  P500  ERPs  were  significantly 
larger  when  gaze  shifts  resulted  in  the  avoid¬ 
ance,  rather  than  the  achievement  of  joint 
attention.  This  P350  and  P500  morphology 
was  absent  in  a  second  sample  of  1 9  partici¬ 
pants  who  completed  a  non-social  version  of 
the  same  task  in  which  arrows  replaced  the 
gaze  of  the  virtual  character. 

In  Chapter  6,  the  same  paradigm  was 
used  to  investigate  whether  the  P350  effect 
observed  in  Chapter  5  was  influenced  by 
participants’  beliefs  of  their  virtual  partner  s 


agency.  The  P350  effect  was  only  observed 
in  participants  who  believed  that  their  part¬ 
ner  was  controlled  by  a  human  (n  -  19),  and 
not  in  a  second  group  of  individuals  who 
were  informed  that  the  virtual  character 
was  controlled  by  a  computer  program  (n 
=  19). 

Nathan  Caruana, 

Department  of  Cognitive  Science, 
Macquarie  University, 

Sydney  NSW  2109 
Australia 

Email:  Nathan.caruana@mq.edu.au 


86 


Journal  dr  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  87.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010087-01 


Thesis  abstract 

Environmental  flows  at  work;  restoring  floodplain  wedands 
through  return  of  historical  conditions 

Samantha  I^therine  Dawson 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  the  University  of  New  South  Wales, 

Sydney,  Australia 


Wetlands  are  among  the  most  degraded 
ecosystems  worldwide,  demanding  effec¬ 
tive  restoration.  In  an  effort  to  ameliorate 
ecological  degradation  from  upstream  water 
diversions,  environmental  and  managed 
flows  are  increasingly  used  to  help  restore 
vegetation  communities.  Understanding 
of  factors  affecting  the  success  and  efficacy, 
however,  remains  limited  and  is  of  increasing 
urgency  as  this  type  of  restoration  becomes 
more  widespread.  I  investigated  the  capacity 
of  flooding,  including  environmental  flows, 
to  restore  wetland  flora  across  areas  varying 
in  degradation  from  historic  land-use. 

I  predicted  that  increasing  land-use  his¬ 
tory  (increasing  duration  and  decreasing 
time  since  land  use)  would  decrease  resto¬ 
ration  effectiveness,  while  increased  flood¬ 
ing  frequency  and  duration  should  improve 
restoration  outcomes.  A  case  study  was  used 
to  assess  vegetation  restoration:  a  floodplain 
wetland  with  fields  representing  a  land-use 
chronosequence,  flooded  through  environ¬ 
mental  flows,  in  the  Macquarie  Marshes  in 
the  Murray-Darling  Basin  of  south-eastern 
Australia.  I  examined  extant  vegetation,  soil 
seedbanks,  plant  trait  distributions  and  his¬ 
torical  vegetation  change  through  surveys  of 
plant  community  composition,  greenhouse 
seed  bank  germination,  fourth-corner  trait 
modelling  approaches  and  Landsat  imagery 
analysis. 


Composition  of  extant  herbaceous  veg¬ 
etation  correlated  with  both  land-use  history 
and  flooding,  while  extant  shrub  and  woody 
species  were  more  strongly  correlated  with 
land-use.  Within  seedbanks,  exotic  and  dis¬ 
turbance-adapted  species  were  associated  with 
increased  duration  and  decreased  time  since 
land-use  and  native  wetland  species  were  asso¬ 
ciated  with  opposite  land-use  practice  and 
increased  flooding.  Furthermore,  I  found  that 
there  was  capacity  within  the  soil  seed  bank 
to  engender  further  restoration  of  extant  veg¬ 
etation.  Trait  analyses  showed  native,  woody 
and  clonal  species  were  taking  the  longest  to 
restore,  especially  in  high  land  use  areas,  but 
this  may  be  ameliorated  through  increased 
inundation.  Landsat  analyses  demonstrated 
that  inundation  was  vital  to  restoration  and 
also  indicated  a  gradient  of  restoration  success, 
with  areas  of  less  land  use  history  (e.g.  clearing 
and  one  year  of  cultivation)  restoring  more 
quickly  than  longer  cultivation  durations.  In 
conclusion,  flooding  was  critical  to  achieving 
restoration  objectives,  with  higher  frequen¬ 
cies  increasing  efficacy,  but  increased  land-use 
intensity  compromises  restoration  rates  and 
possibly  success. 

Dr  Samantha  Dawson, 

Centre  for  Ecosystem  Science, 

University  of  New  South  Wales, 

Sydney  NSW  2052  Australia 
Email:  samantha.k.dawson@gmail.com 
Thesis:  handle.unsw.edu.au/ 1 959.4/ 56248 


87 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  88-89.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010088-02 

Thesis  abstract 

Quantitative  proteomic  analyses  of  isolate  variation  and 
virulence  in  Giardia  duodenalis 

Samantha  J  Emety 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Macquarie  University,  Sydney,  Australia 


Giardia  duodenalis  is  a  parasitic  protozoan 
with  a  global  human  infection  burden  of 
250  million,  and  is  therefore  the  largest  para¬ 
sitic  cause  of  diarrheal  disease  worldwide. 
Though  some  cases  are  asymptomatic,  giar¬ 
diasis  can  be  acute  and  chronic,  with  post¬ 
infection  sequellae  including  irritable  bowel 
syndrome,  chronic  fatigue,  obesity  and  type 
II  diabetes.  Importantly,  Giardia  is  problem¬ 
atic  in  children  under  the  age  of  five,  causing 
ill-thrift  and  failure-to-thrive.  In  addition, 
diarrheal  diseases  including  Giardia  consti¬ 
tute  the  second-leading  cause  of  mortality 
for  this  age  category  Giardia  has  a  direct  life 
cycle,  where  infective,  tetranucleated  cysts 
are  transmitted  via  the  faeco-oral  route,  and 
then  excyst  in  the  duodenum  into  virulent, 
flagellated  trophozoites.  The  prevalence  of 
the  parasite  is  also  due  to  its  wide  host  range, 
with  zoonotic  transfer  from  wild,  livestock 
and  domestic  animal  species  to  humans. 
Efforts  continue  to  define  the  mechanisms 
of  virulence  and  pathophysiology,  as  more 
research  is  needed  to  elucidate  the  relation¬ 
ship  between  host  and  parasite  factors. 

Advances  in  genetic  epidemiology  have 
defined  clear  assemblages  that  segregate 
phylogenetically  according  to  host  range, 
and  multiple  assemblage  and  subassem¬ 
blage  genome  sequences  are  now  available. 
These  genome  sequences  have  provided  the 
databases  necessary  for  bottom-up,  or  shot¬ 
gun,  proteomics,  and  as  such  have  expanded 


possibilities  for  quantitative  analyses  in  this 
parasite.  This  thesis  aimed  to  provide  a 
thorough  quantitative  proteomic  founda¬ 
tion  to  enhance  the  Giardia  research  field 
both  biologically  and  technically.  To  achieve 
this,  the  thesis  consists  of  four  experimental 
investigations  into  aspects  of  parasite  varia¬ 
tion  and  virulence,  all  of  which  have  gener¬ 
ated  quantitative  proteomic  data. 

Firstly,  two  different  protein  sample 
preparation  and  fractionation  methods 
were  compared  for  label-free  quantitative 
proteomics.  Tliese  were  applied  to  two  G. 
duodenalis  assemblage  A1  isolates  with  dif¬ 
ferent  phenotypes,  in  order  to  investigate 
possible  sources  of  isolate  variation.  The 
optimised  protocol  generated  from  this  ini¬ 
tial  investigation  was  applied  in  later  studies, 
which  are  also  contained  within  this  thesis. 
In  addition,  phenotypes  associated  with 
pathogenicity  correlated  with  up-regulation 
of  known  virulence  factors  in  Giardia. 

Following  this  initial  investigation,  quanti¬ 
tative  data  was  generated  using  the  same  label- 
free  approach  for  eight  assemblage  A  isolates, 
which  constituted  the  first  comprehensive 
proteomic  baseline  for  this  taxonomic  group. 
Isolates  of  diverse  host,  geographic  and  sub¬ 
assemblage  origins  were  analysed  using  mass 
spectrometry  to  characterise  their  common 
proteomes  and  isolate-specific  variations.  In 
addition,  both  the  A1  and  A2  subassemblage 
genome  databases  were  evaluated  for  peptide 


88 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  W^es 
Emery— “Variation  and  Virulence  in  Giardia  duodenalis 


to  spectrum  matching,  which  demonstrated 
the  importance  of  subassemblage  databases 
to  improve  identifications  from  the  Giardia 
variable  genome. 

The  third  study  investigated  isolate  varia¬ 
tion  in  the  biological  context  of  the  process 
of  differentiation  in  G.  duodenalis.  Label- 
free  quantitative  proteomics  was  used  to  ana¬ 
lyse  the  proteomes  of  cysts  and  trophozoites 
from  two  genome-alternate  subassemblage 
A1  isolates.  This  is  the  first  post-genomic 
analysis  of  the  life  cycle  beyond  the  genome 
isolate,  WB.  A  range  of  isolate-independent, 
universal  encystation  markers  were  identi¬ 
fied,  as  well  as  several  indications  of  isolate- 
specific  life-cycle  adaptations  which  may 
impact  reinfection  success  in  subsequent 
generations. 

Finally,  the  last  experiment  in  this  thesis 
investigated  disease  induction  using  in  vitro 
host-parasite  interaction  models  between 
intestinal  epithelial  cell  (lEC)  lines  and 
trophozoites.  We  used  isobaric  Tandem 
Mass  Tags  (TMT)  to  sensitively  quantitate 
changes  in  trophozoites  which  were  either 
allowed  to  attach  to  host-cell  monolayers, 
or  were  exposed  to  host-cell  secretions  alone. 


This  is  the  first  use  of  TMT  label  technolo¬ 
gies  for  quantitative  proteomics  in  Giardia. 
This  has  demonstrated  that  distinct  protein 
cascades  are  induced  by  both  levels  of  host- 
signals,  and  also  that  induction  of  virulence 
factors  is  not  dependent  on  parasite  attach¬ 
ment  to  host  cells. 

Through  these  experiments,  this  thesis 
demonstrates  that  a  range  of  quantitative 
proteomic  approaches  are  suitable  for  G. 
duodenalis,  all  of  which  are  capable  of  pro¬ 
viding  important  insight  into  key  aspects 
of  parasite  biology.  These  studies  provide 
an  important  proteomic  complement  for 
genomic  and  transcriptomic  data  currently 
available  in  the  literature,  which  is  necessary 
for  undertaking  a  systems  biology  approach 
to  understanding  Giardia. 

Dr  Samantha  J  Emery, 

Department  of  Chemistry  and  Biomolecular 
Sciences, 

Macquarie  University, 

Sydney  NSW  2109 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  emery.s(2)wehi. edu.au 


89 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  90-91.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010090-02 

Thesis  abstract 

Improving  labour  outcomes  in  the  creative  industries: 
the  role  of  creative  workers’  social  network  structure  and 
organisational  business  acumen 

Benjamin  Farr-Wharton 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Southern  Cross  University,  Lismore, 

Australia 


Individuals  who  work  in  artistic,  cultural 
and  creative  fields  (henceforth  creative 
workers)  are  increasingly  conceptualised  as 
a  labour  force.  Under  this  conceptualisa¬ 
tion,  creative  workers  are  seen  to  contribute 
positively  to  significant,  national  economic 
indicators  such  as  Gross  Domestic  Product 
and  innovation  indices.  However,  a  grow¬ 
ing  body  of  research  indicates  that,  as  a 
labour  force,  ‘creative  workers’  experience 
particularly  poor  labour  outcomes^  insofar  as 
they  typically  work  longer  hours,  for  rela¬ 
tively  lower  incomes,  and  have  very  little 
job  security. 

The  theoretical  concepts  provided  by  the 
Resource-Based  View  (RBV)  of  the  firm  and 
Bourdieu’s  theories  concerning  social  and 
cultural  capital,  and  the  field  of  cultural  pro¬ 
duction,  are  used  in  this  thesis  to  examine 
the  impact  of  organisational  business  acumen 
and  social  network  structure  on  the  labour 
outcomes  (exploitation,  labour  precarity  and 
earnings  satisfaction)  of  creative  workers.  The 
research  adopts  a  mixed  methods  approach 
that  encompasses  an  initial  pilot  case  study 
using  social  network  analysis,  followed  by  an 
explanatory  quantitative-qualitative  design. 
The  study  is  situated  within  an  Australian 
context,  and  a  total  of  three  hundred  people 


were  involved  in  the  data  collection  for  the 
sum  of  these  three  research  phases. 

Results  from  the  quantitative  and  quali¬ 
tative  research  indicate  that  organisational 
business  acumen  and  social  network  structure 
significantly  reduce  the  labour  precarity  of 
creative  workers.  In  addition,  organisational 
business  acumen  significantly  reduces  per¬ 
ceptions  of  exploitation,  as  well  as  enhances 
the  earnings  satisfaction  of  sampled  creative 
workers. 

This  research  is  innovative  and  impor¬ 
tant  in  a  number  of  ways.  For  practitioners, 
results  from  this  thesis  highlight  the  signifi¬ 
cance  of  both  social  network  structure  and 
organisational  business  acumen  as  resources 
that  positively  impact  the  labour  outcomes 
of  creative  workers.  For  policy  makers, 
the  research  encourages  the  development 
of  new  policy  instruments  to  support  the 
diffusion  of  organisational  business  acumen 
across  the  creative  labour  force,  in  order 
to  enhance  the  efficiency  of  the  creative 
sector.  For  theory,  the  research  suggests 
that  creative  workers  are  no  longer  subject 
to  a  dichotomous  arts’  or  ‘market’  mode  of 
production,  but  compromise  business  prac¬ 
tices  and  artistic  pursuit  to  seek  sustainable 
outcomes.  For  the  field  of  network  analysis, 
the  research  offers  new  quantitative  instru- 


90 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Farr-Wharton— Labour  Outcomes  in  the  Creative  Industries 


ments  (specifically  catering  for  the  context 
of  the  network-centric  creative  sector)  to 
measure  the  impact  of  network  structures 
on  performance  measures. 


Dr  Benjamin  Farr-Wharton 
School  of  Business  and  Tourism 
Southern  Cross  University 
Lismore  NSW  2480 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  128154@uts.edu.au 


91 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  92-93.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010092-02 


Thesis  abstract 

Dim  and  dimmer:  the  production  and  difhision 
of  the  natural  sciences  in  Australia 
between  the  1770s  and  the  2010s 

Lynnette  Hicks 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Macquarie  University,  Sydney,  Australia 


Despite  growing  public  concerns  around 
socio-scientific  problems  and  the  significance 
of  these  problems  to  everyday  life,  there  is  a 
dearth  of  sociological  literature  addressing 
the  production  and  diffusion  of  the  natural 
sciences  in  Australia.  In  particular,  critical 
analyses  of  scientific  knowledge  production 
and  diffusion  relative  to  the  actions  of  the 
state,  the  market  and  civil  society  are  largely 
absent.  This  thesis  sets  out  to  mitigate  this 
situation  by  contributing  a  critical  histori¬ 
ography  of  scientific  knowledge  production 
and  diffusion  as  it  relates  to  Australia  since 
white  settlement.  It  is  anticipated  that  this 
work  will  open  up  the  topic  for  further  aca¬ 
demic  research  and  rational  debate. 

This  thesis  explores  the  production  and 
diffusion  of  scientific  knowledge  through  the 
lens  of  social  dynamics  that  have  emerged  in 
Australia  between  the  1770s  and  the  2010s. 
The  research  relies  primarily  on  the  theoreti¬ 
cal  work  of  Max  Weber  in  order  to  identify 
and  analyse  the  conception  of  rationality 
and  its  application  to  social  action  that  is 
present  in  the  policy  and  praxis  of  the  natu¬ 
ral  sciences  in  Australia.  In  particular  the 
relationships  between  the  state,  the  market 
and  civil  society  are  analysed  using  secondary 
data  drawn  from  published  histories,  offi¬ 
cial  documents  and  the  formal  policies  and 


practices  of  the  state  and  the  market  during 
this  period. 

A  tripartite  analytical  model  has  been  cre¬ 
ated  specifically  for  this  thesis  and  is  utilised 
to  trace  scientific  knowledge  production  and 
diffusion  through  the  transformative  social 
processes  associated  with  instrumentalism ^ 
bureaucratisation,  developmentalism,  envi¬ 
ronmentalism^  postmodernism  and  neoliber¬ 
alism.  Rationality  is  applied  in  three  ways:  as 
non-instrumental  science  produced  to  further 
human  understandings  of  the  natural  world 
and  to  promote  the  development  of  civil 
society;  as  pre-instrumental  science  produced 
by  the  state  to  in  order  to  develop  markets 
and  for  other  instrumental  purposes  such  as 
national  defence  strategies;  and  as  instrumen¬ 
tal  scientific  knowledge  produced  by  the  par¬ 
ticipants  in  the  market  expressly  to  enhance 
their  own  position  in  the  market. 

Tfie  research  reveals  that  instrumental 
rationality  has  been  an  enduring  concept  in 
the  policy  and  praxis  of  the  natural  sciences 
in  Australia.  Moreover,  this  thesis  finds  that  a 
strong  tension  is  often  present  between  non¬ 
instrumental  notions  of  scientific  knowledge 
and  those  practices  that  are  predominantly 
instrumental.  Through  each  of  the  periods 
studied  the  state  and  the  market  have  been 
close  confederates,  often  working  together 


92 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Hicks— The  Natural  Sciences  in  Australia 


to  realize  instrumental  outcomes  through 
the  knowledge  produced  by  natural  science. 
In  particular,  administrative  and  economic 
ends  are  seen  to  be  primary;  ends  associated 
with  more  normative  intentions,  such  as  the 
nurturing  of  civil  society,  have  been  regularly 
overlooked  in  favour  of  strictly  instrumental 
aspirations.  This  continuing  instrumental¬ 
ity  has  altered  the  relationships  between  the 
state,  the  market  and  civil  society  during 
each  period  studied.  On  the  current  tra¬ 
jectory,  the  policy  and  praxis  of  the  natural 


sciences  in  Australia  may  yet  begin  to  com¬ 
promise  the  sovereignty  of  that  nation  state 
and  the  authority  of  its  citizenry. 

Dr  Lynnette  Hicks, 

Department  of  Sociology, 

Macquarie  University, 

Sydney  NSW  2109 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  lyn.hicks@mq.edu.au 
lyn.hicks@bigpond.com 


93 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  94.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010094-01 

Thesis  abstract 

Pale  Communion:  whiteness,  masculini^  and  nationhood 
in  heavy  metal  scenes  in  Norway,  South  Africa  and  Australia 

Catherine  Hoad 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Macquarie  University,  Sydney,  Australia 


In  response  to  the  current  dynamics  of  the 
Global  Metal  model,  this  thesis  draws  atten¬ 
tion  to  how  whiteness  maintains  an  invisibi- 
lised  instrumental  hegemony  within  heavy 
metal  music,  even  as  research  on  the  genre 
continues  to  grow.  I  address  the  complex 
problem  of  how  whiteness  is  represented  in 
heavy  metal  scenes  and  practices,  both  as  a 
site  of  academic  inquiry  and  force  of  cul¬ 
tural  significance.  I  argue  that  the  whiteness 
and  white  heteromasculinity  of  heavy  metal 
emerges  in  disparate  locales  as  expressions  of 
distinct  nationalist  projects.  This  research 
addresses  the  national  specificity  with  which 
whiteness  is  valorised  in  heavy  metal  scenes, 
and  how  disparate  national  identities  are 
tacitly  and  explicitly  tied  to  white  hetero¬ 
masculine  identity. 

This  thesis  negotiates  scholarly  ways  of 
addressing  whiteness  in  heavy  metal  that 
move  beyond  discussions  of  demographics, 
virtuosity  and  spectacular  racism.  I  analyse 
how  the  normalisation,  construction  and 
performance  of  whiteness,  masculinity  and 
nationhood  within  heavy  metal  scenes  can 
have  profound,  pervasive  and  systematic 
oppressive  consequences.  The  objective 
of  my  thesis  is  therefore  to  unveil  the  (in) 
visibility  of  whiteness  within  heavy  metal 
scenes,  and  indicate  how  such  whitenesses 
are  deployed  within  particular  countries,  as 
both  explicit  political  violence  and  instru¬ 
mental  hegemony.  The  quest  in  pointing  to 
the  fragmentation  and  multiplicity  of  white¬ 


nesses  across  three  different  countries  is  to 
deconstruct  the  structure  of  white  hegemony, 
and  call  into  question  the  strategic  political 
position  that  emerges  in  treating  white  selves 
as  a  uniform  category. 

This  research  maps  the  matrix  of  white¬ 
ness,  masculinity  and  nationhood  through 
which  heavy  metal  scenes  across  Norway, 
South  Africa  and  Australia  have  produced 
and  defended  national  identity.  I  distinguish 
three  key  forms  of  white  nationalism- — Nor¬ 
way’s  monstrous  nationalism,  in  which  the 
nation  is  constructed  as  terrifying  and  atavis¬ 
tic;  South  Africa’s  resistant  nationalism,  which 
responds  to  post-Apartheid  claims  of  white 
victimhood;  and  Australia’s  banal  nationalism, 
which  consecrates  mundanity  as  an  authentic 
national  condition.  Such  constellations  of 
whiteness,  masculinity  and  nationhood  have 
enabled  tacit  and  explicit  constructions  of 
exclusionary  communities  formed  through 
collective  memory  and  territory.  These  scenes 
are  demonstrative  of  the  ways  in  which  white 
inflections  inform  the  practices  of  both  heavy 
metal  scenes  and  the  specifically  local  white¬ 
nesses  manifest  within  them. 

Dr  Catherine  Hoad, 

Department  of  Media,  Music,  Communica¬ 
tions  and  Cultural  Studies, 

Macquarie  University, 

Sydney  NSW  2109 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  catherine.hoad@mq.edu.au 


94 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  95.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010095-01 


Thesis  abstract 

Interhemispheric  asymmetry  of  global  warming: 
the  role  of  ocean  dynamics 

David  Karel  Hutchinson 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  the  University  of  New  South  Wales, 

Sydney,  Australia 


Global  surface  air  temperature  is  increasing 
due  to  rising  greenhouse  gases.  This  warming 
has  occurred  at  a  faster  rate  in  the  Northern 
Hemisphere  (NH)  than  the  Southern  Hemi¬ 
sphere  (SH)  and  the  asymmetry  of  warming 
between  hemispheres  is  predicted  to  con¬ 
tinue  throughout  the  2 1  st  Century.  Several 
factors  contribute  to  this  interhemispheric 
asymmetry,  including  the  greater  propor¬ 
tion  of  land  in  the  NH  and  the  northward 
transport  of  heat  by  the  ocean.  This  thesis 
focuses  on  the  role  of  ocean  dynamics  in  set¬ 
ting  the  warming  asymmetry,  using  several 
modelling  approaches. 

First,  the  impact  of  the  Antarctic  Cir¬ 
cumpolar  Current  (ACC)  on  the  interhemi¬ 
spheric  warming  asymmetry  is  investigated. 
The  role  of  the  ACC  is  isolated  by  comparing 
warming  experiments  in  a  global  coupled 
climate  model  with  and  without  a  land  bar¬ 
rier  across  Drake  Passage  (DP).  With  DP 
closed,  the  asymmetry  in  sea  surface  tem¬ 
perature  (SST)  warming  is  reduced,  due  to 
the  presence  of  a  subpolar  gyre,  and  a  lower 
Antarctic  sea  ice  extent. 

Second,  the  asymmetry  of  warming  is 
examined  when  moving  from  coarse  (1°)  to 
eddy-permitting  (0.25°)  ocean  resolution. 
We  use  an  idealised  coupled  model  with  a 
60°  sector  ocean  domain,  comprising  one 
basin  with  Atlantic-like  bathymetry  and  an 
ACC  channel.  A  larger  high  latitude  SST 
asymmetry  develops  in  the  0.25°  model  than 


the  1°  model,  both  in  control  runs  and  in 
warming  scenarios.  The  larger  warming 
asymmetry  in  the  0.25°  model  is  caused  by 
stronger  boundary  current  heat  transport 
and  reduced  NH  sea  ice.  The  SH  warming  is 
less  sensitive  to  the  resolution  change,  since 
eddy  heat  transport  differences  between 
the  models  are  small  compared  with  mean 
flow  heat  transport  differences.  When  SH 
westerly  winds  are  enhanced,  the  warming 
asymmetry  increases,  with  greater  upwelling 
of  cool  water  in  the  Southern  Ocean  and 
greater  warming  in  the  NH. 

Finally  the  impact  of  realistic  bathymetry 
is  explored  in  the  sector  climate  model.  The 
Atlantic-like  sector  model  is  compared  with 
a  flat  bottom  rectangular  model  in  similar 
experiments.  The  Atlantic  and  rectangular 
models  have  similar  control  climates,  how¬ 
ever  the  rectangular  models  have  a  stronger 
subpolar  gyre  in  the  NH  in  the  absence  of 
bathymetry.  In  warming  experiments,  the 
rectangular  models  develop  warming  and 
cooling  regions  in  the  NH,  while  the  Atlantic 
models  have  no  significant  cooling  regions. 
The  Atlantic  models  exhibit  greater  sensitiv¬ 
ity  of  ACC  transport  to  wind  forcing. 

Dr  David  Hutchinson, 

Climate  Change  Research  Centre, 
University  of  New  South  Wales, 

Sydney  NSW  2052  AUSTRALIA 
Email:  david.hutchinson@geo.su.se 
Thesis:  handle.unsw.edu.au/ 1 959.4/55380 


95 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  \o\.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  96.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010096-01 


Thesis  abstract 

Conscious  and  not-conscious  processing  of 
visual  mismatch  negativity 

Bradley  N.  Jack 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Southern  Cross  University,  Lismore, 

Australia 


The  general  aim  of  my  thesis  is  to  investi¬ 
gate  conscious  and  not-conscious  process¬ 
ing  of  sequences  of  stimuli  that  yield 
visual  mismatch  negativity  (vMMN),  a 
well-established  brain  signature  of  predic¬ 
tion  and  prediction-error.  vMMN  is  typi¬ 
cally  observed  in  the  oddball  paradigm:  an 
infrequent  visual  stimulus— a  deviant,  is 
randomly  and  unpredictably  presented  in  a 
sequence  of  more  frequent  visual  stimuli — 
the  standards.  vMMN  is  a  negative  compo¬ 
nent  of  event-related  potentials  (ERPs),  and 
is  seen  most  clearly  in  the  difference  wave: 
the  ERP  for  the  deviant  minus  the  ERP  for 
the  standard,  between  150  and  400  ms  after 
stimulus  onset. 

To  investigate  conscious  and  not-con¬ 
scious  processing  of  vMMN,  I  conducted 
four  electroencephalography  (EEG)/ERP 
experiments.  In  Experiment  1,  I  showed 
that  it  is  easier  to  find  neural  correlates  of 
visual  consciousness — differences  in  brain 
activity  between  conscious  and  not-con¬ 
scious  visual  stimuli,  with  cardinal  gratings 
than  with  oblique  gratings.  In  Experiment  2, 
I  showed  that  a  source  of  information  about 
which  we  are  not-conscious,  eye-of-origin 
(utrocular)  information,  yields  a  reliable 
vMMN.  In  Experiment  3, 1  hid  my  deviants 
from  visual  consciousness  using  binocular 


rivalry  suppression,  and  found  that  the  size 
of  vMMN  is  smaller  to  that  elicited  by  the 
same  stimulus  when  it  is  conscious  during 
binocular  rivalry  dominance.  In  Experiment 
4,  I  hid  my  standards  and  deviants  from 
visual  consciousness  using  continuous  flash 
suppression  (CFS),  and  found  that  the  size 
of  vMMN  is  bigger  than  that  elicited  by  the 
same  stimuli  when  they  are  conscious. 

My  results  are  consistent  with  the  notions 
that  our  brains  establish  predictive  models 
of  visual  perception  about  regular  visual 
input,  that  our  brains  are  constantly  testing 
the  reliability  of  these  models,  and  that  our 
brains  update  these  models  when  something 
unexpected  occurs.  My  results  also  show  that 
these  processes  are  independent  of  visual 
consciousness.  I  conclude  that  visual  con¬ 
sciousness  is  not  necessary  to  elicit  vMMN, 
confirming  that  vMMN  is  an  automatic 
brain  response. 

Dr  Bradley  N.  Jack 

School  of  Health  and  Human  Science 

Southern  Cross  University 

Lismore  NSW  2480 

AUSTRALIA 

Email:  bradley.jack@unsw.edu.au 


96 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  97.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010097-01 


Thesis  abstract 

White  matter  microstructural  decline  and 
cognitive  performance  in  older  adults: 
the  influence  of  cardiovascular  health 

Todd  Jolly 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  University  of  Newcastle,  Newcastle, 

Australia 


Age-related  cognitive  decline  is  well  docu¬ 
mented,  especially  in  memory,  speed  of 
processing  and  executive  functions.  Struc¬ 
tural  brain  changes  are  also  well  documented 
but  often  do  not  directly  map  onto  the  mild 
cognitive  decline  seen  in  otherwise  healthy 
older  adults.  Recent  work  has  focused  on 
whether  cognitive  ageing  is  associated  with 
decline  in  the  strength  of  structural  con¬ 
nectivity  between  neural  regions,  using 
diflhision  magnetic  resonance  imaging 
(dMRI) .  Reduced  integrity  of  white  matter 
microstructure  across  the  whole  brain  and 
in  regions  of  interest,  as  measured  by  frac¬ 
tional  anisotropy  (FA),  has  been  shown  to 
be  associated  with  cognitive  decline  in  older 
adults  who  show  no  signs  of  dementia.  This 
thesis  uses  dMRI  tractography  to  examine 
the  association  between  multiple  measures  of 
white  matter  microstructure  across  the  whole 
brain  and  in  18  major  white  matter  tracts 
and  cognitive  performance  on  a  range  of 
tasks  that  vary  in  process  specificity.  Seventy 
non-demented  older  adults  (aged  43-87y) 
with  varying  degree  of  white  matter  disease 
completed  a  comprehensive  cognitive  and 
imaging  assessment.  Cognitive  functioning 
was  assessed  at  three  levels:  Firstly,  global 
cognitive  functioning  was  assessed  using  the 
Montreal  Cognitive  Assessment  (MoCA). 
Then  through  the  use  of  standardised  neu¬ 


ropsychological  tests,  more  specific  cogni¬ 
tive  domains  of  working  memory,  episodic 
memory,  executive  function  and  processing 
speed  were  assessed.  An  experimental  task 
switching  paradigm  was  then  used  to  assess 
more  specific  components  of  executive  func¬ 
tion  relating  to  proactive  and  reactive  con¬ 
trol  processes.  These  showed  that  ability  to 
detect  the  impact  of  tract-specific  changes 
in  white  matter  microstructure  on  cognitive 
performance  was  dependent  on  the  specifi¬ 
city  of  the  cognitive  test.  Although,  irrespec¬ 
tive  of  the  level  of  cognitive  assessment,  the 
relationship  between  decline  in  white  matter 
microstructural  integrity  and  cognitive  per¬ 
formance  was  specific  only  to  participants 
with  poor  cardiovascular  health.  These  find¬ 
ings  suggest  that  cognitive  and  brain  ageing 
profiles  in  older  adults  vary  as  a  function  of 
cardiovascular  health  and  have  strong  impli¬ 
cations  for  theories  of  cognitive  ageing.  They 
also  emphasise  the  importance  of  cardiovas¬ 
cular  health  in  prevention  or  delay  in  onset 
of  cognitive  decline  in  old  age. 

Dr  Todd  Jolly, 

School  of  Psychology, 

University  of  Newcastle, 

Newcastle  NSW  2300 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  Todd.Jolly@uon.edu.au 


97 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  98-99.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010098-02 


Thesis  abstract 


Achieving  change  in  student  assessment  in  Vietnamese 
teacher  training  institutions 


Gam  Thi  Hong  Luong 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Southern  Cross  University,  Lismore, 

Australia 


The  role  of  student  assessment  in  shaping 
learning  outcomes  is  well  established.  In 
Vietnam,  there  is  a  developing  consensus  at 
official  levels  that  reform  of  student  assess¬ 
ment  practices  in  higher  education  institu¬ 
tions  is  required.  In  2006  and  2007,  the 
Ministry  of  Education  and  Training  issued 
Decisions  seeking  to  encourage  higher  edu¬ 
cation  institutions  to  make  more  use  of  stu¬ 
dent  assessment  methods  likely  to  support 
activity-based  and  self-directed  approaches 
to  learning.  To  date,  however,  Vietnamese 
universities  and  colleges  have  been  remark¬ 
ably  slow  to  respond.  They  continue  to  rely 
on  traditional  standardised  tests  that  pro¬ 
mote  rote  learning  and  do  little  to  develop 
critical  thinking  or  problem-solving  skills 
among  learners. 

The  present  investigation  seeks  to  provide 
an  understanding  of  the  beliefs,  values  and 
attitudes  towards  student  assessment  of  a 
group  of  lecturers  and  educational  managers 
from  three  teacher  training  universities  in 
Vietnam.  Its  purpose  is  to  throw  light  on  the 
conditions  affecting  their  ability  and  willing¬ 
ness  to  reform  student  assessment  practices 
at  their  institutions.  Theoretical  perspec¬ 
tives  on  student  assessment  from  empiri¬ 
cal  research  in  developed  higher  education 
systems  inform  the  investigation,  and  three 
theories  of  educational  change  are  drawn 
upon  in  seeking  to  identify  the  factors  that 


might  impact  on  the  student  assessment 
reform  process  in  higher  education  institu¬ 
tions  in  Vietnam. 

An  ethnographic  approach  is  taken  to  the 
collection  of  data,  and  Naturalistic  Inquiry 
(Lincoln  &  Cuba,  1985)  provides  a  meth¬ 
odological  framework  for  the  investigation. 
Ethnographic  interviews  were  conducted 
with  24  experienced  members  of  academic 
staff  from  across  the  three  site  institutions. 
TEese  participants  were  selected  using  a 
‘snowbair  sampling  technique  whereby  each 
was  recommended  by  a  colleague  as  being 
interested  in  and  experienced  with  issues  in 
student  assessment.  The  interview  data  were 
analysed  by  means  of  thematic  analysis,  with 
particular  regard  taken  to  ensure  the  trust¬ 
worthiness  of  the  findings. 

Three  distinct  groups  of  participants  are 
identified.  For  three  of  the  participants,  atti¬ 
tudes  to  teaching  and  student  assessment 
were  strongly  teacher-centred,  supportive  of 
traditional  standardised  methods  of  student 
assessment,  and  shaped  by  beliefs  that  stu¬ 
dents  should  be  obedient,  passive  learners. 
These  participants  had  a  limited  understand¬ 
ing  of  the  range  of  approaches  to  student 
assessment:  they  were  unwilling  to  make 
any  changes  in  terms  of  how  they  assessed 
student  learning.  For  13  of  the  participants, 
however,  there  was  recognition  of  the  need 
to  reform  student  assessment  practices: 


98 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Luong— Change  in  Student  Assessment 


these  participants  expressed  a  willingness 
to  change  their  own  assessment  practices, 
but  they  felt  constrained  from  doing  so 
because  of  a  perceived  lack  of  expertise  and 
because  they  saw  that  many  more  hours  of 
work  would  be  required  to  do  so  effectively 
This  group,  therefore,  had  not  implemented 
any  significant  changes.  The  third  group 
of  eight  participants  aspired  to  reform  the 
ways  in  which  students  were  assessed:  they 
actively  implemented  measures  intended  to 
achieve  effective  reform.  They  were  more 
inclined  than  any  of  the  other  participants 
to  value  their  students  as  learners.  They  also 
claimed  to  be  strongly  supportive  of  the  role 
and  importance  of  formative  assessment. 

The  investigation  points  to  the  importance 
of  achieving  an  alignment  between  policy, 
leadership  and  practice  in  order  to  achieve 
enduring  educational  change.  This  align¬ 
ment  requires  persistent  effort  to  be  directed 
at  ensuring  that  all  relevant  stakeholders 
are  properly  informed  about  the  goals  and 
objectives  of  desired  change.  It  also  requires 


them  to  have  the  resources  needed  to  engage 
meaningfully  in  the  change  process  by  imple¬ 
menting  continuous  assessment  and  forma¬ 
tive  feedback  to  learners  about  their  learning 
progress.  They  must  also  have  opportunities 
to  converse  collaboratively  with  their  peers 
about  why  and  how  assessment  practice 
needs  to  be  improved. 

Achieving  a  more  enlightened  approach 
to  student  assessment  on  a  national  scale  in 
Vietnam’s  higher  education  system  appears 
for  the  time  being  to  remain  a  distant  pros¬ 
pect.  This  investigation  does,  however,  pro¬ 
vide  insights  into  what  might  need  to  be 
done  to  make  the  aspiration  more  achievable, 
more  rapidly. 

Dr  Gam  Thi  Hong  Luong 
School  of  Education 
Southern  Cross  University 
Lismore  NSW  2480 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  gamluong2012@yahoo.com 


99 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  100.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010100-01 


Thesis  abstract 

Zone  of  impeachment:  a  post-Foucauldian  analysis  of 
controlled  operations  law  and  pohcy 

Brendon  Murphy 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  University  of  Newcastle,  Newcastle, 

Australia 


This  thesis  presents  a  Foucauldian  analy¬ 
sis  of  Australian  controlled  operations  law. 
The  purpose  was  to  extend  current  doctrinal 
scholarship  by  exploring  the  discursive  forces 
that  shape  this  highly  invasive  and  contro¬ 
versial  investigative  power.  This  thesis  con¬ 
tends  that  the  present  doctrinal  understand¬ 
ing  is  incomplete,  and  largely  unaware  of  the 
epistemological  forces  operating  within  law 
and  policy.  By  deploying  a  Foucauldian  ana¬ 
lytic  we  can  extend  our  understanding  of  the 
complex  relationship  between  knowledge 
systems,  discourse,  power  and  law. 

Through  the  deployment  of  a  nomadic, 
grounded  genealogy  in  the  analysis  of  con¬ 
trolled  operations  Second  Reading  Speeches, 
this  research  found  that  the  governing  ration¬ 
alities  of  controlled  operations  law  and  policy 
is  linked  to  an  imperative  logic  dominated 
by  discourses  of  risk,  audit  and  exceptions. 
This  dynamic  explains  why  controlled  opera¬ 
tions  legal  architecture  and  policy  is  in  its 
current  form.  Far  from  being  a  reaction  to 
the  decision  in  Ridgeway,  controlled  opera¬ 
tions  law  is  part  of  a  legal  and  cultural  shift 
in  law  enforcement,  characterised  by  com¬ 
plex  relationships  between  risk,  rights,  law 


and  citizenship.  The  controlled  operation  is 
revealed  as  a  form  of  apparatus:  a  technology 
of  truth  and  power,  facilitated  by  law. 

This  insight  allows  us  to  re-imagine  the 
relationship  between  law,  rights,  citizenship 
and  sovereignty  in  late  modernity.  In  this 
environment  the  investigative  apparatus  of 
the  controlled  operation  creates  a  field  of 
governance  within  the  private  space  of  liberal 
citizenship,  revealing  the  true  character  of 
citizenship  in  late  modernity  as  a  zone  of 
impeachment  ■”  a  location  in  which  rights 
are  fragile  and  open  to  perpetual  potential 
derogation  and  modification.  In  this  zone 
the  rights  attached  to  liberal  conceptions 
of  citizenship  are  increasingly  the  subject 
of  subordination  to  a  risk  imperative  and  a 
logic  of  exception. 

Dr  Brendon  Murphy, 

Department  of  Business  and  Law, 
University  of  Newcastle, 

Newcastle  NSW  2300 
Australia 

Email:  brendon.murphy@newcastle.edu.au 


100 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  101-102.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010101-02 

Thesis  abstract 


The  effects  and  mechanisms  of  the  therapeutic  hypothermia 
on  intracranial  pressure  regulation  following  ischaemic 

stroke  in  rats 


Lucy  Mujrtha 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  University  of  Newcastle,  Newcastle, 

Australia 


Background:  Intracranial  pressure  (ICP)  rises 
to  dangerous  levels  2  to  5  days  after  large 
ischaemic  stroke.  ICP  following  small  stroke 
is  not  routinely  monitored,  although  animal 
data  suggests  ICP  rises  24  hours  following 
small  experimental  stroke.  Cerebral  oedema 
has  been  thought  to  be  the  primary  cause  for 
ICP  elevation.  This  assumption  may  have 
risen  because  ICP  has  only  been  monitored 
in  patients  with  large  infarct  and  oedema 
volumes.  Since  small  ischaemic  infarcts 
cause  less  cerebral  swelling,  ICP  elevation 
may  be  the  result  of  a  different  mechanism(s). 
Recent  human  imaging  data  indicates  that 
patients  deteriorating  soon  after  minor 
stroke  do  so  on  the  basis  of  cerebral  col¬ 
lateral  blood  flow  failure.  Until  now  there 
has  not  been  a  plausible  explanation  for  this 
'collateral  failure”.  Long-duration  hypother¬ 
mia  has  been  shown  to  lower  ICP  in  patients. 
Long  durations  of  cooling  increase  the  risk  of 
infection  and  rebound  ICP  during  rewarm¬ 
ing.  Short-duration  hypothermia  has  shown 
overwhelming  efficacy  in  animal  models  of 
stroke  but  has  not  been  tested  in  humans.  I 
hypothesise:  that  ICP  increases  at  24  hours 
after  small  stroke;  that  this  rise  is  not  due  to 
cerebral  oedema;  that  ICP  elevation  reduces 
collateral  blood  flow;  and  that  short-duration 
moderate  or  mild  hypothermia  prevents  ICP 
elevation  post-stroke.  Methods:  An  epidural 


ICP  monitoring  technique  was  developed. 
Experimental  ischaemic  stroke  (middle  cer¬ 
ebral  artery  occlusion)  was  performed  in 
Long  Evans,  outbred  Wistar  and  Sprague- 
Dawley  rats  and  ICP  was  monitored.  Infarct 
and  oedema  volumes  were  calculated  using 
wet-dry  weight  calculations,  histology  or  in 
vivo  magnetic  resonance  imaging.  Collat¬ 
eral  blood  flow  was  visualized  using  fluores¬ 
cent  microspheres  through  a  closed  cranial 
window  and  recorded  using  a  high-speed 
microscope-mounted  recording  camera. 
Short-duration  moderate  (32.5°C)  or  mild 
(35°C)  hypothermia,  or  normothermia 
(37°C)  was  administered  1  hour  post-stroke. 
Results:  Mean  ICP  was  9.1  ±  5.2  mm  Hg  at 
baseline  (pooled  -  all  animals).  ICP  was  sig¬ 
nificantly  elevated  24  hours  post-stroke  in  all 
normothermic  animals  (40.3  ±16  mm  Hg, 
pooled  normothermic  animals,/?  <  0.0001 
vs.  baseline).  Mean  infarct  volume  was 
22.6  ±  17.5%  of  contralateral  hemisphere. 
Oedema  volumes  were  small  and  were  not 
correlated  with  ICP  post-stroke  (r^  =  0.09, 
p  =  0.15).  There  was  a  strong  correlation 
between  ICP  elevation  and  collateral  blood 
flow  decrease  (r  =  -0.62,/?  <  0.0001).  Early 
intervention  of  short-duration  hypothermia 
completely  prevented  ICP  rise  post-stroke 
(10.3  ±6.5  mm  Hg,  pooled  hypothermic 
animals  at  24  hours,/?  <  0.0001  vs,  normo- 


101 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  'V^es 
Murtha — Effects  of  TJierapeutic  Hypothermia 


thermic  animals  at  24  hours).  Conclusions: 
In  this  thesis,  I  have  presented  data  that  con¬ 
tradicts  the  accepted  wisdom  in  several  ways 
and  has  important  implications  for  patients 
with  stroke.  It  suggests  that  ICP  could  be 
elevated  in  patients  with  small  stroke  and 
that  a  factor  other  than  oedema  is  the  pri¬ 
mary  cause  of  this  ICP  elevation.  The  data 
also  suggest  that  ICP  elevation  following 
stroke  is  the  likely  mechanism  of  collateral 
failure  leading  to  neurological  deterioration 
in  stroke  patients.  Finally,  I  have  demon¬ 
strated  that  short-duration  hypothermia  is 
an  effective  ICP  preventative  treatment  fol¬ 
lowing  experimental  stroke,  and  suggests  that 


short-duration  hypothermia  clinical  stud¬ 
ies  in  humans  is  warranted.  These  findings 
suggest  that  a  fundamental  rethink  of  ICP 
regulation  post-stroke  is  necessary  and  have 
potentially  important  and  exciting  implica¬ 
tions  for  the  future  treatment  of  stroke  and 
stroke-in-progression. 

Dr  Lucy  Murtha, 

School  of  Biomedical  Sciences  and  Pharmacy, 
University  of  Newcastle, 

Newcastle  NSW  2300 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  Lucy.Murtha@newcastle.edu.au 


102 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
p.  103.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010103-01 

Thesis  abstract 

Palaeontolog)^,  taxonomy  and  biostratigraphy  of  Cambrian 
assemblages  from  the  Pertaoorrta  Group,  Amadeus  Basin, 

Northern  Territory 

Patrick  Mark  Smith 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Macquarie  University,  Sydney,  Australia 


The  Amadeus  Basin  is  a  large  sedimentary 
province  in  central  Australia  that  covers  an 
approximate  area  of  170,000  square  kilome¬ 
tres.  Despite  the  known  occurrence  of  fos¬ 
sils  from  the  majority  of  stratigraphic  units 
within  the  Cambrian  Pertaoorrta  Group 
there  is  a  dearth  of  published  palaeonto¬ 
logical  data,  including  no  comprehensive 
biostratigraphy. 

Presented  as  part  of  this  thesis  is  a  detailed 
investigation  into  three  formations  span¬ 
ning  the  Cambrian  Series  2“3  units  of  the 
Pertaoorrta  Group.  The  oldest  of  these,  the 
Tempe  Formation  and  Giles  Creek  Dolos- 
tone  have  previously  been  regarded  as  coeval. 
Examination  of  specimens  from  both  drill- 
core  and  outcrop  material  from  these  two 
formations  revealed  a  considerable  diversity 
of  new  and  biostratigraphically-informative 
fossils.  The  described  taxa  provide  evidence 
that  these  two  sedimentary  units  were  depos¬ 
ited  at  different  times.  The  Tempe  Formation 
(in  Paper  1)  belongs  to  the  Ordian,  whereas 
the  fauna  from  the  Giles  Creek  Dolostone 
(in  Papers  2—4)  is  distinctly  younger  and  cor¬ 
relates  with  the  overlying  early  Templetonian. 
These  results  suggest  that  the  current  regional 
stratigraphic  scheme  needs  to  be  amended. 


The  youngest  stratigraphic  unit  examined 
in  this  thesis  is  the  Goyder  Formation  (in 
Paper  5).  The  initial  age  estimates  for  this 
formation  were  based  solely  on  vague  reports 
of  trilobites.  Our  collections  demonstrate 
that  the  Goyder  Formation  contains  a  highly 
diverse  fossil  fauna  with  at  least  20  different 
trilobite  taxa.  This  assemblage  indicates  a 
late  Mindyallan  age  (equivalent  to  Cambrian 
Series  3,  Guzhangian)  within  the  Glyptag- 
nostus  solidotus  Zone. 

Detailed  logging  and  sampling  through 
formations  in  the  Pertaoorrta  Group  has 
allowed  for  precise  ages  where  little  to  no 
biostratigraphic  data  had  previously  been 
available.  These  ages  have  facilitated  the 
development  of  a  preliminary  quantitative 
biostratigraphy  of  the  Gambrian  Series  2-3 
portion  of  the  Amadeus  Basin,  thus  permit¬ 
ting  more  accurate  intra-  and  interbasinal 
correlation. 

Patrick  Mark  Smith, 

Department  of  Biology, 

Macquarie  University, 

Sydney  NSW  2109 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  Patrick.mark.smith.  1 990@gmail.com 


103 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  vol.  149,  parts  1  &  2,  2016, 
pp.  104-105.  ISSN  0035-9173/16/010104-02 

Thesis  abstract 

Targeted,  one-to-one  instruction  in  whole-number 
arithmetic:  a  framework  of  key  elements 

Thi  Le  Trln 

Abstract  of  a  thesis  for  a  Doctorate  of  Philosophy  submitted  to  Southern  Cross  University,  Lismore, 

Australia 


In  Australia,  although  there  has  been  strong 
advocacy  for  individualised  intervention 
programs,  there  is  a  limited  research  litera¬ 
ture  available  that  focuses  on  teacher-student 
interactions  and  teaching  practices  related  to 
one-to-one  instruction.  This  investigation 
seeks  to  address  that  gap.  Its  aim  is  to  iden¬ 
tify  and  illuminate  the  nature  of  Key  Ele¬ 
ments  of  one-to-one  instruction  that  expert 
tutors  use  when  interacting  in  intensive, 
one-to-one  instruction  of  whole-number 
arithmetic  with  Years  3  and  4  students.  A 
Key  Element  is  a  micro-instructional  strategy 
that  is  the  smallest  unit  of  analysis  of  highly 
interactive  one-to-one  instruction. 

The  investigation  draws  on  data  collected 
within  the  framework  of  the  Mathematics 
Intervention  Specialist  Program  (Wright, 
Ellemor-Collins  &  Lewis,  2011).  From 
this  source,  approximately  33  hours  of  video 
recordings  of  teaching  sessions  involving  four 
teachers  and  six  students  were  analysed. 

The  theoretical  perspective  underpinning 
the  investigation  is  interpretative.  Within 
this  perspective,  a  phenomenological 
approach  was  used  to  gain  insight  into  the 
essence  of  the  Key  Elements  of  one-to-one 
intervention  teaching.  A  standard  method 
for  analysing  the  data,  that  is,  ‘close  observa¬ 
tion”  (Van  Manen,  1997,  p.  68),  in  which 
the  Key  Elements  are  viewed  as  the  central 


phenomenon  requiring  exploration  and 
understanding,  was  employed.  The  analytical 
techniques  described  by  Van  Manen  (1990, 
1997),  and  further  elaborated  as  procedures 
for  phenomenological  analysis  by  Hycner 
(1999),  were  applied.  As  well,  the  investi¬ 
gation  utilised  methodological  approaches 
described  by  Cobb  and  Whitenack  (1996), 
and  by  Powell,  Francisco,  and  Maher  (2003), 
for  analysing  large  sets  of  video  recordings. 

Twenty-five  Key  Elements  were  identified 
and,  for  each,  a  deeply  layered  description 
was  developed.  As  well,  a  comprehensive 
framework  for  analysing  one-to-one  instruc¬ 
tion  was  conceptualised.  The  framework 
shows  how  Key  Elements  can  be  used  to 
analyse  intensive,  one-to-one  instruction  in 
whole-number  arithmetic. 

The  investigation  advances  understand¬ 
ing  about  teacher-student  interactions  and 
teaching  practice  in  intensive,  one-to-one 
interventions.  Understanding  the  Key 
Elements  leads  to  more  effective  ways  to 
characterise  the  instructional  strategies  that 
teachers  utilise  in  one-to-one  intervention 
teaching.  The  framework  developed  con¬ 
stitutes  an  extension  of  the  current  body  of 
theoretical  knowledge  about  targeted  one-to- 
one  intensive  intervention  in  whole-number 
arithmetic.  It  will  inform  teachers  who  are 
working  with  low-attaining  students  by 


104 


Journal  &  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
Tran— -Instruction  in  Whole-Number  Arithmetic 


providing  useful  information  about  teacher- 
student  interaction  in  mathematical  inter¬ 
ventions,  which  in  turn  may  illuminate  how 
particular  teaching  intervention  practices 
influence  student  learning  outcomes  (Tran 
&  Wright,  2014b). 


Dr  Thi  Le  Tran 
School  of  Education 
Southern  Cross  University 
Lismore  NSW  2480 
AUSTRALIA 

Email:  tranlethicdsp(2)yahoo.com 


105 


Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
The  2016  programme  of  events  —  Sydney 

Held  at  the  Union,  Universities  and  Schools  Club,  25  Bent  St,  Sydney  unless  otherwise  stated. 


Wed  3  Feb 

1240^^  Ordinary 
Meeting 

RSNSW 

Scholarship 

winners 

Adrian  Dudek 

Charles  Forster 

Yevgeny  Stadnik 

Australian  National 

University 

University  of  Sydney 

University  of  New  South 
Wales 

Mon  25  Feb 

The  Four 

Societies  Lecture 

Professor  Robert  Clark  AO 
FAA  Dist  FRSN 

Chak  of  Energy  Strategy  and 
Policy,  University  of  New 
South  Wales 

Australian  Energy  Policy 

Held  in  conjunction  with  the  Nuclear  Engineering  Panel  of  the  Sydney  Branch  of 
Engineers  Australia,  the  Australian  Nuclear  Association  and  the  Australian 

Institute  of  Energy. 

Held  at  Hamilton  and  Parkes  Rooms,  Level  47,  MLC  Centre,  King  and 

Castlereagh  St. 

Wed  4  Mar 

124Lt  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Dr  Len  Fisher 

Visiting  Fellow  in  Physics, 
University  of  Bristol 

How  to  win  an  IgNobel  Prize 
and  other  adventures  in 
communicating  science 

Wed  16  Mar 

Joint  Lecture  of 
the  Australian 
Institute  of 
Physics  and  the 
RSNSW 

Professor  Ron  Grunstein 
Woolcock  Institute  of 

Medical  Research, 

University  of  Sydney  and 

Royal  Prince  Alfred  Hospital, 
Head 

From  Snoring  to 
Somnambulism  — 

The  Mystery  of  the  Sleeping 
Brain 

Joint  Meeting  with 
School,  Latham  T 

L  the  Australian  Institute  of  Physics,  held  at  Trinity  Grammar 
leatre,  119  Prospect  Road,  Summer  HiU 

Wed  6  April 

1242^^  Ordinary 
Meeting  and 

149*  Annual 
General  Meeting 

Dr  Donald  Hector  FRSN 
President  of  the  Royal  Society 
of  New  South  Wales 

Presidential  address:  Royal 
Society  of  NSW  —  relevance 
in  the  21st  century 

'i; 

Wed  4  May 

Annual  Dinner: 
Distinguished 
Fellow's  Lecture 
and  presentation 
of  the  Society's 
2016  awards 

Guests  of  honour:  The 

Society's  Vice-Regal  Patron, 

Flis  Excellency  General  The 
Honourable  David  Hurley  AC 
DSC  (Ret'd),  Governor  of 

New  South  Wales  and 

Em.  Professor  Eugenie 

Lumbers  AM  DistFRSN 

Science  Policy  and 

University  Research 

j  Wed  1  June 

1243^^  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Professor  Peter  Hiscock 

Tom  Austen  Brown  Professor 
of  Australian  Archaeology, 
University  of  Sydney 

The  curious  case  of  the 
scientist  in  cinema:  how 
Indiana  Jones  turns  out  to 
be  the  bad  guy! 

Wed  6  July 

1244th  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Dr  Bob  Young 

Associate  Professor  of 
Geoscience  (ret’d),  University 
of  Wollongong 

"Royal"  not  "Philosophical" 

-  W.B.  Clarke's  Inaugural 
Address  to  the  Royal  Society 
of  NSW 

Wed  3  Aug 

1245*  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Dr.  Barbara  Briggs,  Honorary 
Research  Associate  Royal 
Botanic  Gardens 

Celebrating  the  200* 

Birthday  of  Royal  Botanic 
Gardens:  A  Personal 

History  of  57  years  of 

Science 

Sydney  Science  Festival  lunchtime  science  talks 

Fri  12  Aug 

Sydney  Science 
Festival 

Professor  Mikhail 

Prokopenko,  University  of 
Sydney 

Complex  Systems  and 

Swarm  Intelligence 

Tu  1 6  Aug 

Sydney  Science 
Festival 

Dr  Brett  SummereU 

Royal  Botanic  Gardens 

The  Royal  Botanic  Gardens 
200th  Birthday 

,Wedl7Aug 

Sydney  Science 
Festival 

Em  Professor  Br^mn  Plibbert 
UNSW,  President  RSNSW 

Courts,  Criminals  and 
Chemistry:  Forensic  Science 
in  NSW 

Thu  1 8  Aug 

Sydney  Science 
Festival 

Professor  Pascal  Perez 
University  of  Wollongong 

Community-driven  Internet 
of  Things:  the  new 
revolution? 

Wed  7  Sep 

1246*  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Richard  NeviQe 

Ivlitchell  Dbrarian  and 

Dkector,  Education  & 
Scholarship  State  Dbrary  of 
NSW 

A  source  of  inspiration  and 
delight:  The  Mitchell  Library 

Wed  5  Oct 

1247*  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Professor  Itai  lanev 

School  of  Engineering, 
University  of  Sydney 

From  sand  and  rice  bubbles 
to  earthquakes  and 
volcanoes 

Thu  13  Oct 

2016  Dirac 
Lecture 

Duffield  Professor  Kenneth 
Freeman 

Australian  National  University 

Dark  Matter  in  the  Universe 

Wed  2  Nov 

1248*  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Professor  E.  James  Kehoe 
Professor  of  Psychology, 

UNSW 

Finding  the  Right  Course 
for  the  Right  Horse:  Recent 
Evidence-Based  Advances 
in  Instructional  Design 

Tue  29  Nov 

RSNSW  and 

Four  Academies 
Forum 

Government  House,  Sydney; 
hosted  by  his  Excellency 

General  The  Honourable 

David  Hurley  AC  DSC  (Ret’d) 
Governor  of  NSW  and  Patron 
of  the  Royal  Society  of  NSW 
at  Government  House 

Society  as  a  complex  system: 
Implications  for  Science, 
Practice  and  Policy  and 
Celebration  of  the  1 50* 
Anniversary  of  Royal 
Patronage 

Held  in  cooperation  with  the  Australian  Academy  of  Science,  the  Australian 
Academy  of  Technological  Sciences  and  Engineering,  the  Australian  Academy  of 
the  Humanities  and  the  Academy  of  Social  Sciences  in  Australia. 

Wed  7  Dec 

1249*  Ordinary 
Meeting 

Royal  Society  of  NSW  2016 

Jak  Kelly  Award: 

Matthew  Barr 

School  of  Mathematical  and 
Physical  Science,  Newcastle 
University 

Imaging  with  a  deft  touch  — 
The  scanning  helium 
microscope 

The  2015  programme  of  events  --  Southern  Highlands 

Held  at  the  Performing  Arts  Centre,  Chevalier  College,  Bowral. 


Thu  18  Feb 

Dr  Charley  Lineweaver 

School  of  Astronomy  &  Astrophysics 
and  Earth  Sciences,  Australian 

National  University 

Death  and  Nothingness:  Why  did 

Death  Evolve?  Why  is  there  Something 
Rather  than  Nothing? 

Sat  12  Mar 

Dr  Christian  Heim  and  Dr  CaroHne 
Heim 

Special  Event:  An  Afternoon  with 

Chopin  and  George  Sand 

Thu  21  Apr 

Prof  Gordon  Parker 

Scientia  Professor  of  Psychiatry, 

UNSW,  Executive  Director  of  the 

Black  Dog  Institute 

Winston  Churchill,  bipolar  disorder,  and 
the  Dardanelles  campaign 

Thu  1 9  May 

Dr  Kathleen  Riley 

Freelance  writer,  theatre  historian  and 
critic 

The  Science  of  Spontaneity:  Fred 

Astaire  as  the  Consummate  Craftsmen 

Thu  16  June 

Dr  Ken  McCracken 

Solar  physicist,  foundation  director  of 
CSIRO  Office  of  Space  Science  and  of 
CSIRO  Division  of  Mineral  Physics 

The  Sun,  Sunspots,  and  Space  Weather 

Thu  21  July 

Dr  David  Suhy 

Chief  Scientific  Officer,  Benitec 
Biopharma 

Silencing  Genes  for  Life 

Thu  1 8  Aug 

Ian  Skinner 

Neuroscience  Research  Australia 
(NeuRa) 

Chronic  Pain 

Thu  1 5  Sep 

Assoc  Prof  Tony  Masters 

Chair  of  the  Academic  Board, 

University  of  Sydney 

Sustainability  -  Chemical  Solutions  for  a 

Tricky  Problem 

Thu  20  Oct 

Prof  Gordian  Fulde 

Director  of  emergency  at  St  Vincent’s 
Hospital,  Senior  Australian  of  the  Year 
2016 

Do  we  have  a  problem?  —  Hospital 
emergency,  alcohol  and  drugs 

Thu  17  Nov 

Prof  Gordon  Wallace 

Director,  ARC  Centre  of  Excellence 
for  Electromaterials  Science, 

University  of  WoUongong 

BioPrinting:  3D  Printing  Parts  for 

Bodies 

f  Awards  for  2016 

The  Council  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  have  determined  to  make  the  following  awards  for 
2016: 

1.  Bdgeworth  David  Medal. 

Associate  Professor  Simon  Ho 

ARC  Queen  Elizabeth  II  FeUow,  School  of  Biological  Sciences,  University  of  Sydney. 

I  The  Edgeworth  David  Medal,  established  in  memory  of  Professor  Sir  Tannatt  William  Edgeworth  David  FRS, 
a  past  President  of  the  Society,  is  awarded  for  distinguished  contributions  by  a  young  scientist  under  the  age  of 
35  years. 

Associate  Professor  Simon  Ho  has  made  hugely  important  contributions  and  developed  new  methods  in  the 
field  of  ‘molecular  clocks'  in  biology  ~  a  way  of  estimating  evolutionary  rates  and  timescales  from  DNA 
sequences  using  statistical  models.  These  estimates  underpin  a  broad  range  of  studies  in  conservation  genetics, 
speciation  and  diversification,  domestication  of  animals  and  plants,  events  in  human  prehistory,  and  the 
population  dynamics  of  pathogens.  His  research  focuses  on  understanding  how  evolutionary  rates  vary  at  the 
:  genomic  level  and  estimating  the  timescale  of  the  Tree  of  Life.  These  are  fiindamental  goals  of  biological 
:  inquiry  because  they  deal  with  the  details  of  the  evolutionary  process. 

I  Simon  Ho’s  work  has  set  a  range  of  standards  in  the  field,  as  well  as  producing  methods  and  practises  that  are 
now  widely  used  by  researchers.  His  research  has  led  to  important  improvements  in  the  way  that  researchers 
:  estimate  evolutionary  timescales  using  genetic  and  genomic  data,  with  significant  consequences  for  our 
understanding  of  the  evolutionary  past. 

2.  History  and  Philosophy  of  Science  Medal 

i. 

5  Professor  Warwick  Anderson 

!  ARC  Laureate  Fellow  and  Professor  in  the  Department  of  History  and  the  Centre  for  Values,  Ethics  and  the 
I  Law  in  Medicine,  University  of  Sydney.  Additionally,  he  has  an  affiOiation  with  the  Unit  for  History  and 
I  Philosophy  of  Science  at  Sydney  University. 

[  The  Royal  Society  of  NSW  History  and  Philosophy  of  Science  Medal  was  established  in  2015  to  recognise 
t  outstanding  achievement  in  the  Idistory  and  Philosophy  of  Science.  The  medaUist  will  have  made  a  significant 
i  contribution  to  the  understanding  of  the  history  and  philosophy  of  science,  with  preference  being  given  to  the 
I  study  of  ideas,  institutions  and  individuals  of  significance  to  the  practice  of  the  natural  sciences  in  Australia. 

Professor  Anderson  is  a  medical  doctor  turned  historian,  who  has  made  important  contributions  to  the  history 
of  science,  medicine,  and  pubHc  health;  the  history  of  racial  thought  and  postcolonial  science  studies.  He  is  a 
Fellow  of  the  Academy  of  the  Social  Sciences,  and  won  the  2014  History  of  Science  Society's  Price/Webster 
Prize  for  the  article,  “Hybridity,  Race  and  Science:  The  Voyage  of  the  Zaca,  1934-1935." 

In  2014  Professor  Anderson,  with  immunologist  Ian  Mackay,  wrote  a  brilliant  and  original  book.  Intolerant 
Bodies:  A  Short  Histoty  of  Autoimmunity^  published  by  Johns  Hopkins  University  Press.  The  authors  foUow  the 
puzzle  of  autoimmunity  from  theory  to  laboratory  practice  to  individual  patients'  case  histories.  The  result  is  a 
compelling  study  of  concepts  in  action.  This  sophisticated  but  highly  readable  history  helps  close  the  gap 
between  medical  science  and  the  general  public's  understanding. 

3.  Clarke  Medal  for  Zoolog)j. 

Professor  Christopher  Dickman 

University  of  Sydney  School  of  Biological  Sciences. 

The  Clarke  Medal  was  established  to  acknowledge  the  contribution  by  Rev  William  Branwhite  Clarke  MA  FRS 
FGS,  Vice-President  of  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  from  1866  to  1878.  The  Medal  is  awarded 


annuaQy  for  distinguished  work  in  the  natural  sciences  of  geology,  botany  and  zoology  done  in  Australia  and  its 
Territories. 

Professor  Dickman’s  major  contributions  He  in  terrestrial  zoology  and  ecology.  He  has  long  been  curious 
about  the  factors  that  promote  and  maintain  biodiversity,  especially  among  land  mammals  and  other  terrestrial 
vertebrates.  For  the  last  35  years  he  has  focused  in  particular  on  understanding  the  forces  that  shape  the 
distribution  and  abundance  of  AustraHa’s  endemic  mammals  and  identifying  the  factors  that  are  causing  so 
many  species  to  decHne.  His  ground-breaking  work  on  AustraHa’s  desert  mammals  and  on  the  continent's 
Hitroduced  predators  have  gained  him  a  formidable  reputation  as  a  leading  national  and  international  authority 
on  mammaHan  ecology. 

4.  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  Scholarships. 

Adrian  Dudek  (AustraHan  National  University,  School  of  Mathematics) 

Yevgeny  Stadnik  (University  of  New  South  Wales,  School  of  Physics) 

Charles  Foster  (University  of  Sydney,  School  of  Botany) 

The  Council  of  the  Society  firnds  the  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  Scholarship  in  order  to  acknowledge 
outstanding  achievements  by  early-career  individuals  working,  in  a  science-related  field  within  New  South 
Wales  or  the  AustraHan  Capital  Territory,  towards  a  research  degree  in  a  science  related  field. 

Adrian  Dudek  is  working  in  number  theory  under  Dr  Trudgian  at  the  ANU.  During  his  PhD  he  has 
pubHshed  (or  had  accepted)  eight  papers  in  the  peer  reviewed  Hterature.  Plis  appHcation  explained  his  research 
thus:  “In  particular,  Tm  interested  in  the  elusive  tale  of  the  prime  numbers.  When  I  let  this  sHp  to  most 
people,  somewhat  tepid  memories  of  their  primary  school  days  are  horrificaUy  conjured.  However,  the  prime 
numbers  have  been  studied  for  thousands  of  years,  or  at  least  since  300BC,  when  the  great  Greek  geometer 
EucHd  proved  that  tliere  are  infinitely  many  of  them.  Since  such  ancient  times,  the  primes  have  attracted  the 
attention  of  curious  mathematicians  (and  other  characters)  for  one  reason:  it’s  extraordinarily  difficult  to 
understand  the  behaviour  of  the  prime  numbers.  For  Histance,  if  you  were  to  write  down  a  Hst  of  the  first  100 
prime  numbers  (a  rousing  exercise  for  a  Friday  night,  Tm  sure!),  you  would  not  be  able  to  find  an  intelHgible 
pattern.  That  being  said,  some  recent  spectacular  advances  in  number  theory  mean  that  the  prime  numbers  are 
becoming  less  elusive  and  more  understandable  ...” 

Yevgeny  Stadnik  works  with  Professor  Flambaum  FRSN  on  “Manifestations  of  Dark  Matter  and  Variation 
of  Fundamental  Constants  in  Atoms  and  Astrophysical  Phenomena”.  He  writes:  “My  project  is  on  the 
investigation  of  new  effects  produced  by  dark  matter  and  proposing  novel  ways  of  detecting  dark  matter.  We 
have  pubHshed  a  number  of  important  works  in  this  direction,  including  results  that  already  improve  on 
existing  sensitivities  in  the  detection  of  certain  types  of  dark  matter  by  up  to  15  orders  of  magnitude.  Our 
results  have  been  pubHshed  in  leading  physics  journals,  including  three  pubHcations  in  Physical  Review  Letters 
(which  is  the  most  highly  cited  physics  journal),  and  have  contributed  to  the  initiation  of  a  number  of  new 
laboratory  searches  worldwide.” 

Charles  Forster  is  a  botanist  working  with  our  Edgeworth  David  medaUist  Simon  Ho  on  a  project  “Using 
genome-scale  data  to  untangle  the  evolutionary  history  of  flowering  plants”.  A  University  of  Sydney  medalHst, 
Charles  has  been  able  to  estimate  the  timescale  of  evolution  of  a  range  of  plants  using  genomic  data.  His 
analyses  have  been  careful  and  comprehensive,  and  he  is  on  the  verge  of  pubHshing  his  outstanding  work  on 
this  topic.  This  is  in  addition  to  three  papers  from  his  honours  research  and  three  pubHshed  or  under  review. 
This  work  has  also  led  to  the  development  of  some  important  research  coUaborations  with  coUeagues  at  the  j 
Royal  Botanic  Gardens  (Sydney)  and  Universite  Paris-Sud  (France).  He  writes:  “I  have  provided  the  most 
comprehensive  combination  of  analyses  of  the  angiosperm  evolutionary  timescale  so  far.  The  results  I  have 
obtained  reflect  the  increasingly  common  finding  that  molecular  dating  estimates  predate  the  oldest  fossils  by  a 
non-trivial  amount  of  time,  up  to  70  mOHon  years  when  considering  mean  estimates.” 


5.  The  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales  and  A.ustralian  Institute  of  Physics  Jak  Kelly  A.ward. 

James  CoUess 

University  of  Sydney,  School  of  Physics 

The  Jak  Kelly  Award  is  awarded  joindy  with  the  Australian  Institute  of  Physics  (AIP)  to  the  best  PhD 
student  talk,  this  year  presented  to  a  joint  meeting  with  the  AIP  held  on  November  17  at  Trinity 
Grammar  School. 

James  CoUess  is  a  postgraduate  student  at  the  University  of  Sydney  currently  undertaking  his  PhD  under  the 
supervision  of  Professor  David  ReiUy.  His  research  focus  is  readout  and  control  techniques  for  GaAs  spin 
qubits.  James  hopes  his  research  wiU  influence  the  design  and  fabrication  of  reliable  multiqubit  gates.  His  talk 
was  entitled  “From  Quantum  Devices  to  Quanmm  Machines”.  It  explored  the  complexity  of  scaling  quantum 
processors  and  discussed  new  techniques  and  hardware  developed  to  meet  these  chaUenges.  In  particular, 
James  had  developed  new  methods  of  readout  that  aUow  the  dispersive  sensing  of  single-electrons  using 
integrated  sensors  and  the  capability  to  read  out  multiple  qubits  simultaneously.  A  scalable  control  scheme  is 
also  demonstrated  allowing  large  numbers  of  qubits  to  be  manipulated  with  a  small  number  of  input  signals. 

The  award  consists  of  an  engraved  plaque,  a  $500  prize  and  a  year's  membership  of  the  Society.  As  the  winner 
of  the  Jak  KeUy  award,  James  presented  his  talk  to  Royal  Society  on  the  of  November  at  the  Union, 
Universities  and  Schools  Club. 


Archibald  Liversidge: 

Imperial  Science  under  the  Southern  Cross 


Roy  MacLeod 

Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales,  in  association  with  Sydney  University  Press 

ISBN  9781-9208-9880-9 


Wlien  Archibald  Liversidge  first  arrived  at  the 
University  of  Sydney  in  1872  as  Reader  in 
Geology  and  Assistant  in  the  Laboratory,  he  had 
about  ten  students  and  two  rooms  in  the  main 
building.  In  1874,  he  became  Professor  of 
Geology  and  Mineralogy  and  by  1879  he  had 
persuaded  the  University  Senate  to  open  a 
Faculty  of  Science.  He  became  its  first  Dean  in 
1882. 

In  1880,  he  visited  Europe  as  a  tmstee  of  the 
Australian  Museum  and  his  report  helped  to 
establish  the  Industrial,  Technological  and 
Sanitary  Museum  which  formed  the  basis  of  tlie 
present  Powerhouse  Museum’s  collection. 
Liversidge  also  played  a  major  role  in  establishing 
the  A.ustralasian  A.ssociation  for  the  A.dvancement  of 
Science  which  held  its  first  congress  in  1 888. 

This  book  is  essential  reading  for  those 
interested  in  the  development  of  science  in 
colonial  Australia,  particularly  the  fields  of 
crystallography,  mineral  chemistry,  chemical 
geology  and  strategic  minerals  pokey. 


Archibald 

Liversidge 

Imperial 

Science 

under  the 

Southern 

Cross 


To  order  your  copy,  please  complete  the  Liversidge  Book  Order  Form  available  at: 

http://rovalsoc.org.au/pubHcations/books/McLeod  Liversidge  Order  Form.pdf  and  return  it  together 
with  your  payment  to: 

The  Royal  Society  of  NSW, 

(Liversidge  Book), 

PO  Box  576, 

Crows  Nest  NSW  1585, 

Australia 

or  contact  the  Society: 

Phone:  +61  2  9431  8691 

Fax:  +61  2  9431  8677 

Email:  info@royalsoc.org.au 


Information  for  authors 


Details  of  submission  guidelines  can  be  found  in  the  on-line  Style  Guide  for  Authors  at: 
http: / / rovalsoc.org.au/ publications / autlior  info.htm. 

Manuscripts  are  only  accepted  in  digital  format  and  should  be  e-mailed  to:  editor@rovalsoc.org.au 

The  templates  available  on  the  Journal  website  should  be  used  for  preparing  manuscripts.  Full  instructions  for  preparing 
submissions  are  also  ^ven  on  the  website. 

If  the  file-size  is  too  large  to  email  it  should  be  placed  on  a  CD-ROM  or  other  digital  media  and  posted  to: 

The  Honorary  Secretary  (Editorial), 

The  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales, 

PO  Box  576, 

Crows  Nest,  NSW  1585 
Australia 

Manuscripts  will  be  reviewed  by  the  Editor,  in  consultation  with  the  Editorial  Board,  to  decide  whether  the  paper  will  be 
considered  for  publication  in  the  Journal.  Manuscripts  are  subjected  to  peer  review  by  at  least  one  independent  reviewer. 
In  the  event  of  initial  rejection,  manuscripts  may  be  sent  to  other  reviewers. 

Papers  (other  than  those  specially  invited  by  the  Editorial  Board)  will  only  be  considered  if  the  content  is  either 
substantially  new  material  that  has  not  been  published  previously,  or  is  a  review  of  a  major  research  programme.  Papers 
presenting  aspects  of  the  historical  record  of  research  carried  out  within  Australia  are  particularly  encouraged.  In  the  case 
of  papers  presenting  new  research,  the  author  must  certify  that  the  material  has  not  been  submitted  concurrently  elsewhere 
nor  is  likely  to  be  published  elsewhere  in  substantially  the  same  form.  In  the  case  of  papers  reviewing  a  major  research 
programme,  the  author  must  certify  that  the  material  has  not  been  published  substantially  in  the  same  form  elsewhere  and 
that  permission  for  the  Society  to  publish  has  been  granted  by  aU  copyright  holders.  Letters  to  the  Editor,  Discourses, 
Short  Notes  and  Abstracts  of  Australian  PhD  theses  may  also  be  submitted  for  publication.  Please  contact  the  Editor  if 
you  would  like  to  discuss  a  possible  article  for  inclusion  in  the  Journal. 

The  Society  does  not  require  authors  to  transfer  the  copyright  of  their  manuscript  to  the  Society  but  authors  are  required 
to  grant  the  Society  an  unrestricted  licence  to  reproduce  in  any  form  manuscripts  accepted  for  publication  in  the  Journal 
and  Proceedings.  Enquiries  relating  to  copyright  or  reproduction  of  an  article  should  be  directed  to  the  Editor. 


Volume  149  Parts  1  &  2  2016 


CONTENTS 


Numbers  459  to  462 


Robert  E.  Marks:  Editorial. 

Presidential  Address 

Donald  C.  A.  Hector.  Presidential  address. 


SMITHSONIAN  LIBRARIES 


3  9088  01934  7483 


1 

5 


Refereed  Papers 

William  L.  Griffin,  Sarah  E.M.  Gain,  David  T.  Adams,  Vered  Toledo,  Norman  J.  Pearson  and  Suzanne  Y.  OReilly:  17 

Deep-earth  methane  and  mantle  dynamics:  insights  from  northern  Israel,  southern  Tibet  and  Kamchatka. 

Martin  G.  Banwell,  Benoit  Bolte,  Joshua  N  Buckler,  Ee  Ling  Chang,  Ping  Lan,  Ehab  S.  Taher,  Lorenzo  V  White  34 

and  Anthony  C.  Willis:  Chemoenzymatic  pathways  for  the  synthesis  of  biologically  active  natural  products. 

Address 

Ian  Castles:  The  curious  economist:  William  Stanley  Jevons  in  Sydney.  5 1 

Discourse 

Robert  E.  Marks:  William  Stanley  Jevons,  Fellow  of  the  Philosophical  Society  of  N.S.W,  1856-1859.  59 

RSNSW  Scholarship  Winner,  2015 

Charles  S.  P  Foster.  The  evolutionary  history  of  flowering  plants.  65 

PhD  Thesis  Abstracts 

Jessica  Alcorso:  Adherence  to  self-management  and  psychological  distress  in  women  with  breast  cancer-related  83 

lymphoedema. 

Nathan  Berger.  A  social  psychological  examination  of  factors  shaping  career  and  education  aspirations  through  84 
childhood  and  adolescence. 

Nathan  Caruana:  The  cognitive  and  neural  mechanisms  of  joint  attention:  a  second  person  approach.  85 

Samantha  Katherine  Dawson:  Environmental  flows  at  work;  restoring  floodplain  wetlands  through  return  of  87 

historical  conditions. 

Samantha  J.  Emery:  Quantitative  proteomic  analyses  of  isolate  variation  and  virulence  in  Giardia  duodenalis.  88 

Benjamin  Farr~Wharton:  Improving  labour  outcomes  in  the  creative  industries:  the  role  of  creative  workers’  90 

social  network  structure  and  organisational  business  acumen. 

Lynnette  Hicks:  Dim  and  dimmer:  the  production  and  diffusion  of  the  natural  sciences  in  Australia  between  the  92 
1770s  and  the  2010s. 

Catherine  Hoad:  Pale  Communion:  whiteness,  masculinity  and  nationhood  in  heavy  metal  scenes  in  Norway,  94 

South  Africa  and  Australia. 

David  Karel  Hutchinson:  Interhemispheric  asymmetry  of  global  warming:  the  role  of  ocean  dynamics.  95 

Bradley  N  Jack:  Conscious  and  not-conscious  processing  of  visual  mismatch  negativity.  96 

Todd  Jolly:  White  matter  microstructural  decline  and  cognitive  performance  in  older  adults:  the  influence  of  97 

cardiovascular  health. 

Gam  Thi  Hong  Lmng.  Achieving  change  in  student  assessment  in  Vietnamese  teacher  training  institutions.  98 

Brendon  Murphy:  Zone  of  impeachment:  a  post-Foucauldian  analysis  of  controlled  operations  law  and  policy.  100 

Lucy  Murtha:  The  effects  and  mechanisms  of  the  therapeutic  hypothermia  on  intracranial  pressure  regulation  101 

following  ischaemic  stroke  in  rats. 

Patrick  Mark  Smith:  Palaeontology,  taxonomy  and  biostratigraphy  of  Cambrian  assemblages  from  the  103 

Pertaoorrta  Group,  Amadeus  Basin,  Northern  Territory. 

Thi  Le  Tran:  Targeted,  one-to-one  instruction  in  whole-number  arithmetic:  a  framework  of  key  elements.  104 

Proceedings  106 

Awards  108 


Information  for  Authors  Inside  Back  Cover 


ISSN  0035-9173 


The  Royal  Society  of  New  South  Wales 
RO.  Box  576 

Crows  Nests  NSW  1585^  Australia 

info^royalsoc.org.au  (general) 
editor@royalsoc.org.au  (editorial) 
www.royalsoc.au 
www.facebook.com/ royalsoc 


"9 


770035 


917000 


Published  December  2016